JP7067584B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with means for preventing fraud against fraudulent activities (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26573

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the fraud prevention function . The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a good fraud prevention function .

The gaming machine according to claim 1 for achieving this object includes a gaming board used during a game, an inner frame in which one side that can accept the gaming board is opened, and the inner frame thereof. The front frame is provided with a front frame capable of closing one side, the front frame is provided with an arrangement means arranged in a path communicating between the game board and the outside, and the arrangement means is the game. A plate-shaped portion arranged below the board so as to intersect the path, a first extending portion extending downward from the plate-shaped portion, and a plate-shaped portion downward from the plate-shaped portion. A second extending portion that is extended toward the first extending portion and is arranged to face the first extending portion is provided, and the disposing means is visually recognized in a predetermined state in which the inner frame is not blocked by the front frame. The disposing means is arranged so as not to come into contact with the gaming board, the path is located between the front frame and the inner frame, and is located on the outer side of the path. The starting position is a specific position on the outer periphery of the front frame, the front frame comprises forming means formed of a metal material, and the disposing means corresponds to a predetermined position on the back side of the forming means. Arranged.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the fraud prevention function can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). 6 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVc line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. Is. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXXVa-LXXVa of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame opened with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a movable bundling member and a harness, (b) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a movable bundling member and a harness. It is a schematic back view schematically shown, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (c). (A) and (b) are the top schematic views of the front frame, the inner frame, the binding movable member and the harness which schematically show the binding movable member and the harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of the above. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board schematically showing the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are the front view of the ball launching unit which shows the delivery state of the ball by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the staging operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the staging operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the staging operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second staging member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd staging member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in eleventh embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlargement view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front view of the front frame. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right side view of the lower plate unit in the arrow L direction view, and (b) is a left side view of the lower plate unit in the arrow R direction view. It is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa of FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper staging apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper staging apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper staging apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper staging apparatus. (A) is a front view of the rear unit, and (b) is a front view of the illuminated board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illuminated substrate, a back support member, and an audio device in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241. FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illuminated substrate, a back support member, and an audio device in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241. FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illuminated substrate, a back support member, and an audio device in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241. FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. It is a side schematic diagram of the upper staging apparatus. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit in the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front side unit. (A) is a front view of the compartment unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit and the guided unit. (A) is a front view of the compartment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit. (A) is a front view of the board guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the board guide unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a section unit and a guided unit in the CCLIVa-CCLIVA line of FIG. 251 (b), and (b) is a section unit and a guided unit in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional view of a section unit and a guided unit in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a section unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is a bottom view. It is a right side view in the arrow L direction view of a transparent tubular member, and (e) is a rear view of a transparent tubular member. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. It is a right side view in the L direction view of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of an optical transmission unit. FIG. 241 is a partial cross-sectional view of a rear unit, an audio device, and an optical transmission unit in the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. 241. (A) is a front schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the first lighting unit, and (b) is a front schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit. .. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal staging device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal staging device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a horizontal staging device. (A) is a front view of a base member and an illuminated substrate, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a right side view. It is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illuminated substrate in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line of FIG. 269 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the lining unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lining unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a horizontal effect device in the CCLXVa-CCLXVa line of FIG. 274 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a light receiving member in the CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a base member, an illuminated substrate and a light receiving member in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the illuminated substrate and the light receiving member, and (c) is the sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate and the light receiving member in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 3 is a schematic view of a base member, an illuminated substrate, and a light receiving member schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the staging device in the CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic view of an illuminated substrate of the staging device in the direction of the arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in 19th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, the operation device and the lower plate unit in 21st Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibrating device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibrating device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. It is a front view of the covering cover member. (A) is a top view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line of FIG. 296 (a). It is a rear view of the lower plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line of FIG. 296 (a). (A) is a schematic view of a partial upper surface of the lower plate unit schematically showing the lower plate unit, and (b) is a schematic view of a partial side surface of the lower plate unit in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb of FIG. 299 (a). be. (A) is a partial upper surface schematic view of the lower plate unit schematically showing the lower plate unit, and (b) is a partial side view of the lower plate unit in the direction of the arrow CCCb of FIG. 300 (a). be. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which schematically shows the lower plate unit. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which the front frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit and an operation unit. (A) is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lottery unit. (A) is a side view of the engaging member in which the engaging member is visually recognized from the direction of the rotation axis, and (b) is a front view of the engaging member in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb of FIG. 312 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member in the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG. 312 (b). It is an exploded rear perspective view of a main body member, an engaging member, and a drive device unit. (A) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the lottery unit in the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG. 312 (b). (A) is a top view of the operating unit, and (b) is a side view of the operating unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of a game board and an operating unit in the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII of FIG. 302. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of an illuminated circuit board and a substrate fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an illuminated circuit board and a substrate fixing plate in the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line of FIG. 331 (a). (A) is a front view of an illuminated circuit board and a substrate fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an illuminated circuit board and a substrate fixing plate in the CCXXXXXIIb-CCCXXIIb line of FIG. 332 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit and the rear side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front side unit and the rear side unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit and the rear side unit of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front side unit and the rear side unit of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st displacement member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st displacement member. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a rear view of the front unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of FIG. 339 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of FIG. 344 (a). be. (A) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the pinned gear and the in-phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the pinned gear and the in-phase member on the left side, and the right side is the pinned gear and the in-phase member. It is a rear perspective view. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd displacement member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd displacement member. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear unit. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit in the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line of FIG. 356 (a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin and the in-phase member with respect to the initial angle. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit and the rear case. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the staging unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the staging unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of a staging unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body of a staging unit. It is a rear view of the 1st rotating member. (A) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support portion. (A) is a back exploded perspective view of the support portion, and (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion. It is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lid portion and the box-shaped portion. It is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lid portion and the box-shaped portion. It is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped part, the upper layer transmission mechanism and the lower layer transmission mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped part, the upper layer transmission mechanism and the lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a top view of the upper lid portion, the box-shaped portion, the upper layer transmission mechanism and the lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the upper lid portion, the box-shaped portion, the upper layer transmission mechanism and the lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376 (a), and (c) is a first rotating member. (D) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376 (c). (A) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377 (a), and (c) is a first rotating member. (D) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377 (c). (A) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (a), and (c) is a first rotating member. (D) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (c). (A) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379 (a), and (c) is a first rotating member. (D) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379 (c). (A) is a front view of the staging unit, (b) is a top view of the staging unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (a), and (c) is a front view of the staging unit. (D) is a top view of the staging unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (c). (A) is a front view of the staging unit, (b) is a top view of the staging unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381 (a), and (c) is a front view of the staging unit. (D) is a top view of the staging unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381 (c). It is a front view of an annular front cover and a rotating body. It is a top surface schematic diagram schematically showing the 1st rotating member in 23rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the front side unit in 24th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit according to the 25th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa of FIG. 339 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation unit in the line corresponding to. (A) and (b) are front views of the displacement device in the 26th embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the 27th embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuates effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertip on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to operate by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, the difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 7. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f (FIG. 3) is arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly. Since the amount of light in (see 12) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of brightness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state are displayed. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 is largely used and tilted. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 12) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member having a mode in which the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 which is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a plurality of openings so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. A through hole is formed to a position where interference with the 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape extending upward from the upper surface thereof and having an open portion on the front side in the cross section. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be separable in the vertical direction and is configured to cover three directions except the front side, and is a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 thereof. The voice coil motor 352, which is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and the vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, the left side detection sensor 353L, which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and the right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the center of the left and right can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). As a result, when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14A. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and upper and lower openings, and a cover is provided on the upper opening of the case body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the spring, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 are arranged at a position where they can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 15), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311h, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j that is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 on a surface when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To prepare for.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are the portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL. However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push-in end (FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 23).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and projects to a position where it is locked to the opening portion 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 14 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 14 (c)), the player can use the protective lens member 311i. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b having the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), due to its positional relationship, the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical. While it is fastened to the inside of the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower ends thereof are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended ends thereof are formed in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 that constitutes a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and that moves relative to each other with the rotation of the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the force to separate from each other between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is formed at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right to form a U-shape in the top view and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged opposite to each other, and is a disk. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is convex in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a manner having a shaft parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , An extension portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor accommodating portion 341a, and the illumination support portion 341e thereof. It mainly includes an LED device 341f which is arranged at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light of the LED device 341f both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in a perfect circle shape at one end, and is bored in a rectangular shape at a shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by a connecting pin 344d of a disk cam 344 and at the other end. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly prepared for.

The cylindrical member 343a is provided with fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. To. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is specifically formed with a length capable of moving to a position where the movable clutch 343c does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which a cylindrical member 343a is inserted and an unevenness along the axial center direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged facing the movable clutch 343c. A section 343b2 is provided.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at the circumferential position of the axis center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. It also includes a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a chevron-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having a top angle of about 100 °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R have a substantially mirrored shape, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disk cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is convex inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer periphery is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, the misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c is the first protruding outward in the radial direction at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated from the angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and the angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3 (angle in the present embodiment). θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In addition, FIG. 21A shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 has a shaft support hole 346a formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). From the convex pin 346b having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and protruding in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion overhanging at the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and has an arc shape centered on a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and a central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide slot 347b is bored along along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be able to guide (the convex pin 346b is bored with a size including the movement locus inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion is When a load in the push-up direction is applied to the 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 21B.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in which the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 24 Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand in which the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The player may feel uncomfortable because the return of the spring is not in time and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in. To.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 23 in the extension direction, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. As a result, the player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the rotary claw member 347 The state in which the posture has changed is shown. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346, so that the disengaging member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is continued until the disk cam 344 is rotated until the first retractable portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 27). Return to the state shown in 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area visible from the player's point of view of the protective lens member 311i increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 28 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 28).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Fig. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 28, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c. Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and the purpose is to vibrate the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Can only be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means. As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346 (FIG. 29). By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (the tilting operation) ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (fanning operation) of reciprocating up and down through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). In FIG. 32, the state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31 is shown, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. 32 is shown. The disk cam 344 is shown to rotate reciprocally, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the disc cam 344 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disk cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The 310 can be placed in a posture in which it can be arranged in the second state (a posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 32 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 33, are tilted by the rotary claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big hit) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 33, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 33 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 after the player push-in operation will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 35, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 34 is shown. In FIG. 36, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c becomes the engaging portion of the disengaging member 346. Contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. It stays and the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to disengage the engagement rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotary claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the disk cam 344 goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. 36. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform a vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is lifted. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is used. (See FIG. 14) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not ascend due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. 37. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate idly with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving in a state where the disk cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction via the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be disengaged, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the third symbol display device 81 is notified to stop the gripping operation, for example. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent a failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are deviated from each other. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned.

As a result, when the effect is performed by operating the tilting device 310, there is a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in such a manner that it separates from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c abuts on the disengaging member 346 from below, but in this case, the disengaging member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operation from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. 40 and 42 both appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movement after the first state is reached. Will be different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in the change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since the direction is different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the staging changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can see the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This can improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In addition, in FIG. 44, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, since the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) according to the posture change of the release member 346, the tilting device 310 is in the manner shown in FIG. Even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated by the player in the case of vertical movement, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. It is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the claw member 347 moves upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in staging between the above-mentioned first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 44. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the movement was performed or the movement was performed up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in staging, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a lot of timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 46A shows a state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 46B shows the release member 2346 with respect to the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Mainly prepared. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in a hook shape toward the left side of FIG. 45, and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 47 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface). Mainly a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d is pushed to the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. The support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotated on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in a state of being arranged at the terminal position (46 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length composed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also slows down.

As shown in FIG. 46A, in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the pull of the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 47. Is shown in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will never be done.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the movement mode with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be used. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 is raised by the magnetic force attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 by ensuring a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be noticed. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and opposite to a surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the push-in end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L. , The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding with the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly strikes the tilting device 3310, the ascending motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous striking operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 moves up as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 operates only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the upper detection sensor 4321d, the lower detection sensor 4321e, and the detection groove (slit) of the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection is possible. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the push-in end, and decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the timing interval described above is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled by driving.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 overhangs below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled by pushing the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 to the side close to the tilting device 4310 in advance.

As a result, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is overhanging and convex while the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly equipped with 5430.

The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411 is pivotally supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft overhangs.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together with the drive motor 5411.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body portion 5421 in the assembled state. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are convexly provided on the left, right, left, and right sides in the radial direction and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 that is convexly provided on the left and right sides of the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a convex leg portion 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth configured at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the left and right sides is larger because the posture maintaining portion 5423 is arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is higher than that of the lower ribbed leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is projected in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in the contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 has a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a second accommodating portion adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 and accommodating the weight member 5412. It mainly includes a 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom and the load applied during the insertion is released (assembly load release state). The depth is such that the convex leg portion 5424 overhangs.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to make the flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. To.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the player are pushed by the player three times from the first state. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push-in, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right on the paper surface in FIG. 59 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 and facilitate the translation of the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows an assembly load release state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembled load release state, and when the assembled load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to the deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and is uniformly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 move downward on the left and right sides (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422). It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 60 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side of the rotation axis. In b), the state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axis is placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61 (b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 are separated from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force to push back in the direction).

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. By configuring it with a combination of generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force that pushes back the tilting device 310.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the lightness of the tilting device 310 operation and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be satisfactorily achieved. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is different due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61 (b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located on the upper side of the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10, for example, other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. Through, vibration can be transmitted to the player. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (a pulsed pushing operation), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the preparation for vibration generation is ready, so that the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have symmetrical shapes, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged at the center position thereof, and the support cylinder portion P1 in the axial direction. Along the axis, a long hole recess C1 recessed from a disk portion in an axially symmetric long hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance, and a shaft of a support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion in the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated recess C1 is formed with a concave cross section having a width slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This makes it possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The sandwiching arm portion A1 includes an engaging convex portion A1a that projects from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm toward the opposite side of the arm. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis in the vicinity of the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for the e-ring to touch the surface and slide it) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 sandwiched from the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side of the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 that is a groove for fitting an e-ring and axially positioning the disk cam 5344 by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. Mainly the engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages when the disk cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3. Be prepared. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted. In addition to preventing the misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent the misalignment of the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between the two is expanded. After that, when the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player gives an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. The resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large because of the contact with the cylinder member 5343a.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of small resistance, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded. On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65 (a).

67 (a) is a sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown in an enlarged manner. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is shown by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67A due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is dammed by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disk cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape linearly symmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 68A, a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and tilted down by an angle D2 is shown, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disk cam 5344R is also applicable to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, since it is necessary to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle before the occurrence of the overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 66 (b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment has the disk cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is composed of a mirrored shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, in this embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the first embodiment, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and a disk member 6344L1 thereof. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. The lid plate portion 6344h is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion and is arranged radially outward in the thickened portion.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the disk member 6344L1 is in contact with the surface. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (in the embodiment, the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a and its auxiliary pillar. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a deceleration transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. Mainly equipped with 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (correctly). A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) as well as a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of the rotation after the rotation exceeding one rotation. Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 momentarily (disk cam) in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

Thereby, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the gaming machine in such a manner that the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is attracted. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is reached. It is possible to relate the magnitude of the displacement and the magnitude of the displacement amount that the player pushes the tilting device 310 into, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. 74. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXBa line, and FIG. 75 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L is composed of a mirrored symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7434R2 and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a in the center, and has a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape and an engaging rib. It is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. 1 In the radial direction between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a smaller diameter than the circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing that is projected radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. Mainly provided with a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular elongated hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position deviated from the intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The long hole 7431 and the second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first long hole 7431 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1. A return portion 7433 formed by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum is mainly provided.

The width direction (short side) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is an arrow LXXVIc direction view of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. Mainly includes a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and forming a star-shaped through hole in the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and the outer diameter dimension is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. This makes it possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A), and the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction facing the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof becomes. It is composed of an extended length that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the widthwise dimension of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 78 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, for ease of understanding, in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembly mistakes.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the positions of the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned process, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is slanted in order to minimize the interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

79 (a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and FIG. 79 (b) shows FIG. 79 (a). ), The right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, and in FIG. 80 (a), the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2 is shown. In (b), a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 81, the right disk cam is shown from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown in the figure. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347. (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79B, the angle between the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small when the engagement portion 346d of the release member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. Arranged (see FIG. 80 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From the 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, so that the rotation of the disk cam 7344 is based on the rotation. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally divided recess 7522 originally arranged to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by going through the process shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 83 (a) and FIG. 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

In FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other is shown, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is above the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, so that the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clock 82 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 and then separates from the engaging member 7344R3. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, the state that is not noticed by the player (the state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that is not visible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) The state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one, and in both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 corresponds to the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state where it sinks below the 2 state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 immediately reaches (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the ascending operation can be changed from the first state. As a result, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device can be improved.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 90, the reference numeral of the internal configuration of the game board 13 is omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It can rotate forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) when viewed from the front, and the right side is rotated. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the metal plate with holes) with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (the diameter of the upper columnar in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically). Is externally fitted to the support pin 19a (which has a small shape) and is pivotally supported.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back surface side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparently formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls and a light emitting means that lights up during the payout of prize balls.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area of the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17, or may be provided in a plurality of places, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. It may be configured so that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 92).

In the upper corner portion of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port portion 143 that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which the unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed like this.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the lighting unit 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board is disposed to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is connected, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h that communicates with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illuminated portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal board of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotation tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 600 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126), the positional relationship is such that they face each other in the front-rear direction with the device on the upper side, and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member having an open front side formed of a resin material is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring has a structure. The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is abutted against the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame portion 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c gently curves in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. On the rotation base end side of 14, an inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and is open downward, is disposed between the vertically long plate portions.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion that illegally expands the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and enters the game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat melts the reverse cup portion 178 and allows the reverse cup portion 178 to pass through the long cover member. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact with each other (close to each other). Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

Further, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits cheating through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is supposed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window portion 14c), the operation of further inserting the piano wire deeply is naturally performed by a person who cheats (piano wire). Can be done (without suspicion that the insertion is not working). Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is equipped with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a substrate 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrated through the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) that urges the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position due to the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connector CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different, so the board is different. This is due to the intention of preventing malfunctions in advance.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and shown, and FIG. 92 shows the window portion of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the front side of the main body frame 14c is the front side of the upper plate 17, and the lower plate 50 is diagonally upward to the right. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The cover cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width similar to the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends, and the main body curved portion 371 having a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left-right center portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to form a front view V. A plate-shaped member that closes an opening surrounded by a hanging portion 372 having a character shape and a main body curved portion 371 and a hanging portion 372, which is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and has a main body curved portion 371 or a hanging portion 372. A translucent portion 373 that is fastened and fixed to at least one of the two, a left plane support portion 374 that is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface that is formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. Mainly a right-side plane support portion 375 and a support groove 376 which is a groove recessed from the back surface side in the right-side plane support portion 375 and whose recess width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side. Prepare for.

The curved portion 371 of the main body has a curved front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a back side edge portion, and is an upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the rear left edge portion 371a are connected to each other and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. The back middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are connected to each other on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body, and is between the plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). In the hanging portion 372, a screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, so that the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is placed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light upward, and 2 LEDs (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light downward. , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 that accompanies the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat surface support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8031.

The right-side plane support portion 375 abuts vertically with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 8031, 8032 is used. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that accepts the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illuminated portion 8032 is in a state of entering the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right side plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illuminated portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fixed to the main body frame 14a or a plate so as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side by fastening and fixing the main body frame 14a to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like). It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of the synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire having a heated tip, a piano wire, or the like is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 and melted), the front frame It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the upper and lower ends of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the foul ball passage portion Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the 145, but also when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the exemplified wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. It can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is opened. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear becomes thinner (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position to be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left-right long plate member. Therefore, a through hole 156 through which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member and a screw are formed above and below the through hole 156, and a screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 is inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end portion) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than a through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is provided on the back surface side with a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A protruding portion 148a and a screwing portion 148b in which a screw to be inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction is formed as a screwable hole. Mainly prepare.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation portion back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle and the lower edge. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back surface side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can be surfaced with the wall portion 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back surface member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. Since it can be formed by the plate thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not as a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is further arranged on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. can.

As a path for a foreign substance such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick at the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since the structure is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), passing through the inside of the operation device 300 and downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is transferred to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered with the bottom plate portion 321, drinking water or the like may be applied. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and are extended to the left from the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads toward the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back surface side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)). At a position (intermediate position) between the pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved in the vicinity of the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96A), and a portion arranged on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d. It mainly includes a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the posture of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing with respect to the plate member 14d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d and the harness HN1 to HN3. In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding downward, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area of the region accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) is secured while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is internally fitted into the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to provide the movable arm portion 182. Axial support (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the flat surface OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching part). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of the radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the separation distance from each other gradually becomes shorter as it approaches the plane OS1, and when it reaches the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept not intended for elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept intended for elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portions 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, the narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and the wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. The binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 in the fixed state (see FIG. 93 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93 (b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 184a, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly comprises a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When it is desired to lock the binding arm portion 183 to the locking portion 184, the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the side of the small opening portion 184b. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted and fixed through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

Note that FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one of the limit states of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show. In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it was extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. The shape of the HN3 can be made to follow the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also has a rotation center point P57 as a center with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 (FIG. 96). b), also see FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit (which is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire is advanced toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (the early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to launch a ball to a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal benefit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity is performed without leaving the seat, so that the pachinko / pachislot machine store can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. Each of the S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 is provided with the extension direction facing (switching) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed in the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, the balls are removed from the Senryobako box. A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) due to being required to be replenished or the like can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions whose extension directions can be bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged on the downstream side of the first bending region NEa1 and on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 has a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach route for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, a route traveling to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can be completely entered into the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further progresses, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM overhangs in a downward posture, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to obtain an illegal payout ball and prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

It will be described back to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (more than twice in the present embodiment). As a result, when the sphere flowing down the ball removing passage 147 is arranged in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the respective bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is positioned with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the above is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a ball stays in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged so as to be displaced back and forth in the upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being pinched and engaged between the upper and lower walls.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 146 to be on the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

Thereby, the period until the ball passing through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long to the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

This makes it possible to connect and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to each other by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, while eliminating the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500 and then fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. It is a part for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 108 and 108. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and the main body frame is formed. It mainly includes a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 that is fastened and fixed to 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. In (see FIG. 86), the fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a and the substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the board member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the left-right direction. It is possible to suppress the collapse of. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface at a substantially surface position with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end portion of the support plate portion 510, and the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic circuit board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 107 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It is incident on the 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 527.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 in the fastening ready state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut on the support plate portion 510 from the front side (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is displaced up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, after the protrusion 566 is inserted through the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount of the misalignment with respect to the support plate 510 to eliminate the misalignment and easily fasten. Can be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L comprises an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is opaque to light, and an inner cover member 520 thereof. An inner lens member 530, which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material, is provided.

The right heavy plate unit 500R comes into contact with the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front side end portions are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction and light. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a non-transmissive resin material. Mainly includes an outer cover member 560 to be fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 has a main body plate portion 521 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically, and an upper fastening portion 522 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. The lower fastening portion 523, which is arranged at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and inserted into the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions to be formed and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and an inner lens member 530 formed longer than the short fastening portion 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 which are inserted into the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and are projected from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wave shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To prepare for.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that abuts (matches the shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged so as to be inclined to the left toward the back surface side, and the opening portion 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals above and below, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each opening 524.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is provided with a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front-rear direction and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. It is provided with a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions and function as a window for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right in the design shape between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front side end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Will be done.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. It also has support holes 531b and 531c through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back surface side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can abut with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back surface side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, it is possible to align the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending to the right from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (front end portion in top view). (Triangle shape with the tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right through the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. To. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back surface side (LED 512a side) to the front surface side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing the light from the so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notched concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to be emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene-based resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds). Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the LED 512a side end of the light guide member 540 is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly displaced toward the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and is formed from side to side. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. The degree of wavy shape is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after thermal bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can be given a three-dimensional degree of freedom. ..

The details of the wave shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. It has a wavy shape that is located to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C. It is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and screws extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560. Mainly includes a fastening portion 542 to be formed.

The light guide member 540 has no portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is positioned substantially on the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An outer cover that projects to the right in a region surrounded by an inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and the plurality of insertion holes 553. An overhanging portion 554 that can be seen through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a protrusion from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear ends follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is convex to the front side at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions internally fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the opposite side, bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape in a side view toward the front side are vertically arranged. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be a band-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged in the outer lens member 550, but not in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) as much as possible (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

In the main body plate portion 551, the surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 114 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 from being displaced from each other, and light is accurately incident from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be made to.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. At the upper end portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, it is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and is the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a formed with a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. A receiving surface that can accept the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end portion of the above, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a vertical width thereof. It is formed with a long hole shape with a long width, and an opening is formed with a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back surface side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. Even if it can be stably supported, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted inside (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

A method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a), FIG. 113 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a).

It should be noted that FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the convex portion. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112B). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side of the front side surface of the light guide member 540). Since the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light can be reduced, and thereby the area where the light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be made easy to see in a band shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. By applying a load to the optical member 540, it is possible to reduce the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L is combined with the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitutes a surface having a parallel relationship with each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship capable of contacting each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure. ..

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing to the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it is possible to assemble and disassemble in two steps, so the worker who performs maintenance etc. disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 by which procedure depending on the part of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the work time can be shortened.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid to each other in the plane direction in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid with each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is united. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are fastened to the front surface. The left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R cannot be disassembled unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104). Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect on the effect will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for staging by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also becomes the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , Shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be generated can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed in the same manner as the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower end openings 524 can be increased, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the openings 524 arranged facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing each other with the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, in a place where the degree of light focusing is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is collected. In a place where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the light emission mode of each opening 524 uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114B are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is defined as a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper end of the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower end thereof. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 512a in the front-rear direction to the region KE travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114 (c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light condensing action is reduced, the light is visually recognized by the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by forming the light guide member 540 into a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. The durability of the light can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, an effect of light that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the high hit expectation of the effect, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end portion of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes get tired can be reduced, and the player can play the game for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the player who is cheating is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the player who is cheating can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to have a length of 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and has the same gradient in the left-right width dimension over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, it is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions of the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b are arranged. Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is better than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. As a result, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end portion of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform (small difference in strength) with the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the foremost surface. )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an arrow of an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LED 512a that generates the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not right beside the inner lens member 530 but is formed on the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (Refer to the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). The arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of the light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. A unit fitted to (see) and supported from below, which is located at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 thereof. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Mainly prepared. Note that in FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to produce a light effect.

The lighting unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the tubular shape. A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. It is a part that improves sex.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical misalignment of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave portion on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and is formed of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner portion of the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where the opening 414 projects to the front side. It is mainly provided with a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back surface side to prevent it from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that faces the tubular portion 405 of the lighting unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 formed through a slightly large inner shape and an opening 414 formed through the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed with substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted through the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring overhanging through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible in front view. The LED 14e2 is arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back surface side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back surface side on the lower right corner lower surface, and a concave portion from the back surface side on the left corner lower end surface. A supported groove 418 to be supported, a fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and a second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in a position closer to the top and bottom. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily perform positioning in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state thereof (see FIG. 86). ), The load (weight, etc.) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given from the above can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. It is provided with an enlarged rib 419a to be formed.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a part sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged rib 419a, ribs having the same shape are arranged at three positions around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and the wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and forming an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421. It mainly includes an opening 424 composed of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the center position of the left and right (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other at the top and bottom, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) through which a vibration wave (voice) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings for passing vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through the upper frame member 410 at a position corresponding to the opening 414 in the front-rear direction. The light radiated to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. It is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e at the lower end portion. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted. After forming a space between the front assembly 460, which is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460, which is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in the front view (see FIG. 100). Mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and at the same time, emits a production sound in connection with the game, and one end thereof is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. You can play back and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 has a main body portion 461 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and the back side is open, and a plurality of recessed portions of the main body portion 461 from the upper and lower side edges toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip. Extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 462 and the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside in the vertical width. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end portion of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and a main body portion 461. A through hole 466 that is circularly penetrated through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and rear. A connection hole 469 through which a plurality of fastening portions 468 to be fastened and fixed with screws inserted into the side assembly 480 and screws for co-fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the center side in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between the base end side main body portion 461B and the rear end side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds almost the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H is provided with an inwardly non-returned edge portion (an edge portion in which a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted through the through hole 463a is inserted from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a and the through hole 483a of the rear side assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened enough to tighten the screw. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a by sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e (fastening and fixing to the hard material by sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts tightly in front and behind the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480, and bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib that forms. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being created on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear side assembly 480 is recessed in a semicircular tip toward the center of the vertical width from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 formed in a cup shape that is long left and right and the front side is open. A plate-like extension plate extending from the back side edge of the plurality of recessed portions 482 and the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outward. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the main body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side in a rib shape and a through hole through which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are formed through. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. It is provided with a front side wall portion 481H formed from a shape internally fitted to the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right sides at a distance that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width that is internally fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connection wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, by passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connecting line 453. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 123) that bends by turning. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being created on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back surface side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and may be bent to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, the back surface is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). It can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed from a front-back inverted shape with the front recessed portion 471, and jointly forms an opening with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424. It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 arranged to face each other face each other. Is shown in the unfolded state toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body portion 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are provided at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed at the time of assembly. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Since each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can be done.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back surface side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the oscillating wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly, but in the present embodiment, the oscillating wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is on the left side (arrow) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion closest to the left and right direction). , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent in the vertical direction. It is possible to secure a longer path length of the vibration wave Ws as compared with the left-right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of a standing wave by the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 461 on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction of (arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the recessed portion 462 and 463b.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are formed at a plurality of locations (this) alternately up and down toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are provided at five locations).

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction.

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482, 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed on the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b above the recessed portion 482 arranged on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (speaker) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120). As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back portion of the speaker 451 is an opening and an opening 424 formed by an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, recessed portions 471, 491 (that is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box. Since it is in direct contact with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 via (see FIG. 120), the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 should be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being disturbed. Can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect, and can raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of the 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws as a path for avoiding the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is stipulated. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (sound). ) Sound can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purposes. It is arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed in.

Further, the extended plates 436 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and the rib portions 467c and 487c, respectively. The 467d and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433 and 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 433 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to bring the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 and the rear. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portion 462,482 is a portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and it is possible to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is the front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the points where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent act.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of the arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). be. In addition, in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is shown. Is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. The outer surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and is fitted to the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c is elastically deformed by receiving a compressive load from the rib portion 467c. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (narrow) the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M as compared with the tip side main body portion 461T. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is secured to a large extent in a manner that bulges in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip side main body portion 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVa-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of FIG. 124 (a).

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the screw inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419. It is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460 and the rear are assembled. It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the back surface side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the playback output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the other speaker assembly 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid conflict with the sound to be played, and to reproduce the reproduced sound with high quality as a transparent sound without disturbing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 125 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e on the entire surface, but is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin), but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add thickness to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the member has a high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like fall under this category. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of a spike, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

For example, when arranging it on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a cylindrical shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and it functions as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e, and an insulator depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other) and adjust the sound effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) and the connecting hole 469 thereof. The upper side by a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in shape and a through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be fastened is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. Note that FIG. 127 (b) shows the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated back and forth for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, a front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape in which the central portion is open is formed. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a form a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) are board surface support devices 600. It is a side view of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 which schematically showed the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is adjusted. The portion is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated around an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it is close to the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is provided in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to evacuate from the route, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the rear claw member 640 after rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by changing to a fixed state. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not abut on the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). Therefore, for example, the game board. When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end portion is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end portion is vertically positioned on the support bottom portion 12c. Is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, the description of one board support device 600 will be described and the description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A regulated front claw member rotatably supported by a rotary front claw member 620 that is pivotally supported and a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the rotary front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the rotary front claw member 620. It mainly includes a 630 and a rear claw member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is arranged on the back surface side of the rotary front claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the rotary front claw member 620.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. The arc recess 614 is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back surface side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615 and a pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615a that extend from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and are fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). Mainly includes a fixing plate 616 of the above.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed in the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of the main body plate portion 621 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 thereof. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portions 621a that are arranged facing each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper corner portion on the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed through in a straight line on the back side portion of the plate portion 621a and the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Mainly provided with a hole 624.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the regulated front claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotating claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. The rear side extension plate 621c is extended with a downward inclination of about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621c, and extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the back side end portion of the extension portion 621a2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side. The front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d and the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And mainly prepare.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The rear extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with the main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the worker side. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined toward the front side. It mainly includes an inclined extending plate 633 that is extended and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), whereby the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 is restricted.

The rotating rear claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the tilt angle is such that the back surface of the game board 13 is in contact with the surface. It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the cover member 171 and the board surface support device 600 are fixed in close proximity to the board surface support device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulated front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is restricted by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the regulated front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, from the time when the regulation rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIG. 134 (a)). In (up to 135 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is canceled and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

In the angle range (the range between FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a)) in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates, the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630 is relative to the regulated front claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the attitude change of the regulated front claw member 630 when operating due to the downward load changes the attitude toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). (Posture change), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a downward load to the regulated front claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extending plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. This makes it possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Here, in the case where the rotary front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the rotation front claw member 620 is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it will occur.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the rotary front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front claw arranged on the front frame 14 Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multi-function cover member 171 is projected. The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at the position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force for pushing the game board 13 by the clerk is slightly insufficient, the game board 13 is 90% stable. When the situation that the front frame 14 does not close is solved, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunction cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14. In addition, the board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to be in contact with the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 134 (a). ), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640, and the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the rotating front claw member 620 is passed through the rotating rear claw member 640. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the game board 13 is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases by that amount.

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is located from the portion that abuts on the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion that abuts on the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius gradually increases around the biaxial member P62.

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunction cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the second shaft member P62 is displaced due to the rotation of the rotary front claw member 620. The non-resistive portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 135 The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the regulated front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward on the front surface to rotate the regulated front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the regulation front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to a change in the state of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the rotation front claw member 620 and the rotation rear claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the degree to which the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the rear claw member 640 rotates against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and the front claw member 620 rotates. It is possible to displace in the direction of widening the angle between the rotating claw member 640 and the claw member 640.

Therefore, compared to the displacement amount of the rotation front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the rotation rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at the position supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of 13. As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 136, the released state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but when the game board 13 is arranged, the front frame 14 is closed. Is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite, so the reaction force becomes excessive, so it is difficult to do with a normal load. As described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulation rod 615. The direction (clockwise in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (counterclockwise in FIG. 138) are not opposite to each other, and can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 can be pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159 to fix the board surface support device 600. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then flipped back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 143 (b), the back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface of the 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. Mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. A mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which a rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted in the right corner portion, and a locking portion 713 in which a hook portion 723 is sewn so as to be able to be locked on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. The convex portion 714, which is projected on the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)) are arranged to face each other. It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. Mainly provided with a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launching unit 112a occurs, repair (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed.

The ball feeding device 720 has a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the foundation member 711, a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly comprises a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state depending on the allowable state that allows the flow to the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through the rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 arranged in a positional relationship slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724. It mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not it is present, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generating solenoid 741, and a ball. A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward toward the distance from the ball passing opening 724, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. It is mainly provided with a regulated overhanging portion 745 which is extended at various intervals and whose extending end projects toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and includes a flow plate portion 724a that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the radial direction of rotation. The rib portion 724b, which is arranged facing above the flow plate portion 724a and is extended downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape and is inclined downward as the extended tip surface toward the back surface side, and the flow plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the sphere P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the line. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a manner separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged so as to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. It is possible to prevent the member 725 from colliding with the member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 arranged at a distance shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is arranged.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It is formed as a long hole along the direction and has a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the through hole 731a for passing the fastening screw and the bulging portion 716a. 731b, which is formed in a groove depth slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be emitted, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and is a base with screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. It is attached to the member 710.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and is in contact with two front and rear positions on the peripheral surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. It is configured to guide you.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, comes into contact with the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats to the upper part of the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not abut on the front side wall of the base member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back surface side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with a sharp tip formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b thereof, and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Mainly includes an upper blade portion 725c extending from the above.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to and entered into the ball P8 will be described.

146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a), and FIG. 147 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit 112a, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 after launching the ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of a part of the constituent members of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current is passed through the launching solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs to give a launching force to the sphere P8, and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by using the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves while being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the launch rail 730 through the lower side of the flow plate portion 724a, and the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 is the flow plate portion 724a. Since the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface, the thread Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c protruding above the flow plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the thread Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the thread Y8, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the staging operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are an exploded front perspective view of the staging operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the staging operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The composition of is almost the same.

The staging operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The staging operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (an operation including at least one of an operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The end of the drive side arm member 910 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100, and the drive force of the drive motor 921 is transmitted via the arm gear 924 to drive the drive side arm member 910 and the drive side arm member 910. The drive motor 921 that generates the drive force, the transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910 are interlocked with each other. On the left and right sides of the thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction, the thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to the position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central main body of the support base material 801 and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 801P is bored at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801 and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which the detection arc plate 880d of the play fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion constituting the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion constituting the region below the upper end region.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly long in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 is arranged so as to be movable up and down. It is possible to reduce the operating space when the 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P, respectively, as described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, it can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. Arranged to the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the space between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from being widened, via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is formed as a member of the above, and is provided with a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back surface side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petals 802, and the peripheral edges also have irregular irregularities in the front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and are formed into substantially the same shape, although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is such that the specific color (red) becomes darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, near the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. There is.

The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the tip round shape side (front view counterclockwise side, right side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The anterior portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the anterior side of the posterior portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the posterior portion 802a is superimposed on the posterior side of the anterior portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear position, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member fixed to each of the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and the outer peripheral edge portion thereof has a shape extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending rearwardly in a cylindrical shape and having a screw hole inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 (in the lateral direction).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side wall of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803, screw insertion holes are provided inside at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively, and the petals 802 are provided on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screwed portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is abutted from the front to the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803, and the screw is screwed from the rear side, whereby the flat plate member 803 is attached to the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having five similar shaped portions having a continuous front shape in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 156. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, with two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. The screwing portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwed portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 814 has only an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the center slit 814 with a slight gap.

As described above, a set consisting of three slits of the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof are formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) from each other. Each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost side slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are both side slits. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape that coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed more closely so as to be close to each other inward, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

In other words, if the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the slit member 810 can be laid out by that amount. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820 so that the tip portion has a semicircular shape in front view. The extension portion to be molded, the central portion where the thickness is larger than that of the staging portion at the position between the extension portions, the screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that is projected from the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. To prepare for.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with each other. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810 from the front side. When fully fitted, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so that it slides in.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 the rotary plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall having a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side.

The guide rail 832 has a shape in which a peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830 so as to be closed in a loop shape in a front view. It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to fall off.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the front-view clockwise direction along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line of the pivot opening 831 and the normal line, and thereafter. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape toward the front clockwise direction side from this intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the side end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends from the surroundings to the outside in a spiral shape.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161A, a third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , Arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall portion 815 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screwing portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. Positioning is performed by inserting 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the central axis rotation device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction is formed. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 having internal screw holes on the left and right sides of the lumen 856, and the front screw hole 857 to the lumen 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the lumen portion 856, a columnar shape extends along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, and extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 to the inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to project rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

On the LED board 861, a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are one central location and a large number of locations that are arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around this one location. Each of the LEDs 865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed toward the rear.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is made of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, extending in a columnar shape from a long plate-shaped base to the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the central part. A pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. The screwing portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is abutted from the front side to the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 sandwiching the LED board 861, and the screw is screwed into the screwing portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner peripheral surface slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. It mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the above-mentioned four locations where the screwing portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a position intermediate in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axial. A sliding rib 883b extending over is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 thereof are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened part, forms a cup shape with a bottom, and abuts on the flange part of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side, and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is provided in the central portion having a size capable of inserting the central decorative member 868.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161A, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G. It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and a screw insertion hole is formed around the pivot opening 880a at a position corresponding to two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a in the 880b.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be overlapped with the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. The 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back surface side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and the member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D is detectablely arranged. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, it is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d (minimum angle). 72 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 in which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their respective rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screwing portion 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out to the rear through the lumen portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight points along the circumferential direction by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, so that the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 is formed. The slit member 810 is in linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the 813, so that the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is formed. It is supported smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by being applied with a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed so as to be accommodating from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the support elongated hole 1140 formed as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly prepared for.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910, and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery of the front end portion thereof so that screws can be screwed into the support column 1110. It includes a screw-in portion 1111 to be formed, and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in a pair of upper and lower parts on the same surface as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 that is convexly provided in a columnar column on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the main body member of the shaku to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914 and a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission slot 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121, the second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and the second accommodating portion 1122 are arranged in the opposite direction of the first accommodating portion 1121 and the drive side arm member. It mainly comprises a third accommodating portion 1123 in which the arm gear 924 fitted to the 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line. Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front, and is arranged from the vicinity of the outer periphery. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is provided in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 with the collar fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second staging member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second staging member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) so as to be slidable to the left and right on the side base material 1000S, and is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 formed in the shape of elongated holes extending to the left and right. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 by the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S has a cylindrical portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member to be fastened and fixed to the support pillar portion 1150, the fastening plate portion 1001S which is arranged at a position corresponding to the support pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S, which is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and the right corner portion in the front view, is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. The convex portion 1005S, which is convexly provided on the front side along the arc shape having the same center as the above, is mainly provided.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip thereof of the supported convex portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between the two, and is configured as a portion that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S in that state.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S is formed at a convex height that does not abut when the second staging member 940 is in the regular position, but can be abutted if the second staging member 940 is displaced or bent from the regular position. Will be done.

The second staging member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941. Axial support column 941 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported by sandwiching a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged in close proximity to the shafted support column portion 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. The unit 942 and the like are mainly provided.

The shaft support column portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and is a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A screw-in portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip of the shaft support support portion 941 while being inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar sandwiched between them. By screwing the screw into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 serves to prevent it from coming off. As a result, the second staging member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the slide plate 930 from coming off. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second staging member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second staging member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc recess 1004S and causes resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and the arm gear 924 in a predetermined angle range in the out-of-diameter direction. A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 overhanging, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports the collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800, and a support slot. A cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangle shape in front view so as to support the board cover 1000C in the lower right of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged in close proximity to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in front view. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second staging member 940 at a slight distance from the second staging member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second staging member 940 is missing, the screwed portion 1006S is used to make the second effect member 940. 2 The displacement of the staging member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base materials 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction, thereby fastening and fixing the substrate cover. The 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIG. 1100 is a front view, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 show a connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the moving range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. 169). (Refer to 151), it extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle rotation range), so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171 the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second staging member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second staging member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second staging member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second staging member 940 in a manner of projecting toward the originally arranged position of the petal operating device 800, the second staging member 940 operates following the petal operating device 800. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view which shows through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of a slit member 810 and a rotary plate 830.

175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 descends due to the elevating operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 expands from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expansion shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. After passing through the middle position, the expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the rotation operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position, and then the gathering operation (third operation) is performed. It is configured so that it can return to the initial position (gathering position) by performing operation).

In the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end (circular opening 811 side end) of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810. As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is located. It is in a state of gathering that constitutes a flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the counterclockwise direction as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), this is observed. By interlocking the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)), the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831, it can easily be fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly linear from the inner end to the outside along the central slit 814. Guided by to move.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, as described above, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted in the counterclockwise direction of the front view by an angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Will be faster.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape with the five guide rails 832. ..

As the guide rail 832 is tilted clockwise in this way, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 curves in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , The structure is divided into roles.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and becomes fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is subsequently locked to the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before with a small torque lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the counterclockwise direction of the front view indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expansion operation, the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotary plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous immediately. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is rotated. While being dampened by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), thereby performing the above-mentioned expansion operation. Is a gathering operation in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are transferred from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the center. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the gathering state, and completes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without stopping, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). It rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the aggregated state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift after a while, or to shift immediately so as to be continuous without a pause. It can also be.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotational operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in such a manner that the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back surface side, and is upward generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back surface side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that even if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 can be won. It is possible to repeatedly pass through 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and it is possible to obtain an illegal profit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is brought when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can abut on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145 to increase the resistance to an upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits fraud is afraid of discovering the fraud, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of trousers, etc.). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, and the ball guide opening. While stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball pulling lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it possible to easily give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 via the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes. That is, since the right-sloping surface 9142a can forcibly give the lower plate 50 a velocity component toward the right (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side occupies a region of about two-thirds of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the boarding restriction step portion is formed at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a has a right end portion (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the riding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding control step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 184 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 on the left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side so as to cover the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessing depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). The radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 collide with the ball P8 to crack or chip. This can be prevented and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape extending toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a portion constituting the bifurcated blade portion of 10153 and extends to the left in a manner of slightly ascending and tilting from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 having an acute recessed deep portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side edge. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 can enter the acute angle concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraudulent acts. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portions connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are configured to abut on the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand and causing the ball P8 to flow backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, the thread Y8 or the ball P8 is loaded in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of fraudulent activity can be accelerated.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) whose firing intensity is weak and does not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment has the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving entrance 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged from the resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and placed close to the ball launch unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furnishing, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back surface side of the return ball prevention member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically projected from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is surface-contacted with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance to the base member 68b1. The long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position with the through hole, and in that state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that abuts on the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment). , About 1/3 below the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and a width (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment) that the thread can enter with the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side to the right position. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is provided with a notch 2062b3 for a semicircle on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act through the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the thread Y8 on the player side (the ball P8 is fixed to the player side). Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball P9 toward the front side (see FIG. 182), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front surface, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back surface side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion overhanging downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) shows. The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. 190 (b), the sphere immediately flows away. Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored by the timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, after 0.6 seconds). Because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling the passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is to be advanced while being excluded. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is dismissed by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state. Therefore, by controlling the button-type switch SW11 to sound an alarm when the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , It is possible to detect cheating at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 190 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is early. Can be exchanged for. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement, and saves the trouble of forgetting the storage location, as compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option. It can play the effect. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be disposed).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. It is possible to maintain the deterrence of fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage is unknown to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment. The flange portion 2887 is provided with a regulating portion 2888 projecting from the extending tip to the back surface side. The play-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the play-fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment, and is provided with the same loose-fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802. That is, the regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are shown in chronological order, and the simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b), respectively. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the regulating portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that is inclined so as to move away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802 b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) shown in FIG. 194 (a). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. Posture changes occur in the petals 802 to the extent possible.

As the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 changes in this way, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 has the narrow slide rib 803a only in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 has the slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a on the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T on the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed) increases frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 to the movement in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815. The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) from the slide pin 823 can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting (slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in an inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 195, the state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b as shown in FIG. 196 (b), and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become the normal postures. Will be returned.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and therefore the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts on the regulating portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided. Therefore, it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petals 802 to the fully open position and rotate the petals 802 at the fully open position.

Further, the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888 is such that the petal 802 slightly changes its posture even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 at the gathered position or the fully open position, or even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 that rotates at the fully open position. By setting the position so that the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be evacuated, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the staging device by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it serves as a mark as to whether or not the petal 802 passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. The difference in perspective can make a difference between the petal 802 expanding to the maximum and performing a rotational operation, and the petal 802 expanding halfway to perform a rotational operation.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a directing part. As a result, the regulating unit 2888 can be used as a part of the staging device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulating portion 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulating portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 may come into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture, which may be used as an effect effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning to be conveyed to the player depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts with the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the abuting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the petal 802 changes its posture. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even if the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 198 and 199, operation examples of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) are illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened in the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a to be provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the front view clockwise side of the central slit 814, the side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the front view clockwise side. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814. Inside, a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b, which is recessed in a wall portion on the front clockwise side in a manner of widening the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction, is mainly provided.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from a position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side of FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Is formed in.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) from the position where the flat plate member 2803 is arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. Is formed continuously to.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, when the rotary plate 830 starts rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is a clock). It moves in the direction of entering the peripheral side recessed portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the front view of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. And the contact between the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwed portion 2803S and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut on the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance given to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. The slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side abuts on the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side concave portion 3815a moves to the front counterclockwise side from the concave base end of the clockwise side concave portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center side in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates around the slit member 3810). Rotational motion) intervenes (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). a)), By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotation operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the gathering position (see FIG. 195). Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but in the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment, the curved surface of the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 (a), the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 201, and the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 202 (b). The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the difference between the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment and the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained yet. Yes, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. In the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are formed along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as drinking water described above downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 is high.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. It should be noted that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so as not to be a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, to the left), the gap V13 formed in the other (for example, to the right) is provided on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two and the coin, and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by giving a load toward the back side to shift (deform) the position, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, when a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, and the tilting device 310 tilts, a coin is coined. Foreign matter in the shape may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202A and 202B, when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign matter has been removed, but in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203 (a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (c) is a side view of the operating device 8300. It is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 in the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 203 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device 8300 in the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe.

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center position on the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the upper surface of the extending portion 311h is tilted (left and right in the vertical view of the second state). An inclination D81 that inclines downward toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310, and an inclining D82 that inclines downward toward the front side due to the inclination of the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, it is possible to easily secure the strength of the lower frame member 8320 as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object in a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. It is considered to be larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that allows light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25) to be transmitted. In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 which are connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (mirror-finished members) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member 8320 will continue to remain. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the case of visual recognition through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same when the visual recognition is made through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that allows the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) to be discharged. The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the leading edge of the bottom plate portion 321. You can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to promptly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 does not operate normally and the pachinko machine 10 stops operating, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board surface support device 600 in the 14th embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 14th embodiment of the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 204 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment is provided with a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The front-rear displacement member 2652, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is displaceably supported in the front-rear direction, the locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the front-rear displacement. The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below at two front and rear positions and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and is on the front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652. It is provided with an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies an urging force toward the surface.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and by being pushed backward by the front frame 14. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the rear position. , It is a continuously connected inclined surface.

The tilt angle and formation range of the inclined surface 2652a are such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the lower position in the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the upper position in the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652. Set.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction thereof. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the rear claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force of the worker, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of selection of the worker and the workability.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and infiltrating the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out and the fraud is detected at an early stage has been described. However, in the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire, the fraud detection device 2280 is described. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape in which the back side and the lower surface side are opened, and the main body box portion 2281 stacked above the inverted cup portion 2178 and the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281 are covered with a lid. The back cover member 2582 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2582 are provided with a space.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, and has an extension portion 2283 that abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and the opening is narrowed upward from the lower corner portion. The narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, the protruding portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. The first conduction portion 2286, which is housed in a concave portion, one end of which projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and hits the upper surface of the first conduction portion 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can be contacted, a torsion spring SP15 that generates a urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protrusion on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. It is provided with a shape memory spring 2288 that is supported by the portion 2285 and is arranged below the second conduction portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion overhanging the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205 (b)). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and it is controlled to output an error signal with the cut off of the continuity as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extending portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has a property of maintaining the deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a pre-memorized shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. ..

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2482 in a vertically long shape in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state and then returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and reduces the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the curved shape of the light guide member 540 causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment has a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 which schematically represents the part 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, which schematically represents a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 206 (e) schematically represents the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 206 (a), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530 with respect to the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape in which a sphere is divided into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back surface side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is this. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), according to the above-described configuration, the light is advanced toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and the light is advanced toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed to produce a light emitting effect. The effect can be improved.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 15 is formed flat has been described, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower plate unit 6400 is improved. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 is arranged in front of the operating device 10300 in which the swing device member 10310 is arranged in the upward position in FIG. 207 and the operating device 10300. The lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, the horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emission effect, and the upper part of the front frame 10014 that mainly covers the light emission effect and It mainly includes an upper staging device 6500 for performing a sound staging.

The above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in an area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and a game area in which a game ball flows down is configured on the back side of the glass unit 16. It is the same as the embodiment. In order to avoid complication of the drawing, the drawing of the state of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in FIG. 207, and the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) are shown in FIG. 208. It is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be visually recognized from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 illustrates a directional view (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) along the longitudinal direction of the lever member of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)). The liver.

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, which are formed in the shape of a thin plate and have flexibility to the extent that they can be bent and deformed. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodating recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the degree of the recess toward the back side increases as it approaches the center on the left and right, and the center of the accommodation recess 17a on the left and right and the operation device. It is arranged so as to coincide with the left and right centers of the 10300.

The rear side end portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported by the accommodating recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the back side as it approaches the center on the left and right. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the center on the left and right.

Therefore, in the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-rear position from the metal body portion 10014a to the fitting position. It is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, in the left-right position (position separated from the center to the left and right) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, the operation can be performed even if the front-back position from the metal body portion 10014a to the fitting position is lengthened. There is no problem in suppressing the displacement of the device 10300 in the vertical direction, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal body portion 10014a. A wide arrangement area such as the upper plate 17 and the frame button 22 can be secured.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front side of the outer frame 11 with the left end portion axially supported by the hinge 19 as the center.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachably attached to the hinge 19. By removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Since each of the configurations to be newly described is arranged on the front frame 10014, the description will be described below focusing on the front frame 10014.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 211 and 212, a state in which the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014 is shown.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member forming a skeleton, includes a metal main body portion 10014a integrally configured with the front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are metal main body portions 10014a. It is fastened and fixed to. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal main body portion 10014a side (rear side), and the metal main body portion 10014a has a fastening portion. A through hole is drilled at the position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body portion 10014a, screwing it into the fastening portion, and tightening the fastening member (male screw).

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operating device 10300 is held so as to be sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear of the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, the configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held in the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower plate unit 6400 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a, and is shown in a directional view from the rear side. The assembly direction line connecting the fastening points is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 is plate-shaped so as to project from the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts on the upper surface of the convex portion T10 so as to ride on it.

Below the operating device 10300, a bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is disposed. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is formed to open to the front side, and a recessed portion De2 that opens the opposite side (lower side) and the back side of the inner case member 10330 side. Be prepared.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in a rear view with the lower side open, and is formed in a size that can be fitted to the plate-shaped convex portion T10, that is, is recessed with the plate-shaped convex portion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed in the shape of a thick plate, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-shaped convex portion T10. It should be noted that the fitting here may be such that the bottom member De can be aligned with the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of a gap.

At the tip of the plate-shaped convex portion T10, a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions are formed so as to be able to screw in a fastening screw at an intermediate position between the cylindrical protrusions that are projected toward the front side in a thin columnar shape and the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical projecting portions are inserted into a recess recessed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped convex portion T10 and the bottom member De. The fastening screw that is formed and screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into the insertion hole drilled at the corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and by tightening this fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the recessed portion De2 formed in the latter half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-shaped convex portion T10, while the opposite front half portion (see FIG. 215 (a)) supports the plate-shaped convex portion. It is arranged above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half portion of the bottom member De is arranged so as to face the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be in contact with the resin member 6427.

It should be noted that the possibility of contact here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may be in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be separated from each other, while a load may be applied to the operation device 10300. The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may come into contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward due to a vibration effect.

After fitting the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by fastening a fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front frame 10014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is covered with a plurality of fastening portions 10333 (three locations in the present embodiment) formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and one of the fastening portions 10333 thereof. It is a metal plate, and is mainly provided with a metal plate portion 10334 that is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive a compressive force when fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a formed in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter at which the fastening screw can be inserted. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is arranged on the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a. By forming a through hole in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, the fastening portion 10333 is passed through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body portion 10014a.

Here, in the periphery of the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than that of the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of the through hole is designed so as not to interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is covered on the back surface side of the fastening portion 10333.

As a result, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal body portion 10014a by fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically conductive, they can have the same role as the so-called ground wire. This makes it possible to ensure the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300.

Further, by arranging the metal plate portion 10334 between them, the metal plate portion 10334 can be provided with a washer function. Thereby, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.

The shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw-in hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed so as to be displaced back and forth, the function of the spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The locations where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts required for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in design on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem because the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load in the sinking direction (downward direction) is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the subduction displacement of the operation device 10300 on the front side while concentrating the fastening points on the back side. This will be described in order below.

First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower side of the front surface is fitted with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the fitting portion 6426d, and the subduction displacement is suppressed.

Next, the operations of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include a plate-shaped projecting portion on the back side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 has a plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c that overhangs in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half portion, and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d that further overhang from the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c. Mainly prepared for.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-shaped overhanging portion 10322c that projects in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half portion. The right front cover 10322 is not formed with a portion corresponding to the partially overhanging portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the partially overhanging portion 10321d are configured as portions to be inserted and fitted into the accommodating recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodating recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodating recess 17a has a lower edge overhanging portion 10017b whose lower edge projects to the front side with substantially the same overhang width over the left and right sides of the accommodating recess 17a, and the left and right sides of the accommodating recess 17a. At positions slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhangs 10017b on both sides, they are arranged facing the lower edge overhangs 10017b in a manner of projecting to the front side. A plurality of opposed overhanging portions 10017c forming a groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d having an upper side formed in the front-rear direction as long holes at the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the surface position. And a relief hole 10017e formed in the front-rear direction at a position arranged side by side with the facing overhanging portion 10017c on the right side.

When assembling the operation device 10300 to the accommodating recess 17a, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c, and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d are inserted. Is inserted into each of the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodating recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are fitted into the groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction. Is suppressed.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with the accommodating recess 17a. It is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, since the accommodating recess 17a is formed in an open arch shape on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are in contact with each other on the inside of the arch and accommodating, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the position shift of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load toward the rear to the swing operation member 10310. (Return to the original position at an early stage) is possible.

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, he / she mainly operates it with his / her left hand. In operating the arranged operation device 10300, since the left hand is extended diagonally to the front right, it is rare that the load at the time of the operation has no left-right component.

Therefore, since the load in the left-right direction is applied at the same time as the load toward the rear is applied to the swing operation member 10310, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left-right directions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the accommodating recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them. Therefore, when the operation device 10300 is displaced. The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that may occur occurs in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in the direction of returning the operating device 10300 to the original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be restored at an early stage.

From each of the above configurations, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodating recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating device 10300 with respect to the accommodating recess 17a.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which the fixed assembly portion 6802 described later of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be arranged at a position where it projects outward from the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c.

Next, the operation device 10300 and its surroundings will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), 216 (a) and 216 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207.

215 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIGS. 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b) show. , The state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position (pushing position in the present embodiment) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), in the operation device 10300, the lever member 10340 that pivotally supports the swing operation member 10310 with the shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is centered on the displacement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on the arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1 and the displacement of the shaft support rod 10363. Displacement is possible in a manner combined with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is configured to be generated by the operation of the player.

That is, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in in the form of rotational displacement centered on the shaft support rod 10363. (Pushing operation).

Further, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the lower front side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in the form of rotational displacement centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1. Can be (push down operation).

Further, in the state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation is performed by the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of giving a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b). The member 10310 is in a posture in which the member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (backflip posture, a posture in which the member 10340 is backwardly rotated by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, since the angle of the attitude change of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. ..

Further, when the lens member 10317 that is displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 is pushed (push operation) while the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 is swung due to the load at the time of the operation. The operating member 10310 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft support rod 10363 and displaced in a manner of tilting forward to change the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 in the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply a load for operation from a plurality of directions, and if the load mode is different, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 is also available. It can be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by a drive motor around the lever support shaft 10331d1. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

At the tip of the lever member 10340, a vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is directly or indirectly contacted with the lens member 10317. It is configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move apart from each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a bobbin member (arranged on the lever member 10340 side) which is a cylindrical member around which a copper wire is wound. A disk-shaped plate in which a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. The pressing member is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

The vibrating device 10366 is configured to be capable of generating linear vibration along the direction Y17a along the straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the displacement direction of the lens member 10317.

As a result, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making maximum use of the vibration energy of the vibrating device 10366, and the effect of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

Next, the details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operating device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. In the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, where the outer end portion (the end opposite to the swing operation member 10310) is formed to be curved, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. The radius. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the range of motion of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured, and the player can grip the swing operation member 10310. You can secure a space to put your finger in.

Further, since the bending of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310, the design can be improved and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be caused as a whole. , The allowable range of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L bored in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to both left and right ends of the accommodation recess 17a can be inserted. It is provided with a fixing assembly portion 6802 for inseparably fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330 with a fastening screw.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodating recess 17a through insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the farthest points from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and orthogonal to the left-right direction), and the load is difficult to be transmitted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that is inserted through the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed in the accommodating recess 17a.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and as shown in FIG. 218, the formation position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 is the center in the left-right direction of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. It is considered to be a position shifted to the right side from the portion where the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are located on the backmost side). That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left and right centers to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left and right centers. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

In the present embodiment, since the rear boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is deviated from the center in the left-right direction, one member (the present) is located at the center of the accommodating recess 17a (the portion located on the backmost side). In the embodiment, the alignment with the accommodating recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), so that the assembly can be facilitated as compared with the case where the alignment is performed by both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted during the operation of the operation device 10300. Here, the swing operation member 10310 as a place operated by the player may be placed close to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 on the back side (particularly, they are placed close to each other at an upward position (see FIG. 218)). Since this is a location, there is a risk that the fastening screw will loosen due to the transmission of the load during operation of the operating device 10300. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is arranged so as to be offset from the left and right center where the load at the time of operation is maximum to the left and right, so that the transmitted load is reduced as compared with the load at the time of operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

By shifting the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and also shifting the boundaries between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the same manner, the assembly efficiency can be improved and the fastening screw can be loosened. It can be made less likely to occur.

Both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the fixed assembly portion 6802. That is, in the fixed assembly portion 6802, the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 220), and the upper plate portion thereof is inserted. The fixed assembly 6802 stays sandwiched from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the number of fastening points formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with many fastening points, the rigidity of the fastening screw may make the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 less likely to bend and easily be damaged.

On the other hand, in order to easily bend while maintaining the fastening point, the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be reduced, but in this case, the durability may be lowered or fraudulent activity may be caused. There is a risk of

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening points as in the present embodiment, it is possible to sufficiently bend the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively thinning the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be disassembled left and right in a state of being integrated with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction. Will be done.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 can move relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 can move relative to the right cover member 10324. , The assembly position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be described below.

The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 so that the back side is formed along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 10323a and 10324a, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portion, respectively.

The adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slot 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a recessed in the right direction from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 in contact with the left front cover 10321 and the fitting recess 10322a thereof. In a state where the wall member 10322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the movement to the left is stopped by the end face of the left front cover 10321 to prevent the wall. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

With such a configuration, when the wall member 10322b is replaced, the wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is a load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). It is a place to receive repeatedly). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to the transition from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After being fastened and fixed, the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330 to align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. It is fixed.

Here, if the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 or the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 or the left cover member 10323 is purposely used to correct the misalignment of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322. It is necessary to loosen the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shift the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to make corrections.

Further, in anticipation of this, when the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330 but are weakly fastened and fixed to determine the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 And after fastening and fixing the right front cover 10322 (downstream side of the assembly procedure), the return of the work procedure of fastening and fixing the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure) occurs. However, since the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification (simplification) of the work.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are used as an inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 include the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R on which the front edge portions are opposed to each other. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing the gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and the piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts to be attempted or mischievous acts of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is displaced due to the influence of the load (impact) during operation and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shield plate portion are closed during the operation of the operation device 10300. There is a risk that the 6803L and 6803R will rub against each other and resin shavings will be generated. The effect of resin shavings is small as long as it is small, but if a large amount of resin shavings is clogged in the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by the so-called photocoupler type, the shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a risk that the degree of freedom in selecting the switch that can be adopted is limited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802 as the fastening point of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is located at the left and right center position (the place where the load during operation and the load during operation are generated at the maximum). Since it is arranged at a position separated from the left and right, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a from shifting, prevent the generation of resin shavings, and suppress erroneous detection. In the present embodiment, the photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation in the backflip direction of the swing operation member 10310, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

Then, when the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in the backflip direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, durability can be improved as compared with the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a curved plate portion 6804L, 6804R formed as a continuous curved surface on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, and a front view fan shape on the lower side of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R. The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, which are continuously formed as the plate portions of the above, are mainly provided.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (that is, a lever support shaft 10331d1 (that is, FIG. It is formed as a surface of an arc shape) with a center angle of about 90 degrees centered on).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a protruding interference portion 6805a projecting from the back surface side surface to the back surface side. The protruding interference portion 6805a is arranged slightly inside the inner edge portion Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to project to the back side.

As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a is displaced outward to the left and right in the state where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220). It is regulated by Rm1. Therefore, since the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being disassembled in such a manner that they are separated from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer circumferences of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, and are connected so as to expand toward the outside of the front view and bend toward the front side at the expanded tip. It is provided with curved portions 6806L and 6806R.

The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L, which are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in at the right end portion and are arranged vertically. Further, the right front cover 10322 includes insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, 6808R, which are arranged vertically at the left end portion and are pierced so that fastening screws can be inserted.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). As a result, the load and impact associated with the operation of the operation device 10300 can be dispersed to each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be suppressed.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion that is easily visible to the player (particularly, it is easily visible from the front view). It is possible to prevent the performance of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, see FIG. 207) from deteriorating. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a bored in the left-right direction is sandwiched between the portions protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and the inner case member 10330 is sandwiched and fixed by the fastening screw. .. It should be noted that the tip of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner of contacting the left surface of the plate portion on which the insertion hole 6802R is formed, instead of the so-called “co-tightening” mode. .. In other words, by fastening, a compression load is not generated on the portion of the insertion hole H23a to be bored.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load during operation on the operation device 10300, the operation of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fixed assembly portion 6802 from being similarly displaced when a minute displacement that may occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs.

It should be noted that the extending length of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is bored at the time of fastening. .. In this case, since the restoring force of the portion of the insertion hole H23a to be drilled increases the fastening force, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion protruding toward the front surface of the inner case member 10330. By screwing in the fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In this embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion 6807L and the fastening portion by the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted into a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable along the left-right direction at a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing in the fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion T23b and the fastening portion by the insertion hole 6807R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions where the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R is directly fastened and fixed by being screwed into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion and the insertion hole are formed at a plurality of locations along the forming direction of the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but the combination of the objects to be fastened is formed at each location. It is configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at the same time, so that the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fixed at one place in the same manner, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. can.

After that, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing and fixing the fastening screw in the fixing assembly portion 6802. Further, by screwing and fixing the fastening screw in the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

In this way, by forming a portion where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved as compared with the case where the fastening screw is inserted in both the left and right directions.

Further, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Since the operation direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300 is along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300. It is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of. That is, when a load or impact during operation is generated along the operation direction, no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw is generated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to a load or impact during operation of the operating device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation portions (including a portion operated by operation, for example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, etc.), but all the operation portions are levers. Since the design operates in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if the operation portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operation portion that pushes in the left-right diagonal direction), the operation portion of each operation portion. The direction found as the balance (average) of the operation direction (for example, the intermediate angular direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the operation part with a high frequency of operation instructions may be targeted (operation instructions are rarely generated). You may set the direction of fastening (ignoring the operation part that only requires).

223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the portion to be formed and the portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, a plurality of surfaces arranged to face each other come into contact with each other in the vertical direction.

In the contacting portion, a plate-shaped portion extends to the right from the left front cover 10321 on the side not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending to the right along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, it is restricted that the shielding plate portion 6803R is displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In the present embodiment, the inner case member 10330 arranged below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the back side portion is housed therein, and the lever member 10340 thereof are driven. It is possible to prevent the liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, or an electric system (such as a substrate) that drives the drive motor.

In addition, the cuts of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the center of the left and right of the swing operation member 10310, while the cuts (joining surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same surface as the left and right center positions of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the cuts of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is arranged closer to the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the bulging portion from the inner case member 10330 to the left). Correspondence, see FIG. 218), even if the lower part between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets the part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. It is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, it is restricted that the lower plate portion 6805R is displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-shaped support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body portion 6411 and the lower plate of the lining base member 6410. It may flow through the main body box portion 6421 of the forming member 6420 toward the through hole 6412, or may flow along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the Senryobako.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of the liquid by sandwiching the through hole 6412 without a gap. By suppressing the passage of the liquid between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will hit the player or wet the Senryobako, so that the player can use it. It is possible to configure a pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably.

As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are streaked in a manner of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. It is provided with a streak portion D23 formed in. The streak portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The streak portion D23 has a role as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. That is, the rigidity along the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is maintained while maintaining (or reducing) the rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, as compared with the case where the streak portion D23 is formed as a simple plate. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described by taking the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and have a role as a portion for filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaced downward by a small amount due to a load or impact during operation for the purpose of preventing the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodating recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

That is, when operating the operation device 10300, there is a possibility that a gap may be created between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a. In the present embodiment, by extending the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R in the vertical direction (elastic deformation and bending), it is possible to cope with the change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a, and the gap can be accommodated. Can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed), whereby the deformation resistance in the vertical direction is increased. Since it is made large (because it is made large), it is possible to suppress vibration and excessive deformation when the shape is restored. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for one purpose of taking measures against problems that may occur during the operation of the operation device 10300.

Since the streaky portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, when a downward load is applied in the center, the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R endure upward (pulling force is generated) on both the left and right sides. .. That is, even if a downward load is applied during the operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned to an early stage.

On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side is caused by the allowable deformation based on the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R include an end streak portion D24 formed in a streak shape in a manner of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The end streak portion D24 mainly includes a left and right streak portion D24a formed on the left and right sides and a central streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and each is formed as a countermeasure against a load in different directions.

The left and right streaks D24a are streaks arranged above the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and are formed from a shape that is inclined downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load (along the direction of the load) such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310. That is, the resistance to the operation load can be improved by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a.

As for the inclination angle of the left and right streaks D24a, those arranged on the left and right sides are formed to have a stepwise larger angle with respect to the front-rear direction than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is, the streaks extend in a plurality of directions. This makes it possible to improve the resistance to the load during operation of the lens member 10317 regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

Moreover, the forming width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R on which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the one arranged on the left and right side than in the one arranged on the left and right center side. That is, since the formation width is shortened toward the side (left and right side) where the inclination in the front-rear direction corresponds to a large force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is small, and the resistance force is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the inclination in the front-rear direction is large as the direction in which the load tends to be large during operation (the direction in which the hand is waved down).

On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion arranged downward from the same position as the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that ascends and inclines toward the back side. Formed from. This ascending inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330) tilts forward.

That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central reinforcing portion D24b by the central reinforcing portion D24b, the load during the tilting operation centering on the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 causes the operation device 10300 (inside). It is possible to improve the resistance to the case member 10330) being displaced forward.

Further, the central muscle portion D24b is formed by a total of seven muscles, one in the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center sides toward the back side. As a result, when the operation device 10300 (inner case member 10330) is displaced forward due to the load during the tilting operation centered on the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the displacement occurs in the left-right direction. The resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is greater than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the vertical direction). It becomes a big deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down to the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge portion). When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed), the upper and lower intermediate portions and the upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R bend in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are bent. The load (stress) applied to the load can be released (stress concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of bending and deforming in this way, the lower edge overhanging portion so that the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back surface side to the left and right front sides. It is supported between 10017b and the opposed overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed longer in the front-rear direction toward the left and right outer sides, so that the left front cover 10321 And it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the right front cover 10322 and the accommodating recess 17a.

Further, by making the flexibility of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the downstream side (V-shaped design member) of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300. The ease of transmission to 6450 (see FIG. 232) can be changed by the direction of vibration or load.

That is, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration along the vertical direction and the operation load to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while the vibration and the operation in the left-right direction. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50. It can be difficult to do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to vibration and load being transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50 even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swing operation member 10310. can.

Further, where the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c formed on the upper edges thereof are elongated on the left and right sides. It is inserted between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, in the comparison between the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the shapes of the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c, when the vicinity of the left and right ends is displaced in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the upper end portion on the front side of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrudes to the front side of the accommodating recess 17a), the curvature of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c is loosened (the left and right ends are displaced to the back side). It is preferable to be able to cope with the molding error by deforming it so as to (make it).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the streaky portions D23 are formed on the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R along the vertical direction, the rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R in the left-right direction is compared with the rigidity in the vertical direction. Is lowered. Therefore, when the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are deformed to the side where the bending becomes loose, the deformation of the curved plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. , The deformation width of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the molding error that can be dealt with.

In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (weaken) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the forming direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

From these facts, a defect that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled, see FIG. 213) and a defect that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated by the streak portion D23. It can correspond to both.

It will be described back to FIG. 212. In the present embodiment, a flat plate-shaped flat plate portion (a plate-shaped portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed along the metal main body portion 10014a) is formed on the lower left front portion of the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. And a plate-shaped upper plate portion extending to the front side so as to be bent at the upper end portion of the upper portion of the flat plate portion, which is configured to be inclined downward toward the right. In the embodiment, a back covering portion 10014b formed of a resin material is arranged. That is, the back covering portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross-sectional shape on a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The back covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is abutted (connected) to the flat plate portion at the rear end portion and is abutted (connected) to the upper plate portion at the right end portion thereof. In the region (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back covering portion 10014b face each other, balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, and the like are stored. Will be. Next, the details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower plate unit 6400 is shown at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a so as to cover the front side of the metal body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). The base member 6410, the lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted to the lining base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and the lower plate that is a plate-shaped device attached to the lining base member 6410 from below. On the other hand, the ball discharging device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420 and the lower plate forming member 6420 at the left end of the lining base member 6410 can be attached to the lining base member 6410 in a manner capable of preventing the lower plate forming member 6420 from coming off. An intermediate holding member 6440 that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side), and a V that is arranged on the front upper portion of the lining base member 6410 and is formed in a V shape from the front view from the resin material. Mainly includes a character design member 6450.

The lining foundation member 6410 has a main body portion 6411 whose lower bottom surface is formed in a substantially flat shape and whose back surface and upper surface are open in a substantially box shape, and a slight skeleton portion in the front-rear direction in the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through hole 6412 formed through the remaining hole 6412, and a projecting shape portion 6413 projecting downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the left-right center side of the main body portion 6411 with reference to the through hole 6412, and a protrusion thereof. On the back side of the shape portion 6413, a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protrusion shape portion 6413 is substantially equal to the other portion of the main body portion 6411 is mainly provided.

By configuring the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protrusion shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protrusion shape portion 6413. It can be suppressed. The projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 exert a plurality of advantageous effects at a position where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the size of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is formed to be much larger than the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball pulling lever 52.

By forming the through hole 6412 in advance in this way, the ejection speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 can be adjusted to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the lining base member 6410. It is possible to correspond to the discharge speed of the ball.

That is, the ejection speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as that of the bottom opening 6432, the ejection speed of the ball is set to that. It cannot be made larger than this. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, the size of the bottom opening 6432 may be changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 may be changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412. (If the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is changed), the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the ball from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the lining base member 6410. In other words, the ejection speed (emission mode) of the ball can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

The demand for changing the ejection speed of the ball is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a manner that requires the payout ball to be transferred to the Senryobako, and a case in which the payout ball is installed in a manner that does not need to be transferred to the Senryobako (so-called "personal"). In the case of).

When it is necessary to transfer the payout ball to the Senryobako, if the ball is ejected at high speed, the ball may overflow from the Senryobako frequently, so the ball ejection is designed to be slower than the specified speed. It is desirable to be done.

In the present embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and is based on a comparison between the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a sphere shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]). The upper limit of the balls ejected from the opening at the same time is limited to about 7.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the payout ball to the Senryobako, there is no need to worry about the ball overflowing from the Senryobako, so that the upper limit of the desired ball ejection speed changes significantly in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the discharged balls flow into the automatic counters arranged in each of the pachinko machines 10010. Therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, the balls are built in the automatic counter. The operating speed of the ball sink device is exemplified.

As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the ejection speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but there is a possibility that the strength of the main body portion 6411 is lowered. There is. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so that the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 are arranged. However, there is a risk that it will be limited to the extent that it can withstand the load during operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the lining foundation member 6410 in a manner of compensating for the decrease in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the line shown by the imaginary line in FIGS. 224 and 225 as the fastening direction in a manner of sandwiching the lining foundation member 6410 from above and below. , The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Thereby, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long skeleton portions located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejection device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited in any way. For example, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 come into contact with each other before the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened (arranged at the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), although there are gaps between each other before fastening, the design mode may be such that the gaps can be filled by tightening the fastening screws and pressure can be applied.

Further, the portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side portion near the projecting shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (the long plate portion arranged behind the through hole 6412) that may be impacted each time it is opened or closed. Since a large load is likely to occur, it is preferable to adopt a design mode that suppresses the load.

In this way, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured, so that the bottom opening 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about the decrease in strength due to the above. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. The L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting from the back side of the bottom surface of the 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from the bottom surface, and the ball ejection device 6430 projecting downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) the range surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 into which fastening screws are screwed, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge portion of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421. Mainly includes a plate-shaped support portion 6426 extending to the right from the right end portion of the above, and a flexible resin member 6427 mounted on the upper surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position which is the front end portion of the lower plate 50 and is the right end portion. The upper surface of the bottom of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface in a manner of descending and inclining toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball flowing into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down toward the discharge port 6422 and is discharged. Since the outlet 6422 is arranged on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 where a load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur, and the influence of the strength decrease due to the formation of the through hole is considered. However, the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has a different protrusion length at the left and right positions, which corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, the lower plate 50 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the right, so that the upper surface of the lower bottom portion (through hole) of the main body portion 6411 is formed. In order to bring it into contact with the upper surface of the edge portion of 6412), it is necessary to shorten the protrusion length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 toward the right, which corresponds to this. Due to this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end portion (lower end portion) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is abutted against the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (contact by line contact or surface contact). Ru).

The fastening portion 6424 is formed at two locations on the front side end where a load from the player is likely to occur, and one on the back side end where a load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing the fastening points in the places where the load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the fixing from being displaced when the load is generated and the position of the lower plate forming member 6420 from being displaced while limiting the fastening points. ..

Further, since the fastening portion 6424 is arranged near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411 is separately provided even though the fastening portion is fastened inside the through hole 6412. It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge portion of the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410 (while fastening without forming the relative position). Can be done). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 while eliminating the need for forming through holes other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 is used for both the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball pulling lever 52 and the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is formed from a long plate shape on the left and right, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Since it slides in the left-right direction corresponding to the above, the movement guidance of the ball pulling lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in pairs as described above, the given load can be dispersed. Further, even if one is damaged, there is no problem in using it as long as the other remains, so that the useful life of the lower plate unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or another flexible member having an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball removing lever 52 is arranged, a circular bottom surface opening 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 that are arranged at positions that overlap with the fastening portion 6424 of 6420 and are tightened by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame shape that surrounds the fastening hole 6433. Mainly includes a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410.

The ball pulling lever 52 has a grip portion 52a projecting forward so that the player can operate it in a manner of sliding left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). A pair of rib-shaped portions that project upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extend along the left-right direction, and are guided ribs 52c guided by the guide rib 6425. Is integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom surface opening 6432 is vertically and vertically opposed to the discharge port 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between them. As described above, when the ball pulling lever 52 is not operated, the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being lowered while adopting the configuration (arranged).

The details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 is provided with a flange portion 6431a that projects outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat surface side and both left and right sides) except the front side. The fitting frame portion 6434 is internally fitted into the through hole 6412 of the lining foundation member 6410 with a gap in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and when the ball discharging device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the collar is fitted. The portion 6431a abuts on the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed so as to be able to abut from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front-back and left-right directions, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is formed. , As described above, abuts in the vertical direction with the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

In this way, the ball discharge device 6430 can be positioned on the lining foundation member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharge device 6430. Each configuration can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, the assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the lining foundation member 6410 is inserted, and has a plurality of through holes 6441 projecting from the front side and a metal main body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). At the portion where the screw inserted into the formed through hole is fastened and fixed, and the plurality of fastening portions 6442 projecting to the back side and the portion that interferes with the left upper end portion of the lining foundation member 6410 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes an interference portion 6443 formed in the shape of a plate.

FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back surface side is opened and the opening width is narrowed toward the center of the left and right, and the V-shaped main body portion 6451 is arranged downward toward the center of the left and right. A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the main body 6451, a positioning portion 6453 formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body 6451, and left and right of the main body 6451. Formed in the form of a plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 that are formed so as to be extended to the back side near the end portion so that the fastening screw can be screwed in, and a plate shape that extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side portion of the main body portion 6451. It is formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the left side of the main body 6451 and a plurality of right side reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the long direction of the main body 6451 and aligned in the long direction of the main body 6451. Mainly provided with a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. As a result, it is possible to limit the places where a through hole is likely to be formed in order for a person who commits an illegal act to invade the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. That is, it is less difficult to make a through hole in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 than in the case of making a through hole in the V-shaped design member 6450. It can be directed to open the right front cover 10322.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the points to be checked regularly to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the check load can be reduced as compared with the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed of a thin wall, and can be flexed and deformed in a direction in which the groove width is narrowed (it can be flexed and deformed in a manner of being crushed up and down). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, the vertical displacement that may occur during the operation of the operation device 10300 is transmitted via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Be transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 bends and deforms in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is caused by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

That is, after operating at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 by deforming the V-shaped design member 6450, it can be transmitted to the downstream thereof (for example, the lining foundation member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the displacement amount of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed by the operation. Or, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 has a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with respect to the center of the left and right, and a plate-shaped protruding portion protruding toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. Mainly equipped with 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion fixed to the lining foundation member 6410 by screwing the fastening screw into the recess formed on the front side with the fastening portion of the lining foundation member 6410 inserted from the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a manner approaching from the back surface side of the lining foundation member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 226 and 227).

It should be noted that at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in the present embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is invisible in the assembling state from the viewpoint of the insertion direction of the fastening screw into the lower plate forming member 6420 (FIG. 230 (b)). That is, in the state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the lining foundation member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the lining foundation member 6410 to the V-shaped design member. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a pre-stage for disassembling the 6450, the number of man-hours required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front-side vertically elongated portion 6426c described later in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted, and the fastening screw is inserted to the lower right fastening portion 6453L. It is provided with an insertion portion 6426c1 to be fixed with. In addition, the operating device 10300 is disposed in such a manner that the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded from the rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, on the premise of disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the shielding position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the required man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to illegally remove the V-shaped design member 6450 and suppress fraudulent acts that enter the inside through the created gap.

The plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R abuts on the upper surface of the front vertical portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R.

As a result, for example, even when the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) and the fitting portion 6426d of the operating device 10300 are applied. The front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction as the operating device 10300 is displaced in the ascending direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, the ascending displacement of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions where fastening screws to be inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed in, and the fastening position is , The back side (the side close to the metal body portion 10014a) from the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

The right-side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left-side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin-walled shape that can be flexed and deformed by themselves, so that displacement transmission to the downstream due to their own deformation is performed. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the above. As shown in FIG. 227, the left side reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged more densely than the right side reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. In addition, in FIG. 228 (a) and FIG. 228 (b), the cross section in the plane which divides the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction is shown. Further, while the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have a common thickness, they are designed so as to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction according to the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right side reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a joint portion to be coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 6455a, an upper facing portion 6455b arranged parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and an embodiment in which the separation width increases toward the back surface side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. Mainly includes a lower facing portion 6455c, which is arranged so as to face each other in a manner inclined by.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and the load can be distributed in the front-rear position. As a result, the load capacity of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

In this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and it is possible to prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of powder (dust).

The lower facing portion 6455c is reinforced on the right side because the separation width from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 becomes longer toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the back side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to be large). The allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when the displacement occurs.

Therefore, since the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the displacement and the load transmitted via the right front cover 10322 to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322, but the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member for operation. It is possible to reduce the rate at which the load, displacement, and vibration associated with the operation and drive of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51. As a result, it is possible to ensure the playability that the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left side reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a joint portion connected to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. The 6456a, the upper facing portion 6456b which is arranged parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and the overhanging portion 6456c which projects toward the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower facing portion 6456d which is arranged parallel to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap, and is mainly provided.

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point, and the load can be distributed in the front-rear position. As a result, the load capacity of the left side reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

In this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and it is possible to prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of powder (dust).

The overhanging portion 6456c is provided with an upper edge portion that is inclined in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the back surface side. As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is not formed as a portion that always abuts on the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that abuts only when the downward displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhanging portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement when the displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

The upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at a surface position with the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted via the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be lengthened, the load capacity of the left-side reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the back covering portion 10014b when the back covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower facing portion and the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. Is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 abut on the back covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed and the amount of downward displacement of the back covering portion 10014b can be reduced. ..

As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (a space in which balls are stored and a space in which a player may touch) is created. It can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the back covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, but the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back covering portion 10014b. Can be suppressed. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate an abnormal noise.

As described above, the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged on the right side reinforcing ribs as compared to the placement interval of 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the ball stored in the upper plate 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load unevenness is likely to occur on the left and right sides. By arranging them in a row, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 different in shape, it is possible to cope with different modes of load. That is, in the right side reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to block the transmission of the load, thereby causing a momentary load or impact via the operation device 10300. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 distributes and supports the load so that the weight is applied to the back even when the weight is applied through the precision plate 17 for a long time. It is possible to prevent the lining portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to be able to cope with the mode of the load which tends to be a problem.

229 (a) is a top view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower plate unit. It is a left side view in the arrow R direction view of 6400.

As shown in FIGS. 229 (a) and 230 (b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the concave shape portion 6414 of the lining base member 6410 to the left and right. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed so as to be in surface contact with the upper portion of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being arranged away from the recessed shape portion 6414. The details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are portions of a portion that bulges downward (extends) from the lower surface in the same manner as the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 is pressed from above. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 in the bottom view and the inner shape of the concave shape portion 6414 in the top view are formed as a shape whose scale is changed by the amount that the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be secured. To. Therefore, from one shape, the other shape can be easily imagined.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the width of the projecting shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414, and thus the protruding shape portion. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, which will be described in detail later.

Here, in a game-playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 may be displaced up and down as the player operates the operation device 10300. In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are formed of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410. Shavings may be generated by collision or rubbing.

When shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, shavings may enter the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor and induce erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings or reduce the amount of shavings generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414, so that the main body portion 6411 It is possible to eliminate the displacement of other parts such as.

On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced ascendingly, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member. Since it is converted into a deformation of 6450, it is possible to eliminate the displacement of other parts such as the main body portion 6411.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that rises and inclines toward. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on the floor of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt on the floor adheres to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body 6411 is difficult to see from the player, it is preferable to avoid dirt from adhering to the product as long as it is a product.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the front side. When the shape portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. can do. Therefore, when the front frame 10014 is installed in a playable state, the game store side only needs to wipe off the dirt on the projecting shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. ..

Further, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion on which a finger is hung when carrying the front frame 10014. In the past, the lower plate part was placed in the center of the left and right sides of the front plate, so it is easy to lift the front frame by hooking your hand on the lower plate part and assemble it to the back frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side (opening / closing shaft side) in the left-right direction, it is difficult to lift and assemble the front frame 10014 by catching a hand on the lower plate 50. It is said that it has a similar structure.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking a hand on the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the root side of the operation handle 41, so that the operation handle 51 may be damaged, which is recommended. Is not desirable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projecting shape portion 6413, which also functions as a finger hook portion, is arranged at the left and right center positions so that it can be recommended to catch the hand on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400 and lift the front frame 10014. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the back frame by hooking his / her hand on the projecting shape portion 6413 to lift the front frame 10014 and axially supporting the front frame 10014 to the back frame.

Then, by setting the work procedure to wipe off the dirt before and after the time when the finger is put on, it is possible to make the worker aware of the part where the dirt needs to be wiped off in relation to the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off the dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is not excessive or deficient according to the magnitude of the amount of deformation expected in the protruding shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411, the gap between the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface becomes larger toward the front side. It corresponds to the increase in the amount of deformation (deflection amount) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, even if the projecting shape portion 6413 bends and deforms due to the weight of the front frame 10014, it is easy to secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor. Can be done. On the other hand, when the projecting shape portion 6413 bends and deforms to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 may easily come into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 mounted on the floor is heavier than expected or the front frame 10014 mounted on the floor is overloaded, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the floor.

Further, it is said that the deformable amount is formed larger toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413. It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging the Senryobako, a clerk at the amusement store slides the Senryobako back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. May collide. If the impact or load due to this collision is accumulated in the constituent members as fatigue, the constituent members will be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the projecting shape portion 6413 increases toward the front side where it easily collides with the Senryobako. Therefore, the impact and load due to the collision with the Senryobako can be easily released by deformation (deflection deformation), and the destruction of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable playing environment for the player.

Further, on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the Senryobako and the main body 6411 collide with each other on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413 when the Senryobako is replaced. As a result, the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is damaged can be reduced, so that it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable playing environment for the player.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are shown, and the outer shapes of the other operating devices 10300 are schematically shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 have reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b) of the V-shaped design member 6450 (FIGS. 228 and 228). b) Supported by)).

Since the main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed into a plate shape extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 Is directed in a direction (upward diagonal direction) having a directional component for returning the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 is directed upward and diagonally.

This makes it possible to handle not only the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement. For example, even when the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (for example, the swinging operating member 10310) does not have a left-right component as in the present embodiment, the downward load given by the player is left-right. It may have a directional component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can cope with the displacement of the operation device 10300 in the left-right direction by bending and deforming based on its own curved shape (absorbing the displacement in the left-right direction or by the restoring force). The arrangement of the operating device 10300 can be returned), and further, the reaction forces from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are directed upward and toward the center of the left and right, so that the operating device 10300 can be returned to the position before the displacement at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design (see FIG. 207) of the front frame 10014 in the front view.

233 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa of FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the vicinity of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in the assembled state of the lower plate unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is a protrusion of the lower plate forming member 6420 (the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 on the back surface side portion). It is pressed against the end portion (lower end portion)) and the ball ejection device 6430 (the flange portion 6431a). As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that allows contact from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224) in the front-rear and left-right directions, and is L-shaped. As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 abuts on the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, since the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 when not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being lowered while adopting the configuration (arranged).

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the recessed depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to be more easily bent toward the front side.

As a result, sufficient bending performance can be imparted to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to be large, so that when the operation device 10300 is operated, the concave shape portion 6414 can be provided with sufficient bending performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lining foundation member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) by the load. This will be described in detail.

As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. The operation timing and the operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player is made to operate the operation device 10300 according to the notification, and has a role of drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is stopped and controlled at the initial position from the start of the game to the execution of a specific reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, the player executes a pushing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation for a notification (notification such as "press a button!") That prompts an operation in the display effect, a stage switching, and the like. To. Therefore, most of the load generated by the operation is the load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is the load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215 (a)). Since the frequency of notifications is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is driven and controlled so as to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down, for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at a downward position. The notification prompting the operation is executed in the state (see FIG. 215 (b)).

In this case, the operation direction is the direction Y17b (see FIG. 215 (b)) that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position, and is in that direction Y17b. A load is generated along the line. Since the notification is generated only when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is widened toward the front side and the recessed depth is increased. Therefore, the load is increased toward the front side. It is formed so that the corresponding performance of is high.

That is, it can be configured to cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load in a suitable place as compared with the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It is possible to easily avoid being easily damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the side close to the player and the side where the load is frequently generated during operation are both the front side, the concave shape portion 6414 is wide enough to face the front side. , But not necessarily limited to this, although it was formed in the deep bottom. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of occurrence of the load during the operation is reversed. In this case, the concave shape is widened toward the back side. By forming it in the deep bottom, it can be configured to respond to the difference in the frequency of load occurrence at the right place compared to the case where it has a common shape in the front-back direction, and it is deformed too much due to the applied load. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem or the fragility due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b hits the main body portion 6411 at positions on the left and right outer sides of the left and right width both ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Contact.

As a result, the ratio of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 to the recessed shape portion 6414 can be reduced as compared with the case where the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b abuts on the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by the load when operating the operation device 10300.

Further, as a response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate-shaped portion from the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used. Therefore, the load capacity can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 has a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed and the left and right and trailing edge portions of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. A front vertical portion that is formed to be taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a by being connected to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape. It mainly includes a 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d extending from the front vertical portion 6426c to the rear side and being fitted with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are appropriately referred to.

The flat plate-shaped portion 6426a is formed to be wider than the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. A hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides). That is, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a does not abut on the main body portion 6411, but is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom surface (see FIG. 225). , The position of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with respect to the lining foundation member 6410 is determined.

As described above, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are formed in a box shape with an open bottom instead of a block shape, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is composed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion. The 6426b can also be flexed and deformed, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the lining base member 6410 (main body portion 6411, protruding shape portion 6413, and concave shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 can be formed. It is possible to further prevent damage.

The hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b extends to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend until it enters the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is formed between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shaped portion 6414 (see the lower part of the rear end portion of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shaped portion 6414 also serves as a drainage. For example, even when the liquid infiltrates through the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted through the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can infiltrate into the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid infiltrating behind. Thereby, the infiltration of the liquid can be easily stopped by the front frame 10014.

The front side vertically elongated portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operation device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d extending to the back side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load given to the operation device 10300 by the player can be distributed not only to the main body 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load given to each configuration can be weakened. can.

In addition, a space is also created between the vertically elongated portion 6426c on the front side and the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the vertically elongated portion 6426c on the front side and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drainage. For example, even when the liquid infiltrates through the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted through the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can infiltrate into the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid infiltrating behind. Thereby, the infiltration of the liquid can be easily stopped by the front frame 10014.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed to be laterally long so as to be able to be fitted with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to the lower surface and the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c formed on the extending base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can withstand even when a load is applied to displace the operating device 10300 downward. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load due to the operation and vibration of the player's operation member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 6426 via the resin member, and is transmitted to the lining base member 6410 arranged downstream thereof, where the plate-like shape is transmitted. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear in the direction of the load transmitted from the operating member 10300 to the main body portion 6411. The component in the direction can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the back surface side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes and affects the flow mode of the fired ball, or the board is cracked due to the load transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 and the electronic board. Can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the upper staging device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 235 and 236, the illustration of the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 described above is omitted, and the state in which the upper staging device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body portion 10014a is shown.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper staging device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the audio device 6610 arranged in pairs on the left and right, and has an illuminated substrate 6570 in which light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. , Each component that acts as an intermediary for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (leaf spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the separation direction from the metal main body portion 10014a is arranged on the back surface side of the upper staging device 6500. As a result, it is possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the upper staging device 6500 to the metal main body portion 10014a (stable fastening and fixing).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper staging device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper staging device 6500. In addition, in FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper staging device 6500 is disassembled upward is shown.

The upper staging device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, a front unit 6520 to 6550 that occupies a front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and a rear unit 6560 to arranged behind the front unit 6520 to 6550. Mainly equipped with 6580.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper effect device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. A plurality of insertion holes 6512 formed up and down near the front side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6511 so that fastening screws can be inserted, and extending downward from the back side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extension tip, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 configured to be capable of fastening a fastening screw to be inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a into the female screw hole are mainly provided.

In the upper lid member 6510, the back side portion where the fastening portion 6513 is extended is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and the other constituent members of the upper staging device 6500 are supported by the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6512. That is, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be utilized to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper staging device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 is provided with a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in such a manner that it tilts forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate on which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513 and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has the sound device 6610 and the metal body portion 10014a. It can be prevented from coming off from.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and the concave-convex shape portion 6514 formed in a manner of projecting downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. With this uneven shape portion 6514, it is possible to increase the force to resist the load in the vertical direction of the plane (maintaining the shape) as compared with the case where the upper lid member 6510 having the same thickness is composed of a plate-shaped member having a smooth surface. Can be made easier).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper staging device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper staging device 6500. In FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper lid member 6510 of the upper staging device 6500 is not shown, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are shown in a disassembled state in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In the present embodiment, the front side unit 6520 to 6550 is moved diagonally forward and downward with respect to the rear side unit 6560 to 6580 (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed and the direction along which the surface is along) to achieve the upper staging device 6500. Can be disassembled, but details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the front unit 6520 to 6550 has a role of receiving, refracting, or transmitting light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED, and the rear unit 6560 to 6580 emits light of an LED or the like. It has a role as a means and a role of supporting an illuminated substrate on which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

241 (a) is a front view of the rear unit 6560 to 6580, FIG. 241 (b) is a front view of the illuminated substrate 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective of the rear unit 6560 to 6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit 6560-6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear unit 6560 to 6580 has a partition member 6560 formed in a manner of partitioning the internal space into a plurality of sections in a front view, and a plurality of LEDs irradiating the partition member 6560 with light. A pair of the illuminated substrate 6570 to be arranged and the partition member 6560 laminated on the back side and arranged with a slight gap with respect to the illuminated substrate 6570 in the internal region of the outer shape, and surface-supported in the outer shape portion. The back support member 6580 and the back support member of the above are mainly provided.

It should be noted that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaced back and forth by the gap. Means that.

The partition member 6560 is arranged so as to face each other in close proximity to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is configured to partition the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 from the vicinity of the illuminated substrate 6570. To. By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, and the emission mode of the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 is significantly different. However, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partition member 6560 has a facing plate portion 6651 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the left and right central portions of the facing plate portion 6651, and holes in the left and right lower portions of the facing plate portion 6651. A left-right light hole 6563 to be provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the facing plate portion 6651. , A rectangular cylinder that surrounds the central light hole 6562 and extends to the front side of the facing plate portion 6651, and a long tubular portion that surrounds the left and right light holes 6563 to the front side of the facing plate portion 6651. A plate-shaped connection formed from an extended left and right cylindrical portion 6567 and a T-shaped plate-shaped portion in front view to connect the facing plate portion 6651, the central tubular portion 6566, and the left and right tubular portions 6567 on the front side of the facing plate portion 6651. Mainly includes a section 6568.

The facing plate portion 6651 includes flange portions 6651a to 6561c that project from the upper edge portion to the back surface side in a long left-right shape. The first flange portion 6651a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6651b is formed as a pair on the left and right, and extends from a position where a cut is made from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portion 6651c is formed as a pair on the left and right sides, and extends from a position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6651b across the fastening portion 6564 to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-shaped joint portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6651c has a role as a shielding plate for preventing light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570, and the cut thereof is arranged at least on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is configured in a place where the light emitted from the LED is less likely to leak. In other words, this portion is a portion where even if light is incident from the outside, the light is not easily mixed with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange portion 6651a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563, and the LED is intentionally placed on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is a break where it is not placed. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

The cut between the second flange portion 6651b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at the place where the fastening part 6564 is arranged, and the place where the alternative part that blocks light is arranged is taken as the cut. It was done. That is, even if the light travels to the cut, the light that is about to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that the occurrence of the event that the light leaks from the cut can be suppressed.

Here, the flange portions 6651a to 6651c can be configured as a series of seamless portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6651a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently secured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. (Assuming a downward load applied to a member placed in front of the partition member 6560, a load given by gravity or a player), it is necessary to counteract only by the force generated by the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fastening portion 6564. Occurs. In the present embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the illuminated substrate 6570 decreases, and the places where the LEDs can be arranged are limited. It will reduce the design freedom of 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6651a to 6651c into lengths that can secure the rigidity, it is possible to counter the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 by the rigidity of the flange portions 6651a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, the work man-hours can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the illuminated substrate 6570 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the long direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6651c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the upper staging device 6500 is formed from a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the center of the left and right in the top view (see FIG. 237). Generally, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front side end portion of the upper staging device 6500, so that the load given by the player at the left and right central portions of the upper staging device 6500 is the maximum. And gradually becomes smaller as it approaches the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6651c have different lengths. More specifically, the left-right length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right thereof is longer than the left-right length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximized. Further, the third flange portion 6651c arranged on the left and right thereof is longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left-right length is the shortest in the left-right center part, and gradually becomes longer as it approaches the left-right end part. As a result, it is possible to generate a counterforce against the load applied to the upper staging device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

As a result, deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 can be stably maintained. It should be noted that the maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separation direction to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being displaced, and the deformation in the approaching direction is not limited. This also includes the case where a load in the compression direction is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 due to displacement or displacement to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being destroyed or deformed.

The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563 are a plurality of through holes drilled corresponding to the LED pattern arranged on the illuminated substrate 6570. The central light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes sized to enclose a plurality of LEDs. ..

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed so as to project toward the back surface side from the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylinder portion extending to the front side in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a in which a fastening screw can be inserted at the bottom of the tip. A fastening screw that passes through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a from the back surface side, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to the partition unit 6540 described later. With this configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). can.

The central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear end portions of the front unit 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 is incident on the front unit 6520 to 6550.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 is a portion in which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper staging device 6500, and the central cylinder portion 6566. The upper surface is placed slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, since the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 takes charge of the load prior to the central cylinder portion 6566, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylinder portion 6566, and the central cylinder portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. It is possible to easily avoid such a situation.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 is extended downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right tubular portions 6567. As a result, when the load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portion reaching the left and right tubular portions 6567 also counteracts the load. can do. In this case, since it is formed by the plate-shaped portion, a counterforce can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-shaped portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right tubular portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The illuminated circuit board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and is a fastening portion through which the plate-shaped substrate portion 6571 and the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 are inserted or cut out in the substrate portion 6571. An insertion portion 6572, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 formed in the substrate portion 6571 through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs arranged in the left and right central portions of the substrate portion 6571 (FIG. 241 (FIG. 241). It is formed of a first illumination unit 6574 formed from (shown by a uniform rectangle in b)) and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574, and is formed in the upper and lower centers of the substrate unit 6571. A second lighting unit 6575 arranged near the unit, a third lighting unit 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571, and a connector 6577 connecting electrical wiring (not shown) are provided. Mainly prepare.

As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction, and is relative to the partition member 6560. They are arranged according to the positional relationship. That is, the first lighting unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting unit 6576 is under the partition member 6560. Each is placed below the edge. As a result, each lighting unit 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area partitioned by the partition member 6560. The first lighting unit 6574 and the second lighting unit 6575 illuminate the inner region of the partition member 6560, while the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the outer region of the partition member 6560.

The third lighting unit 6576 is shown so as to be partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in the front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third lighting unit 6576 travels diagonally downward by the light receiving member 6558, it is necessary to avoid a situation in which the light emitted from the third lighting unit 6576 is blocked by the partition member 6560. As a result, the third lighting unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged so as to overlap at least partially in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the substrate portion 6571 is designed so that the fastening force in fastening the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 does not act in the fastening insertion portion 6571. That is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed from a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval) when viewed from the front. This can improve the assembly efficiency, but the details will be described later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members having substantially symmetrical shapes with each other. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the back side, and a front plate. A pair of rear box portions 6584, which is connected to the left and right edges of the portion 6581 (the edge opposite to the opposite side of the pair of members) and the lower edge portion and is formed in a box shape and is opened to the back side. A lower box portion 6585 which is a portion of the portion 6584 and has a smooth upper surface on the side close to the rear surface box portion 6584 and is formed in a box shape which is open downward, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion thereof. A plate-shaped portion connected to the 6581 and facing the mating member (rear support member 6580) and facing the facing plate portion 6586, and a cut penetrating vertically between the facing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. It mainly includes a notch portion 6587, which is a notch.

The front plate portion 6581 is a plurality of fastening supports composed of an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A through hole formed from a vertically long oval shape having a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the portion 6581a and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560, and is arranged at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front-rear direction. A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly bored in the lower edge portion constituting the boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear box portion 6584 and capable of inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front unit 6520 to 6550, and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c thereof. Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of positioning elongated holes 6581d which are formed in a long hole shape along the lower edge portion constituting the boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and used for positioning the front unit 6520 to 6550, and an electric wire. It is mainly provided with a wiring hole 6581e, which is formed at a position corresponding to the connector 6571 of the decorative substrate 6570 and allows electrical wiring to pass back and forth.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction constituting the minor diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is the illuminated substrate 6570. It is made longer than the left-right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the oval rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the oval rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front unit 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front unit 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the direction of inclination in which the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination. (See FIG. 247).

As a result, it becomes easier to avoid interference between the front unit 6520 to 6550 and the illuminated substrate 6570 as compared with the case where the opening is made in the front-rear direction, and the positions of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are moved closer to the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed with the same size, a wide arrangement area of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be secured, and when the illuminated substrate 6570 is formed with the same size. The area forming the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6651a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (load in the hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion for suppressing the forward tilt of the partition member 6560.

The upper plate portion 6583 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be matable with the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is formed in a rectangular shape in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) with the upper and rear sides open.

The rear box portion 6584 includes an overhanging portion 6584a that projects toward the front side of the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmission portion 6584b made of punching metal that is covered with an opening formed in the overhanging portion 6584a, and a right member. The light receiving portion 6584c formed from the light transmissive member arranged at the right end portion of the overhanging portion 6584a, and the light receiving portion 6584c are arranged at the position closest to the center of the upper end portion (the position closer to the front plate portion 6581), and are in an assembled state. (See FIG. 207), the pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed so as to be able to generate an urging force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body 10014a, and the upper lid member 6510 are inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237). It mainly includes a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

The overhanging portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed from a shape along the lower edge shape of the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 241), and the upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front unit 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission unit 6584b is a portion through which a voice wave generated from the sound device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmission unit 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

The light receiving unit 6584c is a portion that receives light emitted from the lighting unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014 and shows it to the player as a light emitting effect. Is. In this embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, while the light emitting effect of the illuminated substrate 6570 is executed at the time of a variable effect having a high probability of occurrence, a normal variable effect, a reach effect, a demo effect, etc., the light emitting effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. It is executed when an extremely low and extremely advantageous effect is generated for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion where the front unit 6520 to 6550 enters from the lower side, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted from the back side is fastened to the metal main body portion 10014a.

The cutout portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from an exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is bored up and down on the lower surface of the left and right central portion (the portion farthest from the vibrating membrane 6611) of the acoustic device 6610. To form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d supporting the back surface side of the acoustic device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound that goes to the back side due to the vibration of the vibration film 6611, as opposed to a sound that is output as a sound that goes to the front side due to the vibration of the vibration film 6611. The sound is emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 to the outside through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, it is possible to simultaneously generate sounds having different tones.

244 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241; FIG. 244 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the CCXLIVb of FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the section member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVb line, and FIG. 6570, a partial cross-sectional view of a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610, FIG. 245 (b) is a section member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. 241. It is a partial cross-sectional view, and FIG. 246 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241. FIG. 246 (b). Is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. 241.

In addition, in FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is enlarged and shown. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. As a result, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the illuminated substrate 6570 (vibration width) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. ..

As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6580 of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the illuminated substrate 6570 sandwiched therein. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, in the illuminated substrate 6570, the fastening insertion portion 6571 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening portion.

Further, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a abuts on the back surface of the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the illuminated substrate 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is not sandwiched in the front-rear position, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilt displacement).

Further, the lower edge portion of the illuminated substrate 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape to such an extent that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a)). It will be described that the formation in this way facilitates the assembly of the partition member 6560 to the back surface support member 6580.

As in the past, for example, when the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564, the partition member 6560 is positioned vertically and horizontally with respect to the back support member 6580. Will need to be assembled.

However, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, the back support member 6580 of the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align with the above, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ribs and the positioning holes 6581b of the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, and the fastening support portion 6581a have a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Since it is formed by, it can be assembled even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

As an example of the assembly order, first, the illuminated substrate 6570 is attached to the compartment member 6560 so that the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the compartment member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570. At this time, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 does not need to be determined in the long direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be an arbitrary position.

In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6651a to 6651c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illuminated substrate 6570, so that the partition member of the illuminated substrate 6570 is formed when the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560. The misalignment with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the elongated direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at an arbitrary position. That is, rough positioning (for example, positioning such that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242) and positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction) may be performed. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved with respect to the back support member 6580 in the long direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, screw in the fastening screw (see FIG. 244 (a)).

In this state, even if the position of the illuminated substrate 5670 is displaced, the partition member 6560 is lowered to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)) by its own weight. And aligned with the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is non-fixedly arranged between the partition member 6560 and the back support member, and it is generally easy to have difficulty in aligning the illuminated substrate 6570. By forming the ribs and the positioning hole 6581b of the fastening insertion portion 6772, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, and the fastening support portion 6581a in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape), although it is an assembly mode. , The assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

The expansion hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T shape in the center of the left and right (arranged at four locations, see FIG. 241), and is arranged in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) outside the enlarged hole 6562a. It is mainly provided with a direct entry hole 6562b (arranged at eight locations, see FIG. 241). The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined so that the facing distance increases toward the distance.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be defined. That is, the way the light is shown to the player can be changed depending on the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion raised toward the front surface of the enlarged hole 6562a is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). As a result, the light that has passed through the expansion hole 6562a can be incident on the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 without leaking.

FIG. 246 (a) shows the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) shows the positioning slot 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front unit 6520 to 6550 are formed from the rear unit 6560 to the rear unit 6560 to the inclination direction. It is assembled to 6580 and fastened and fixed.

Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where the front units are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the illuminated substrate 6570 can be positioned so as to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be secured. .. On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front unit 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, it is possible to secure the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed in such a manner that the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the vibration film 6611 of the speaker is arranged. It can be formed (see FIGS. 235 and 246).

As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning slot 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. The reason why it is formed (not inclined) is that the resin mold used in manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed on the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the support portion 6581a, the fitting recessed portion 6583a, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the pulling direction is set in the same front-rear direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a, the shapes of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are distorted. It is formed in (a shape whose shape changes depending on the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back surface side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the wall thickness of the upper edge of the portion to which the load is applied due to fastening is thinned toward the center of the hole, so that the load is imbalanced between the upper edge and the rest. Is likely to occur, and the fastening screw may loosen depending on the state of use and the number of years of use.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted, but the difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points results in high cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening points in question, the cost will increase due to the fact that the fastening screw cannot be made into a common part, but the fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, which will lead to high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is arranged so as to face each other across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in a recessed shape in the front wall 6620. It is provided with a retaining plate portion 6621 which is a part of the portion (formed by the recess) and is formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion on which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the back support member 6580 and the back support member 6580. Further, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, further progress of the fastening screw is restricted and the fastening screw is prevented from coming off. Can be prevented.

When the fastening screw is not loosened, the retaining plate portion 6621 is formed with a size slightly spaced from the head of the screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the advancement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when the sound is output from the sound device 6610, the vibration of the sound device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit from 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

Further, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 recessed at the back position of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoidance recess 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) to the extent that contact with the head of the fastening screw can be avoided (a slight gap between the head and the head). (Dimensions that can be made) are recessed.

This makes it possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same front-rear direction as the resin die punching direction, the wall thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, which is sufficient. Fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a will loosen, but if the fastening screw loosens, the same function as the retaining plate portion 6621 described above can be avoided from contact. It can be generated in the recess 6622.

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when the sound is output from the sound device 6610, the vibration of the sound device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit from 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, the fastening screw can be configured so that the transmission of vibration generated by the contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw can be grasped. It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, it is exemplified that the transmission of vibration is configured to generate an abnormal noise or the vibration is detected.

As described in FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, while being arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. Will be done. As a result, the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 can be arranged close to each other with the back support member 6580 sandwiched between them, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illumination substrate 6570 for illumination. It is possible to prevent the substrate 6570 from cracking.

Here, the partition member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position other than the effect portion (that is, the illumination unit 6574 to 6576) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and the ratio of the effect portion on the surface of the illuminated substrate 6570 is determined. For the purpose of ensuring a large size, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

Therefore, the problem that the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficiently fixed is likely to occur, and without countermeasures, the partition member 6560 may transmit the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580, and the partition member 6560 may be transmitted. When the 6560 vibrates, the effect of the effect may be poor, the fastening portion may be loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the partition member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partition member 6560 from another direction. On the other hand, it will be described with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper staging device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening location, the fastening direction, and the fastening direction of each component of the upper staging device 6500 are schematically shown. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the upper staging device 6500 is configured such that the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580 are surrounded by the front units 6520 to 6550, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front unit 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In the present embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted via the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is in the thickness direction (see FIG. 238). Easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

With this displacement (deformation), the width in the front-rear direction of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the center of the front and rear, the distance between the front and rear of the insertion holes 6512 formed apart from the front and back is shortened. As a result, a load is generated that displaces the partition unit 6540 toward the back surface side, and a compression load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 to apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration should be suppressed. Can be done.

Here, even if the width in the front-rear direction of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displacement to the side away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 gives the partition member 6560. The load applied is likely to be insufficient, and the action of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the compartment unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the compartment unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. As a result, the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 can be sufficiently secured.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 The vibration transmission direction of the can be set to be along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the bending deformation of the guided unit 6550, and it is possible to prevent the front and rear fastening points from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even when the vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, it is possible to sufficiently secure the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction.

By devising the fastening points as shown in FIG. 247, the illuminated substrate 6570 is placed close to the acoustic device 6610, which is prone to vibration, in a non-fixed state, thereby preventing damage to the illuminated substrate 6570. It is possible to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560 by transmitting the vibration to the partition member 6560 that prevents the illuminated substrate 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the upper staging device 6500 while improving the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 arranged close to the audio device 6610.

Further, one of the purposes of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to correspond to the displacement amount of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the upper lid member 6510 has a configuration in which the back surface side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in a thin plate shape in the front-rear direction, the displacement amount on the front surface side is larger than that on the back surface side, and the displacement is likely to be curved. It's about things.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 from the back side end portion due to the shape of the upper lid member 6510. Can be curved and displaced at. In this case, the upper lid member 6510 itself is subjected to a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below the upper lid member 6510 are subjected to a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compression load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the displacement amount increases (toward the front side), it is in the front-rear direction. It will follow the direction of downward slope toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction in which the fastening screw is downwardly inclined toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. It is possible to bring the direction of the compression load generated by the displacement of the member 6510 closer to that of the member 6510.

As a result, in addition to being able to sufficiently generate a resistance force against the compression load at the fastening position, the component of the compression load applied in the direction in which the fastening screw is sheared (the direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) becomes small, so that the fastening screw breaks. Can be suppressed.

The fastening screws that form the fastening direction in the direction of downward inclination toward the front side are used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the lower side and the back side of the illuminated substrate 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced. However, the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the displacement allowance of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, even if the illuminated substrate 6570 is displaced, if the displacement amount becomes excessive, the plate guide unit 6550 can be brought into contact with the plate guide unit, so that excessive displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be regulated.

Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the illuminated substrate 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration source.

In the present embodiment, the fastening portions (fastening support portion 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction descends toward the front side. Fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged in close proximity to each other.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation (displacement) generated on one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if the fastening portion along the front-rear direction becomes loose and is displaced in the front-rear direction, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that the portion is inclined downward. It is possible to avoid a load in the direction inclined (along the front-rear direction) from the fastening direction with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the screws.

Further, by fixing the portion that is long in the front-rear direction on the left and right center side at the fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, the resistance force of the upper staging device 6500 to the load in the pushing-down direction can be improved.

On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is downwardly inclined toward the front side is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the pushing direction than the fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction is downwardly inclined toward the front side on the left and right outer sides formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance to the load in the pushing-down direction is reduced. It is possible to secure an arrangement area for the illuminated substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 while minimizing the influence of the above.

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560-6580 on the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). In addition, the specific part is enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the illuminated substrate 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 comes into contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. Further, while the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, the contact positions are formed so as not to match in the front and rear.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 and adjust the susceptibility to displacement. It will be described in order below. First, the improvement of the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described.

Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 come into contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at positions that coincide with each other in the front and rear, the partition is divided for some reason (error during resin molding, improper fastening, etc.). When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the plate thickness of the illuminated substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570, and when the applied load is large, electricity is applied. The decorative substrate 6570 may crack.

Further, even when a compressive force is not applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 at the time of assembly, a load (for example, a load in the compression direction) is caused by the vibration of the back support member 6580 due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610. May be applied, and this load may cause the illuminated substrate 6570 to crack.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions of contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 on the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 do not match in the front and rear (there are places where they abut at offset positions). Even if a load is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the illuminated substrate 6570, but a load that bends the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, since the illuminated substrate 6570 can be dealt with by bending and deforming, the possibility of cracking of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be reduced.

Next, the adjustment of the susceptibility to displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described. In the illuminated substrate 6570, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) of the partition member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted to prevent misalignment, but in the present embodiment, they are densely packed near the center of the left and right sides. Arranged (see FIG. 243).

In addition, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is in contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, the contact resistance between the illuminated substrate 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally large, and sufficient frictional resistance can be secured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 in the vicinity of the left and right center portions of the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, even when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily maintain the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (particularly the lower side) of the illuminated substrate 6570, neither the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and no load of compression is generated from the front and back. Displacement can be made more likely to occur as compared with the left and right central portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily change the direction of the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570.

In the present embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the vibration mode of the illuminated substrate 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, there is a case where the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the illuminated board 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and the case where the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the illuminated board 6570 is vibrated preferentially. The illumination substrate 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes depending on whether the illumination substrate 6570 is made to vibrate on both the left and right sides by outputting sound from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610.

Next, the front unit 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit 6520 to 6550. It should be noted that in FIGS. 249 and 250, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are omitted for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed so as to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and forming an outer frame. The state in which the member 6530, the partition unit 6540 that abuts on the front and rear of the partition member 6560 and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 guided to the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is shown. The light.

In the light emission effect via the front unit 6520 to 6550, the optical transmission unit 6520 receives the light from the first lighting unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives the light from the second lighting unit 6575, and the guided unit is guided. The 6550 receives the light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251 (a) is a front view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252 (a) is a compartment. It is a front view of the unit 6540, FIG. 252 (b) is a rear view of a partition unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of a plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a plate guide. It is a rear view of the unit 6550.

254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVa-CCLIVA line of FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). FIG. 254 is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVc-CCLIVC line of FIG. 251 (b).

FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partition unit 6540 is a milky white member 6541 formed of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and formed into a substantially inverted triangle in a front view, and the optical transmission unit 6520 which is formed through the center of the milky white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. A through hole 6542 formed so that the rear side portion can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are portions extending inward of the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A pair of post-guidance fastening portions to which a plurality of insertion holes 6544 through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing are inserted and fastening screws extending through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 extending in a cylindrical shape to the back side are fastened. The 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape open to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-shaped portions and have insertion holes 6547b in which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 are inserted into the plate guide unit 6550, and colorless and transparent light. It mainly includes a transparent lining member 6548 which is formed from a permeable resin material so as to cover the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and is fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541.

In the partition unit 6540, the front side edge portion is formed from a curved shape that bulges toward the front side in the top view like the upper lid member 6510, is formed into a substantially inverted triangle in the front view, and the center is arranged on the back side in the side view. It is formed from a substantially arc shape (see FIG. 254 (a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a on the upper surface to which fastening screws to be inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side in accordance with the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. As a result, the front end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into contact with each other on a surface, and the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. Can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole facing the back surface side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion arranged to face the second lighting portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is located on the back surface of the front bottom portion and the upper surface of the lower plate portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Is formed with a jagged decoration with a short left-right width. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

Since this shape allows light incident from the back surface side to be scattered (diffused), the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 that covers the front surface thereof can be uniformly emitted in front view.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with the upper side open in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. It is mainly provided with a protruding rib 6547c, which has a semi-elliptical shape and is projected toward the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion where an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed is inserted is formed in the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) and a load generated by fastening and fixing is received. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is related to the drawing direction of the resin mold (in the front-rear direction in this embodiment), and the wall thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load is applied due to the fastening is increased. It is thinned toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254 (b)).

In this case, the load is likely to be imbalanced between the upper edge and the rest, so there is a risk that the fastening screw will loosen if a small misalignment occurs repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. be.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted, but the difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points results in high cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening points in question, the cost will increase due to the fact that the fastening screw cannot be made into a common part, but the fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, which will lead to high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured to prevent the position shift of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of places. That is, first, the threaded portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, so that the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented from being displaced downward (FIGS. 247 and 254). (B)).

Secondly, the front upper end portion of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage with the back surface side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 254 (b)). This makes it possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540.

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to abut on the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254 (b)). This makes it possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced upward with respect to the partition unit 6540.

Since the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be suppressed mainly by these first to third contact structures, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screwed portion 6554a. Can be done.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V-shape in front view, and has a lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a extending in a plate shape toward the back surface in the V-shaped lower edge connecting portion and a back surface from the upper edge portion. It is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 6548b projecting to the side in a plate shape. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

Similar to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, a zigzag-shaped decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a. As a result, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cutout portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 6548 extends in the left-right direction. Can be made to emit light uniformly.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be used.

Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the back surface side (see FIG. 254 (c)), and the lower edge plate-like portion. In order to form the 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that ascends toward the back surface side like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. ..

If this inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the drawing direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the punching direction is the front-back direction near the through hole 6542, while the upward slope is directed toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, which only increases the difficulty of mold design. However, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but instead is formed by the transparent lining member 6548 (see FIG. 254 (c)). Further, in the assembled state, the white partition member 6560 is arranged to face the back side of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 constituting the inclined surface, so that the transparent lining member 6548 is directed to the player. The whole of can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

As a result, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 overlaid on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear pulling direction. While having a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering the inside of the partition unit 6540 in front view), the light emission of the transparent lining member 6548 is played in a uniform light emitting mode. It can be visually recognized by a person.

In other words, the partition unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the space between the top and bottom is narrowed), while the back surface portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the above (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to produce a uniform light emission mode.

In this case, it is difficult to set the drawing direction of the molding die of the transparent lining member 6548 to the front-rear direction, but the transparent lining member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-rear direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the direction of ascending inclination) as the punching direction of the molding die, the manufacturing process of resin molding with the die in the front-back direction (one direction). The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent lining member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visually recognized through the transparent lining member 6548 can be uniformly emitted.

The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is formed of a colorless opaque resin material in a substantially V-shape in front view, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580, and the main body resin member 6551 and the main body resin member 6551. A pair of left and right exhaust pressure through holes 6553 formed at the end of the extended plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape on the back side along the lower edge of the left and right central portions and the end portion on the back side of the extended plate portion 6552. A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551, facing the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partition unit 6540, and fastening and fixing the fastening screws, and the left and right of the main body resin member 6551. A plurality of back-side fastening portions 6555, which are arranged along the lower edge and are fastened and fixed with fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portion 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back-side support member 6580, and the back-side fastening portion 6555 thereof. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 that are projected in a rib shape between the spaces and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580, and a plurality of insertion rib portions that are formed in the front-rear direction on the left and right arm portions. It mainly includes a through hole 6557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in a plurality of through holes 6557.

In the guided unit 6550, the direction in which the back support member 6580 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a is the die pulling direction. That is, each component is formed in an inclined direction that ascends toward the back surface side or in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6553.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (the range is subdivided). Is formed). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which a thin wire material such as a piano wire is inserted.

Further, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width becomes narrower toward the end of the hole and toward the back surface side. As a result, the fine wire can be clogged in the hole. The movement resistance of the thin wire can be increased. As a result, the time required for fraudulent activity can be extended, and fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The front-side fastening portion 6554 includes a screw-in portion 6554a to which the fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of wall-shaped positioning wall portions 6554b on the left and right sides of the screw-in portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at intervals slightly longer than the width and length of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the positioning of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be performed.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and a cross section perpendicular to the elongated direction is formed from an L-shape. Guided portion 6558a, and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b formed in a box shape on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and open on the back surface side so as to be fitted into the through hole 6557, and guided. Mainly includes an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back surface side along the upper edge of the central side end portion (end portion on the side facing the pair of light receiving members 6558) of the portion 6558a.

The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570. The above-mentioned decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. As a result, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1 to 2 in FIG. 241 (b)). However, it can be visually recognized as uniform light over the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture tilted with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture in which the light receiving surface is tilted along the traveling direction of the light in the assembling direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Since it is mounted in a posture that intersects with the assembling direction), it receives light emitted from the LED arranged in the third lighting unit 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 in the front-rear direction. It can be refracted when passing through the member 6558 and can be advanced in a direction of obliquely downward inclination toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed so that the object arranged on the left and right outer sides has a shorter bulge length toward the front side than the object arranged on the left and right inner sides. Thereby, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected below the partition unit 6540.

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550, which is arranged to face the partition member 6560, is formed from a planar shape particularly in the extended plate portion 6552 in the central portion, and has no partition. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition for partitioning the area above the extending plate portion 6552, the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

It will be described back to FIG. 249. In the above description, the parts that receive the light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 arranged on the left and right have been described. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, will be described.

257 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (a) is a rear view. It is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (orange in the present embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and is a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 6531 thereof. An opening 6532 that is formed in a substantially gourd shape (approximately a pot shape) in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6533 that is projected in a rib shape on the back side along the lower edge portion of the main body portion 6531. , A plurality of fastening portions 6534, which are arranged at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed in.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the portion inside the outer shape that transmits light is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed from a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed differently depending on the difference in the front-rear position, it is in front of the opening 6532. It is possible to visually recognize the light having a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574 to the player who visually recognizes the light.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (so that both the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light that is visually recognized from the front of the opening 6532 around the position where it overlaps with the upper plate portion in the front-rear direction is visually recognized in a pattern that spreads horizontally as compared with the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind the range of the light that is visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (or the illuminated substrate 6570). The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The projecting rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking convex portion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent lining member 6548, and is arranged at a position where the formation of the locking convex portion 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the projecting rib 6533 and the locking convex portion 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on a curve having the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). Will be).

FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The optical transmission unit 6520 is a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface arranged at an intermediate position of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery thereof, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape covered with a transparent tubular member 6521 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin. A shielding member 6524 formed in a cylindrical shape so that a portion opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523 can be inserted from a colored (white in the present embodiment) resin material, and the shielding member 6524. A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front side end portion, and an outer extension extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. It mainly includes a frame extension portion 6526.

The bottomed tubular member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and has a curved shape so that the left and right wall portions are constricted inward. A region surrounded by the back outer shape portion 6521a formed from the outer shape overlapping with the LED, a plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b projecting from the back outer shape portion 6521a to the back side at a position facing the LED, and the back outer shape portion 6521a. A closed portion 6521c that closes the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light-transmitting holes 6521d formed in the closed portion 6521c at a position facing the LED, and at least the left-right width of the upper wall and the distance between the left-right wall portions toward the front side. It mainly includes a main body cylinder portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the main body, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521f that extends to the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylinder portion 6521e.

The light receiving protrusion portion 6521b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by shortening the distance between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first lighting unit is connected to the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the facing plate portion 6651 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from the 6574 LED. This makes it easy to generate total reflection.

As described above, the light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, totally reflected and travels to the front side, whereas the above-mentioned second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 or the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, which is recessed in the direction away from the LED, and travels in the air, and the box-shaped light receiving portion The front side wall portion of the 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is made to emit light. Therefore, the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light with a lower light intensity than the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574. can.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped light receiving portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless transparent and light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

The frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is generally formed from a similar shape to the back outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is compared with the outer shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a due to the fact that the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is interposed. And be made bigger.

Therefore, it can be visually recognized by the player as light that illuminates a large area as compared with the size of the area where the LED is arranged in the first lighting unit 6574.

The shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at a distance of substantially the same distance from the bottom back side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, the shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emitting mode.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a in which a circular screwing portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 is bored in a size capable of being inserted.

The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a flat shape on the back surface side, and is formed in a bottomed tubular shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw inserted into the bottom portion. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portions 6543 are fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (a decorative shape consisting of ridges having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom portion of the cup shape, and the decorative shape portion thereof. It mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light emitted from the back surface to the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, the cup-shaped member 6523 can be visually recognized by the player who sees the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side as if the surface is emitting light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the front surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f without diffusely reflecting the light passing through the inside of the wall thickness of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. Can be passed to the side. As a result, the light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be visually recognized by the player as clear light.

The back surface side end of the shielding member 6524 is formed from the same shape as the central tubular portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is recessed in a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251 (a)). A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The abutting plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are formed with a size that allows the circular screwing portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length thereof is the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-shaped portion.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extending portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)), so that the optical transmission unit 6520 The assembled state of the light can be maintained stably. Further, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted in the order of the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a, and is fastened and fixed. The assembled state of 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear end surface of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e to advance forward, and the front end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. It can be emitted from the cup-shaped member 6523 and irradiated to the cup-shaped member 6523. Since the cup-shaped member 6523 is set to have a short distance from the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, the cup-shaped member 6523 has a line shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) for the player who visually recognizes the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523. It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode that shines along the outline). As a result, the difference between the light emitting mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emitting mode seen in the above-mentioned transparent covering member 6548 can be emphasized, so that a sharp light emitting effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-view view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-view view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is symmetrically configured, the left side view is omitted.

261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is a bottom surface of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

262 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. In FIG. 262 (e), the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent tubular member 6521 has a shape in which the left-right surface portion and the lower bottom surface portion are inclined so that the left-right width and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that. On the other hand, since the punching direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, it is not possible to form a portion that interferes with the resin mold in the punching direction as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the back surface side is moved in the pulling direction (rear), but the inner surface of the outer surface portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion. If the same inclination is applied, interference will occur when the resin mold on the back surface side is moved, so that the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the front side is moved in the pulling direction (front), but a frame shape formed on the front side portion thereof. If the outer surface of the extension portion 6521f has the same inclination, it will interfere when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side to be pulled out forward and the resin mold on the back side to be pulled out to the rear is composed of the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-mentioned inclination is formed on the front and back sides thereof. Where a surface is formed and the above-mentioned non-sloping surface is formed, the length of the non-sloping surface in the front-rear direction of the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 is compared with the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position while forming the transparent tubular member 6521 in a gradually increasing shape as described above. It is possible to suppress changes in the anteroposterior position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is incident inside the wall thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, it is possible to easily repeat the total reflection until it reaches the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. Since the leakage of the transparent tubular member 6521 can be suppressed, sufficient light can be visually recognized by the player who sees the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion is connected to the guide recessed portion 6524a as compared with the case where the vertical widths are the same in the front-rear direction. Since the 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembling can be reduced.

FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit 6560-6580, the acoustic device 6610 and the optical transmission unit 6520 in the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. 241. FIG. 263 illustrates a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at the assembly positions with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed to have a size such that a slight gap is formed when the transparent tubular member 6521 is inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partition member 6560, and the tip thereof is formed as a facing plate portion. It can be inserted up to the surface position of 6651. Thereby, the distance between the first illumination unit 6574 and the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness of the facing plate portion 6651.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is formed from a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction intersecting the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 arranged to face each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b, only the light traveling substantially straight from the first illumination unit 6574 to the front side (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) is incident, and other light is incident. Can be prevented.

The light incident in this way tends to travel toward the front side inside the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and even when reflected at the boundary, the angle formed by the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of light is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the weakening of the light before reaching the front side end portion of the transparent tubular member 6521.

The dimension in the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be about twice the dimension in the lateral direction. Therefore, regarding the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared with the case described in the wall thickness direction of the surface. Can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the back outer shape portion 6521a coupled to the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b in the longitudinal direction does not abut on the facing plate portion 6651 and is arranged at a slight interval. As a result, among the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574, the light incident from the end surface of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (light having a large angle formed by the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) is reflected to the player. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized.

That is, only the light that passes through the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b and travels within the wall thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e can be visually recognized by the player, and the other light (weak light) can be cut. In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylinder portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving protrusion 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light transmitting hole 6521d (see FIG. 260) of the transparent tubular member 6521. It passes through and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the wall thickness of the member, but travels in the air, so that the player can visually recognize it as uniform light.

The raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the closed portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light that has passed through the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a front schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) schematically shows the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. It is a front schematic diagram. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (total reflection). The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized as an enlarged shape (substantially a gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, since the light in the wall thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front side end portion without being weakened, it corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a even in the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The position where it is emitted emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer in the strong light emission distance L17b in the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 than in the actual distance between the arrangements L17a of the edge light emitting unit 6574a. It can only be visually recognized, and the effect of light production tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance between the strong light emission arrangements L17b of the visually recognized light is longer than the actual distance between arrangements L17a of the edge light emitting portion 6574a, so that the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a is radially advanced in the direction along the side surface of the transparent tubular member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b). , The light emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light visually recognized at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, even in a place (between the LEDs) where the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 are not arranged, the line-shaped light can be visually recognized from the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 (imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower ends of the first lighting unit 6574 are arranged at the boundary positions between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylinder portion 6521e (see FIG. 262 (e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above the optical axis, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 to the lower side of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. It overlaps at the center of the left and right.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), the optical transmission unit 6520 is provided as shown in FIG. 264 (b) even though the LEDs are not arranged at the left and right center of the lower end portion of the first lighting unit 6574. Through this, a line of light can be visually recognized in the center of the lower left and right.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first lighting unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light is used as a point. It is possible to weaken the degree of visibility and make clear line-shaped light visible.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside thereof is obscured by the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 It is difficult to grasp the position where the lights intersect. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indefinite, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emitting effect from being lowered.

Further, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, it is possible to visually recognize as if a new point light source is arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it is possible to make the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

The light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first lighting unit 6574) arranged inside the transparent tubular member 6521 when viewed from the front is inside the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged holes 6562a arranged to face each other (see FIG. 245 (b)). It progresses radially along.

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574b is visually recognized as planar light spreading as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface light emitting unit 6574b in the front view. Further, the light is diffusely reflected by being irradiated to the decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light in the front view.

That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the region where the light radiated from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 in the front view and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f) can be brightly illuminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-shaped light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with diffusely reflected light, it is possible to prevent the boundary from becoming dark. Therefore, the impression of the visually recognized light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are exemplified as changes in the impression of light that is visually recognized. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting situation such as light / darkness or blinking, or it may be a change in the color of light.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be used.

As described above, the compartment unit 6540 that is visually recognized from the front on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that swells toward the front in the front and side views. Therefore, the light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 on the left and right and up and down (a direction in which the light diffuses with respect to a point on the back surface side).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the partition unit 6540 has the front side edge located on the back side toward the left and right outer sides, and the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 is emitted from the posture of being attached. , Proceed in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left and right and up and down (a direction in which the light diffuses with respect to a point on the back surface side).

As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the light becomes larger as the player gets closer to the player, as compared with the case where the light is produced only in the mode of advancing the light in the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

Next, the horizontal staging device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal staging device 6700.

In FIG. 265, the upper effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 are not shown, and the direction view from the diagonally right front in the state where the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a is shown. In FIG. 266, a directional view of the horizontal staging device 6700 from diagonally left front is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal staging device 6700 is a staging device disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal main body portion 10014a, and divides the vertically long elliptical shape in half in a side view. It is formed from the shape of the ellipse.

In the horizontal staging device 6700, a pair of left and right devices having similar shapes are arranged, but since the internal configurations are the same, the horizontal staging device 6700 on the right side will be described in detail, and the horizontal staging device 6700 on the left side will be described in detail. The explanation is omitted.

The horizontal staging device 6700 covers the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal body portion 10014a on the front side of the base member 6710 so that the front-rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized at the upper end portion of FIG. It is configured in such a manner that the units 6730 to 6760 are arranged.

The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal body portion 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 into the positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a. Then, the fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the base member 6710.

Of the constituent members of the horizontal staging device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal staging device 6700, except for the base member 6710, there are no constituent members to be fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side toward the game area, the position where the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back side end portion and the surface position of the base member 6710 are). Is formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the glass unit 16 in close proximity to the glass unit 16 as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG. 265.

Since it is arranged in this way, it is easy to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back surface side of the glass unit 16 can be visually recognized integrally. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal staging device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal staging device 6700. In FIGS. 267 and 268, a state in which the lining units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side is shown.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illuminated board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to be capable of emitting light are mounted is arranged on the front side of the base member 6710, and the illuminated board 6720 is mounted on the illuminated board 6720 from the front side. The lining units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in a covering manner.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the illuminated substrate 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 and the illuminated substrate 6720. Mainly includes a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 and a light receiving side unit composed of an inverted unit 6730 to 6760 that receives light emitted from the light emitting side unit and makes it visible to a player. .. First, the light emitting side unit will be described.

269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720, FIG. 269 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a right side view of the base member 6710. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a view of FIG. 269 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the Illuminations substrate 6720 in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line.

As shown in FIGS. 269 (a) to 269 (f), the base member 6710 has a flat plate-shaped support plate portion 6711 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and arranged on the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720, and an electric lamp. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting toward the front side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. The 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 in which fastening screws are inserted so as to be inserted at positions outside the illuminated board 6720 and close to the illuminated board 6720 in front view, and two insertion holes 6736 at the top and bottom. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (enclosing the game area). A plurality of alignment holes 6716 drilled as long holes vertically in the area (opposite side of the window portion, opposite side of the glass unit 16), and a plate shape stepped from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. Mainly includes an outer frame plate portion 6717 extending to the illumination plate portion 6717 and an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back surface side.

In the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, the tip of the projecting portion is arranged to face the back surface portion near the outer peripheral portion of the illuminated substrate 6720, and is in surface contact with the illuminated substrate 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the support plate 6711 on the back surface side of the portion other than the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illuminated substrate 6720.

As a result, the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a, and the amount of heat transferred to the illuminated substrate 6720 even if the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710. Since it is possible to suppress (reduce) the illumination substrate 6720, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as a high temperature of the illuminated substrate 6720 and malfunction.

The positioning protrusion 6713 is a portion for aligning the illuminated substrate 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into the positioning holes 6722 formed at two positions of the illuminated substrate 6720. That is, the illuminated substrate 6720 is provided with a positioning hole 6722 at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 6713 with reference to the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269 (a)). Will be set up.

The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the lining unit 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6735 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268), and positions them. It is a through hole that is formed so that it can be matched and through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that the fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed in. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the projecting portions 6743, 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the lining units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The lining units 6730 to 6760 are formed from a substantially cup shape in which a pair of thin-walled plate-shaped members (flat plate member 6740 and curved plate member 6750) are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides and open to the back side (see FIG. 268). ), It is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side portion (edge-shaped portion).

Here, the joint portion between the base member 6710 and the lining units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer shape portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load given by the player (for example, a collision with the player). It can be displaced by the load generated by this. As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear end portion having a thin wall shape, it is deformed when a load directed in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is applied. However, there is a risk that the position may be displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a possibility that the number of man-hours for assembly work increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixed portions, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are used as the base member by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716. It is possible to suppress the positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is arranged close to the outer surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, the player left the flat plate member 6740. Even if a load in the direction is applied, the flat plate member 6740 abuts on the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 on the surface, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lining units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal staging device 6700 while suppressing the increase in man-hours for assembly work. The main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by providing the unevenness forming portion 6741a in which a fine uneven shape is formed in the contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, but the details will be described later. ..

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a and comes into surface contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 to cover (cover) the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a. This makes it possible to prevent the metal body portion 10014a from being visually recognized by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a recessed along the front-rear direction from a part of the alignment holes 6716. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, while it is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed in a size that fits with the projecting portion 6743 or is arranged so as to face each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal staging device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, the area in which the protrusion 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a) as compared with the case where the protrusion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716. It is possible to prevent the 6740 from being displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion of the curved plate member 6750 that is arranged to face the main body curved portion 6751, and is formed in a surface shape facing the game area side (inside).

The illuminated circuit board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and has a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary main body plate portion 6721. It mainly includes an LED chip D1 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the movement to the left, right, up and down, and the movement to the front and back is performed by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). Movement is restricted by being sandwiched between (see).

The LED chip D1 in the present embodiment has a similar chip mounted on it, but in relation to the region shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 269 (a) as the boundary of the region showing the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760. It can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting unit D1a arranged inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting unit D1b arranged outside the frame of the imaginary line. Mainly prepare. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode that is visually recognized by the player, but the details will be described later.

Next, the lining units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the lining units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lining units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the states shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, which are decomposed and shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, the lining units 6730 to 6760 are formed of a light-transmitting resin inside and light passing through the inside thereof. The light receiving member 6730 is provided so as to be refractable and covers the illuminated substrate 6720 from the front side, and the front surface thereof is covered with other constituent members.

272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. 273 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). be.

274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274 (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. be.

272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side, FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274 (a) is a front perspective view. It is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272 (b), the inverted units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for ease of understanding.

The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a light receiving surface portion 6731 which is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720 and is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720. The inner extending portion 6732 extending to the back side so as to be bent from the inner edge (left side edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and the outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. An outer extending portion 6733 extending to the back side so as to be bent from (the right edge in FIG. 274), and a plurality of extending portions (in the present embodiment) extending from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in a long rib shape. (5 places) long rib 6734, and the base end of the long rib 6734 (the side to be coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface portion 6731 are extended from the front at a position where they meet in a long fin shape. Multiple fins 6735 (five locations in this embodiment), and a plurality of insertion holes 6736 for inserting fastening screws arranged at the upper and lower ends and fastened to the fastening portion 6715 (see FIG. 269 (a)), and curved. It mainly includes a decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the plate member 6750 and a fitting portion 6737 formed from a shape that can be fitted.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and a decorative pattern having a complicated cut is formed on the back surface side. The decorative pattern has long protrusions formed along a plurality of concentric circles having different diameters, centered on a portion facing the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which the light emitted from the back is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731. The outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is also inclined (see FIG. 275 (b)), and the light traveling along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731. Inclined in mode, see FIG. 275 (b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted near the shaft portion of the long protrusion, travels to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then has a large diameter further away from the axis of the long protrusion. By refracting at a point and proceeding to the front side, a wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be made to emit light.

Further, the light receiving surface portion 6731 is formed on the front side in such a manner that the basic shapes having a triangular shape in front view and the substantially central portion bulges toward the front side are regularly and densely arranged, and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is a surface light emitting portion. A decorative recessed portion 6731a, which is recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape at a position on the front side of D1b, is provided.

With the decorative recessed portion 6731a, it is possible to change the strength of the surface emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (it is possible to add a stepwise strength or weakness). That is, since the light is collected on the central side of the concave portion due to the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emitting mode as compared with other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured such that the extension end portion abuts on the illuminated substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extension end portion of the inner extension portion 6732 extends over the entire upper and lower sides. A portion that abuts on the illuminated substrate 6720 but does not abut on the extended end of the outer extending portion 6733 is formed.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 includes a separated end portion 6733a which is formed so that the extending length is as short as the plate thickness of the illuminated substrate 6720 so as to be separated from the illuminated substrate 6720 without abutting. In the present embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the region between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from being trapped.

Further, when the LED chip D1 is in contact with the illuminated substrate 6720 over the entire upper and lower sides like the inner extending portion 6732, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to project from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, the thicker the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732, the more the area in which the LED chip D1 is arranged is limited.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the illuminated substrate 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extension portion 6733.

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) has dense ridges having a semicircular cross section. An uneven shape is formed that is formed in such a manner that it is aligned with. As a result, the light emitted to the left through the inner extension portion 6732 emits surface light (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to visually recognize the uniform light.

As will be described later, when a part of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end portion of the fin 6735, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling on the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are visually recognized. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling on the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is more than the light D1p. Is also visible as strong light (the magnitude of the light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

As a result, the magnitude of the light intensity visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed for each of the vertically arranged regions to be visually recognized. It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed up and down. It can be visually changed for each area lined up in.

The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed to have the same thickness without tapering in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially linear shape in the rear view, and a V-shaped rib 6734b formed in a substantially V shape by being bent in the rear view.

The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is notched on the line, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light) and is unidirectional. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly. Therefore, when the lateral staging device 6700 is viewed from the left-right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit are emitted. It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light emitted from D1b is mixed and visually recognized.

That is, the long rib 6734 is formed long vertically and is configured as a portion that can be seen from the left-right direction, while suppressing the light passing through the long rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in two on the upper and lower sides, and are formed so as to incline toward the upper and lower center positions toward the left side (center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265), and the left end portion. The 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is separated from the outer extension 6733.

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can directly enter the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1, while the light passing through the right end portion 6734a2 can directly enter the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between and.

As a result, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized darker than that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of the light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while passing through the left end portion 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a. The light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only for the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, in the vicinity of the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (interval position) away from the left end portion 6734a1, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. Since it can be visually recognized by color and brightness, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left-right direction visually recognize the light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the upper and lower center positions and is connected to the inner extension portion 6732 by an intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while both end portions 6734b2 are separated from the outer extension portion 6733. The reason why the bent position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is arranged to face the bent position.

That is, by shifting the position where the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a is received from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (main light) linearly emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a in the front-rear direction becomes the connecting position. Since the incident can be suppressed, the loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has the same function as that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while the light passing through both end portions 6734b2 can be directly incident on the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between and.

As a result, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized darker than that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of the light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is provided. The light that has passed through and entered the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be easily visually recognized in the left-right direction only for the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (interval position) away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. Since it can be visually recognized by color and brightness, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left-right direction visually recognize the light of different colors and brightness.

The fin 6735 is formed so as to become thinner from the extended base end toward the tip end side, and has a tip curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a and a tip bending fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , Mainly prepared.

In the tip curved fin 6735a, the upper and lower inner edges are curved, and the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014) is densely formed with triangular wavy (zigzag) notches to form a light diffusing portion. , The right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has a left side surface (front frame) having an inclined surface in which the extending tip is inclined toward the back side from the upper and lower ends toward the center of the upper and lower ends and intersects with the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusing portion is formed by densely forming triangular wavy (jagged) notches on the inner side surface of 10014, and the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the tip curved fin 6735a, since the end portion on the left surface side is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, light with a large amount of light emitted from the front side end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a irradiated from the edge light emitting portion D1a (mainly). Light) will be emitted from the fin 6735 in the vicinity of the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extending portion 6732 side (back surface side, root side), and the left surface side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are coupled, and the elongated rib 6734 is also extended inward by the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734. It is possible to illuminate the setting part 6732. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to produce a light emitting effect. , The effect of light emission can be improved.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the forming mode between the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735, the passing mode of the light passing through the side surface can be changed. That is, the light passing through the left side surface can be visually recognized as uniform light from the surface light emitting action due to the notch, while the surface emitting action does not reach the light passing through the right side surface, so that the light passes through the right side surface. The light to be emitted can be visually recognized as local light. Needless to say, the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 function as a reinforcing portion for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the horizontal staging device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is displaced (for example, vibration caused by a player's operation or vibration caused by opening and closing the front frame 10014). Since the maintenance work of returning the position to the case) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal staging device 6700, the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty level is low and the time is shortened).

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction in an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns and aligns the light receiving member 6730 with the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. A single recess 6737a is provided so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are limited to one place (while reducing) the place where the recess 6737a is arranged (the place where the fastening part 6753 is arranged) on the inner extending portion 6732 side. The position deviation and posture deviation of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal staging device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so that the more fastening points there are, the more easily shadows are generated. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal staging device 6700 is formed to be large, the light is separated at the fastening portion, and there is a possibility that the staging effect of the light staging is lowered. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the bearing capacity is lowered, and there is a possibility that the lateral staging device 6700 may be deformed from the root due to the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the recess 6737a, and the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the bearing capacity. ing.

As a result, it is arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light effect portion and the illuminated substrate 6720 at the fastening portion of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265). It is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal staging device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points).

Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back surface side through the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG. 275.

275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 in the CCLXVa-CCLXXV line of FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. 275 (b) is a light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the recess 6737a is arranged in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b which is arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion where the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and the striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via the fastening portion 6753 fitted to the concave portion 6737a. Light is formed so as to be able to travel to the back side portion of the curved portion 6751 of the main body. That is, the light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back surface side (the side opposite to the irradiation direction of the light) of the illuminated substrate 6720.

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a place where the fastening screw is fastened, and is considered unsuitable for light emission effect because the fastening screw tends to be in the shadow. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw up and down, so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by advancing the light from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (diluted).

In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is enlarged and shown. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface portion 6731 while being slowly refracted and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. At that time, it is further refracted and condensed. As a result, it is possible to increase the emission intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

As described above, in the light emitting mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a becomes longer, centering on the decorative recessed portion 6731a in which the light intensity is increased by condensing light. It is said to be a low mode.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. Compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is irradiated from the light having higher intensity (light that can be visually recognized in the vicinity of the decorative recessed portion 6731a) than when the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is directly viewed. The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than when the light is directly viewed, and the light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, a member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member with the back side open is arranged. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. Is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left-right direction and united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, so that each member is inseparably fixed.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed of a colorless transparent and light-transmitting resin, and has a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a divided oval shape and a main body plate portion 6741 thereof. The fitted plate portion 6742, which is a flat plate portion arranged in a plane translated from the plane to the left side and is connected with a step on the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741, and the back side end portion of the main body plate portion 6741. A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear side to the rear surface side, and a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at a position away from the projecting portion 6743 so that a fastening screw can be screwed in from the back surface side, and a main body. A plurality of insertion holes 6745, which are formed in the plate portion 6741 with a size capable of inserting a fastening screw, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed from the left side surface to the left and is projected from the right side surface to the right corresponding to the recessing, and the right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is provided. , Consistent with the right surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

The uneven forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in such a manner that a hexagonal pyramid arranged so as to taper to the left is filled, and produces an action similar to that of a reflector. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force is applied. It is possible to prevent it from cracking or hanging. Further, it is possible to reduce the contact friction when sliding the base member 6710 for assembling the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760.

Therefore, after the horizontal staging device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when an impact is applied by the player or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. By making it difficult, the durability can be improved, and the horizontal staging device 6700 can be easily assembled.

The fitted plate portion 6742 is formed in the front-rear direction along the groove portion 6742a in the step between the plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as fine grooves along the front-rear direction on the right side surface and the main body plate portion 6741. It is provided with a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

The projecting portion 6743 is a portion to be inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion to be inserted into the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269 (a)). It is a part that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through.

Further, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions close to the outside of the right edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view. In particular, since the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 274 (b)), the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member with respect to the flat plate member 6740 are arranged. The misalignment of 6730 can be suppressed.

The insertion hole 6745 is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the curved plate member 6750 is inserted, and is arranged at four locations above and below. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of fastening portions 6753 formed on the back surface side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 6471 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to bulge to the left toward the back side, is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, is colorless and transparent, and transmits light. A main body curved portion 6751 formed of a sex resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner side surface, and a curved plate portion arranged by moving in parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751 and on the front side of the main body curved portion 6751. Corresponds to the fitted plate portion 6752, which is connected with a step on the edge and is arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742, the plurality of fastening portions 6753 configured so that the fastening screw can be screwed in from the back side, and the insertion hole 6745. A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that the fastening screw can be screwed in at the position where the fastening screw is to be screwed, and a plurality of insertion holes 6755 formed so that the fastening screw can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the curved portion 6751 of the main body. It mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6756 in which fastening screws are formed so as to be able to be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the fitted plate portion 6752.

The main body curved portion 6751 is a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting from the right side surface to the right in a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side in the region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b formed in the front-rear side portion of the above, a flat division portion 6751c for partitioning a striped shape with a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. A striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end portion is mainly provided.

The decorative projecting portion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

As a result, the decorative protrusion portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for aligning with the light receiving member 6730. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling even in a configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is arranged (less) in the upper and lower central portions as in the present embodiment.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the leading edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the anteroposterior and lateral view. As a result, when the light emitted from the leading edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat section portion 6751c, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made to.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game region) of the tip curved fin 6735a is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat compartment portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be set to surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the leading edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the anteroposterior direction view and the side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the leading edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made to.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

Similar to the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6725 is a step between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as fine grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface and the curved portion 6751 of the main body. Is provided with a front-rear direction hole 6752b bored in the direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). Since a) and FIG. 274 (b)), it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is arranged at positions (4 locations) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744, when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 It is possible to suppress wobbling. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so that the number of places where the light is blocked by the fastening screw can be reduced, and as a result, the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which the fastening screw can be inserted from the back surface side, and the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6674 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front surface side thereof. It is formed (see Figure 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed so that the inner side surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6674 of the cover member 6760 is arranged to face the right side of the fastening portion 6674 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). Will be done. As a result, the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6674 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is carelessly used. It can be prevented from being removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6674 back and forth along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 is formed by bending the main body plate portion 6676, which is a flat plate portion having a shape that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6676, and is covered with the curved plate member 6750. The curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and the curved plate portion 6762 are extended to the left rear of the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions separated vertically from the upper and lower center positions by approximately the same distance. A plurality of connecting extension portions 6763 connected at the ends and a plurality of fastening screws arranged on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into the insertion holes 6755, 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 so as to be screwable. A base end fastening portion formed by screwing a fastening screw 6746, which is arranged at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762 and is inserted into an insertion hole 6714 near the upper end of the base member 6710. It mainly includes a 6765 (see FIG. 279) and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 projecting from the rear surface side end portion of the main body plate portion 6676 to the rear surface side.

The main body plate portion 6661 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is projected to the left in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of projecting ribs 6761a are provided.

The projecting rib 6676a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6761, and this overhanging portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal staging device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and is projected to the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of projecting ribs 6762a are provided.

The projecting rib 6762a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and this overhanging portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal staging device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a protrusion rib 6763a that is projected to the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The projecting rib 6763a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion at the connecting position of the connecting extension portion 6763, and this overhanging portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal staging device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6674 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left in the assembled state of the lateral staging device 6700 (see FIG. 265), whereby the curved plate member 6750 is configured. It is possible to prevent it from being inadvertently removed.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b, 6752b restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right, and the relationship between the fastening portion 6674 and the guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750. It regulates the movement of the 6750 to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is arranged at the back end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765. Is formed in. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

The protrusion 6766 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are the illuminated substrate 6720 and the illuminated substrate 6720 with respect to the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. The misalignment of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 280 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the CCLXXXb of FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXXXb line, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of member 6730.

As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the front-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 rises from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be incidentally incident on the long rib 6734 without leakage, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to facilitate the movement toward the front side. ..

Further, in the place where the long rib 6734 is not arranged, the front-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained at the front-back width (formation length) of the long rib 6734 or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are emitted. It is possible to distinguish it from the light and make it easier to see.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as clear line-shaped light that travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or through the long rib 6734. While visually recognized as light that brightens a small area, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is a uniform light (pale light) through the light refraction surface portion of the light receiving surface portion 6731 and the inner extending portion 6732. ) Is visually recognized.

As a result, as compared with the conventional mode, in which a lens that collects the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area, the present embodiment is compared with the present embodiment. According to the above, it is possible to visually recognize the glittering light (line-shaped light) in a small area, while visually recognizing the light (plane-shaped light) spreading in the area of the illuminated substrate 6720. Then, the effect of making only one of these different lights visible or making both of them visible can be easily performed by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the light effect.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is adopted for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are used as light. By making the color and brightness of the light different, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), on the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction, the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is positioned in the front-rear direction with the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (front frame 10014). The inner side surface of the surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal on the left side surface does not face right beside (the direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720, that is, the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but the direction having the component facing the front side. Turn to. As a result, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed toward the inner extending portion 6732. Can proceed. The progress of this light will be described with reference to a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 is a schematic view of a base member 6710, an illuminated substrate 6720, and a light receiving member 6730 schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

The intensity of the light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the plane of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface increases, but the light itself is irradiated radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, and thus the following will be described in order.

The arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light incident on the end of the long rib 6734, totally reflecting inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaching the front end of the fin 6735. .. Since the light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, it is compared with the case where the light is partially transmitted (exited) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , Can reduce the energy loss of light. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the light having sufficient brightness.

The arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the left side surface (inside the front frame 10014) before reaching the front side end portion of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed in a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

The arrow L23c passes through the long rib 6734 and travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, indicating the traveling direction of the light emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light has not been refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be visually recognized brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed in a zigzag shape, light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

The arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of the light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed so that the length in the thickness direction is shorter than that of the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and the fin 6735 is formed on the left side surface (inner surface surface of the front frame 10014). Since the jagged recess is formed, the long rib 6734 is configured to partially protrude from the fin 6735 in the anteroposterior view.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-rear direction in the same manner, it is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a part (particularly, the long rib) can enter the fin 6735. In the region (near the left side surface of 6734), the entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light reaching this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed in a zigzag shape, light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of the arrow L23d includes the light traveling toward the back surface side of the illuminated substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the back side portion of the illuminated substrate 6720 can be made to emit light by the illuminated substrate 6720 provided with the LED chip D1 that irradiates the front side with light (at least, the illuminated substrate 6720). Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed from a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in the rear view (see FIG. 276). As a result, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the back end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner up and down, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, since the light emitted from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 toward the glass unit 16 and the light traveling along the arrow L23d can be combined to perform the light effect, the light effect can be performed. The degree of design freedom can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, when incident on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. When the light reaches the inner extending portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness because the energy loss due to the transmitted light occurs when the light is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. In this way, the difference in the brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction can be alleviated, and the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 can be easily made uniform in the front-rear direction.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal staging device 6700 arranged on the left side, most of the configuration of the horizontal staging device 6700 on the right side is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or similar shape), but left and right. As a special non-symmetrical part, the formation of the long rib 6734 (projection to the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light staging is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. That is, the effect of advancing the light to the fin 6735 is to be maintained on the left side, but on the other hand, the intention is to suppress the light from advancing to the game area side due to the light advancing to the long rib 6734.

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the place where the launch ball enters the game area, which is the left side of the game area, the intensity of the light emitted from the horizontal staging device 6700 to the inside (game area side) is reduced. Is aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the launch ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it becomes difficult to adjust the launch intensity or confirm the launch of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, the ball fired by right-handed (strongest firing strength) flows down in most cases, and there is little need for the player to visually check the ball for adjusting the firing strength. .. In addition, since a large number of game balls flow down continuously in a narrow place in a short time, by irradiating the place with light and reflecting it on the game ball, the effect of directing the effect using light is achieved. Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and the light is easily emitted from the horizontal staging device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in the present embodiment. , It is possible to improve the effect of production.

The arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is emitted in a direction having a large angle between the long rib 6734 and the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected on the inner side surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light, but the long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Since the light traveling along the arrow L23e is extremely low in intensity because it is extended to the position, it can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, thereby reducing the effect of the light effect.

Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the recess 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 in the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both wall portions of the recess 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737, as described above with the arrows L23c and L23d.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753. Therefore, there is a risk that the effect of the light emission effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 are combined. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and it is possible to reduce the number of places where the effect of light emission effect is reduced.

In addition, a recess 6737a is arranged in the vicinity of the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the recess 6737a is configured to be emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732 to form the fastening screw. It prevents the area from becoming too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the effect of the light emission effect.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the illumination substrate 6570 is arranged on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 on the upper part of the front frame 10014 has been described, but the pachinko machine 18010 in the 18th embodiment is on the right side of the operation device 10300. By disposing the staging device 18800 provided with the illumination substrate 18830 below, it is possible to execute the light emitting staging even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with the staging device 18800 in comparison with the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment. Only the device 18800 will be described, and the description of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the staging device 18800 is a device for light emitting effect in which the back surface side and the upper surface side are coupled to the lining foundation member 6410 on the front side of the lower plate unit 6400, and the operating device 10300 and the operating device 10300. It is arranged between the operation handle 51 and the operation handle 51.

The staging device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emitting staging changes depending on whether or not the operating device 10300 participates in the staging due to structural ingenuity. Next, in order to explain the structural device, the internal structure of the staging device 18800 will be described.

284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the staging device 18800 in the CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 (b) is an illuminated substrate 18830 of the staging device 18800 in the direction of the arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. 284 (a). It is a schematic diagram of. Note that FIG. 284 (b) schematically shows the support mode of the illuminated substrate 18830.

As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the staging device 18800 is arranged with a planar gap on the front side of the coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower plate unit 6400 and the coupling foundation member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the coupling foundation member 18810, an illuminated substrate 18830 arranged in a gap between the coupling foundation member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and an illuminated substrate 18830 thereof. The light receiving member 18840, which is formed so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the above can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the covering member 18850 which is attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. And mainly prepare.

The coupling foundation member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface whose front wall surface, which is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 18830, is inclined downward toward the back surface side. The tilt angle of the tilted surface is the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of vibration of the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging device member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is arranged in an upward position and is in the posture before operation. It is formed at an inclination angle that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The illuminated substrate 18830 is arranged parallel to the wall surface on the front side of the coupling foundation member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. The illuminated substrate 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, an elongated hole 18831 formed in a long shape in the vertical direction, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward urging force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the elongated hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixed portion 18821 is designed as the length (allowable length) at which the illuminated substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

The LED chip D1 is arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, the apex of the pentagon) on the front side of the illuminated substrate 18830, and irradiates light in the normal direction of the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives the light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 descends and inclines toward the front side (player's line of sight). Even in the direction away from), it is possible to prevent the effect of the light effect from being reduced.

The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and has a plate-shaped portion 18841 that can close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion 18841 from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 18841. Mainly includes a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 extending to the above.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape in which the front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmission, and a plurality of fixing portions are projected toward the joining base member 18810 side in a cylindrical shape and fastened and fixed to the joining base member 18810. It mainly comprises 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 formed in a position and a size that can accept the extension plate portion 18842 at the bottom portion on the back surface side.

In this embodiment, since the resin die punching direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chip D1 is arranged at the apex of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged side by side at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate portion 18842. As a result, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate-shaped portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also drilled at three upper and lower positions with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extended plate portion 18842 starts to be extended along the normal direction of the plate-shaped portion 18841, but is formed in a gently curved curved plate shape. The radius of curvature of the curvature can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the curvature is such that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illuminated substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the light incident on the extended tip (rear surface side end portion) of the extended plate portion 18842 to reach the plate-shaped portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

The lining member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage in a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light effect is desired, and can be realized in various embodiments. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so that it can be attached, or it may be a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material.

In the present embodiment, the lining member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup arranged on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions of the above.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chip D1, and it is possible to have similar shapes with slightly different sizes. Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the forming mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important in designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851 than the arrangement of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in the front view.

The operation of the staging device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illuminated substrate 18830 is movable in the first deviation direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged with a permissible width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first deviation direction is an operation. It coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

That is, when the operating device 10300 produces a vibration effect, the illuminated substrate 18830 is configured to be slidable due to the vibration. When the illuminated substrate 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate portion 18842 shifts, so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is less likely to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

In this case, even in a state where the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark because it is difficult for the light to travel through the extending plate portion 18842. That is, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes in a direction different from the first deviation direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 on the illuminated substrate 18830 is suppressed, and the illuminated substrate 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illuminated substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is incident on the extension plate portion 18842 and then totally reflected. It is formed so that it can proceed to the front side.

That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is darkly visible) while the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed in to operate. , The through hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

Therefore, when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized in the dark even when the vibration effect is performed, whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light can be grasped by operating the swing operation member 10310. Can be done. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big hit occurs or when the player shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1.

As a result, the player's motivation to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. Therefore, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's motivation to participate is increased and the player actually becomes a player. The swing operation member 10310 can be directed to operate.

In the present embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 is arranged outside the lining foundation member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 18830 may be arranged so as to penetrate the lining foundation member 6410 and enter the inside so as to be able to come into contact with the operation device 10300.

In this case, the vibration of the operating device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illuminated substrate 18830, and the illuminated substrate 18830 slides and moves not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. Can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the push-in instruction as a notification effect is generated. By pushing the lens member 10317 at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light (push operation), it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to visually grasp the presence or absence of the light emission of the LED chip D1.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed (pushed) at a timing other than the notification, the notification can be easily overlooked, which is advantageous for the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 other than the timing when the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 may break down early or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily to generate noise. It is possible to suppress annoying acts.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be split left and right has been described, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the 19th embodiment are formed so as to be split back and forth. There is. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 according to the 19th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in the present embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 have substantially the same shape as the above-mentioned covers 10321 and 10322, and are mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so that they can be divided by a dividing surface that coincides with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. It is formed so that it can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the operation in the swing operation member 10310 in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact of vibration.

Further, since the swinging operation member 10310 has the same vibration direction Y17a as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening direction of the lens member 10317 is orthogonal to the fastening direction in the side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in a cross-sectional view and the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described. The protruding shape portion 16413 and the concave shape portion 16414 in the form are formed so as to be slightly inclined in the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 16400 according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are compared with those of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the 17th embodiment. Is set toward the vertical direction.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the 17th embodiment) and the upper end portion of the concave shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the concave shape portion 6414 of the 17th embodiment) (corresponding to the concave shape portion 6414 of the 17th embodiment). The base end of the recess) is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

Where the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is abutted against and supported by the base end portion (upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the recessed shape portion 16414, the main body portion is supported at the supporting position. Since the support thickness of the 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be sufficiently secured, the deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load during the operation of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right end portions is changed as compared with the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the concave shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in a cross-sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are deformed when an external force is applied by forming the protrusion shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be inclined in an inverted C shape in a cross-sectional view. Can be easily directed to. As a result, the degree of fatigue given by the external force can be reduced as compared with the case where the deformation is possible in both the left and right directions, and the plate portions forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are damaged at an early stage. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the supply of electricity to the lower plate unit 6400 is not required has been described, but the lower plate unit 21400 in the 21st embodiment is a vibration configured to be vibrable by the conduction of electricity. The device 21500 is provided, and electricity needs to be supplied to the lower plate unit 21400. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 21400 in the 21st embodiment. In FIG. 287, the upper half of the front frame 10014 is not shown, and the lower plate unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are shown in a directional view from the back side after being disassembled from the metal main body 10014a. ..

Further, for easy understanding, an assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening points is illustrated by an imaginary line, and further, an electric wiring 21513 connected so as to be able to supply electricity to the vibration device 21500. The relationship of arrangement with respect to the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 287, the bottom member 21De whose design has been changed from the above-mentioned bottom member De is fastened and fixed to the lower bottom side of the operation device 10300. The bottom member 21De includes, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the bottom member De, an overhanging portion De3 formed overhanging to the right side.

The overhanging portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and a function of regulating the displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl under the overhanging portion De3, so that when the lower plate unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are used. It is possible to prevent the 10322 from rubbing against each other.

The overhanging portion De3 is formed so that the back surface side is inclined so as to be narrow toward the overhanging end, while the front surface side constitutes a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gap between the overhanging portion De3 and the metal main body portion 10014a on the back surface side of the overhanging portion De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhanging portion De3.

This gap is the length of the electrical wiring 21513 (wiring that fills the length that the lower plate unit 21400 separates from the metal body 10014a) required when removing the lower plate unit 21400 during maintenance, and the lower plate unit 21400. It is effectively used as an area to be loosened and arranged when the metal body is not removed (when it is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a). As a result, the load received by the electric wiring 21513 from the surroundings can be suppressed to be small as compared with the case where the electric wiring 21513 is tightly arranged when the lower plate unit 21400 is not removed.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operation handle 51 is internally fitted and supported by the handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right edge of the lower plate unit 21400 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, but the entire left edge of the handle support plate 21051 is covered. The fastening portion is not formed, and the connection with the lower plate unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the right edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction as compared with the case where the right edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Along with this, it is possible to prevent the left edge portion of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower plate unit 21400 to the player. For example, the lower plate unit that the finger or arm of the player who grips the operation handle 51 comes into contact with the transmission path of the vibration transmitted to the player who grips the operation handle 51, not as a path via the operation handle 51. It can be limited to the path via the right side surface portion of the 21400.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 21400. In FIGS. 288 and 289, the portions corresponding to the fixed portions of the lining base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibrating device 21500 are shown in association with each other by imaginary lines.

In addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the lining foundation member 6410, the lining foundation member 21410 is formed in a region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 so that a fastening screw can be screwed in (a pair in this embodiment). ) Is provided with a fastening portion 21415. Fastening screws inserted into the fastening portions 21535, which are arranged in pairs on the right side of the vibrating device 21500, are screwed into the fastening portion 21415. That is, the insertion portion 21535 on the right side is fastened and fixed to the lining foundation member 21410.

In addition to the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, the lower plate forming member 21420 includes a support hole 21428 formed in the plate-shaped portion extending upward from the upper surface of the front vertical portion 6426c in the front-rear direction. The support hole 21428 is inserted with a fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450, which is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibrating device 21500.

In addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is provided in a columnar shape on the back surface side as a substitute for the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 227) so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the V-shaped design member 21450. It includes a fastening portion 21457 that is formed, and a connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 that is formed in a plate shape and connects between the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is screwed in to fasten and fix the fastening portion 21457. That is, the insertion portion 21535 on the left side is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covered foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibrating device 21500.

Here, in the V-shaped design member 21450, as described above, the overhanging fastening portions 6454 arranged at the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via the intermediate member. Therefore, it is structurally harder than the lining foundation member 21410, which is configured in a substantially bag shape that opens to the back surface side and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a mainly at the back surface side edge portion.

That is, the lining foundation member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end portion on the back surface side and the left end portion, while the number of fastening positions at the upper portion and the right edge portion is suppressed (isn't it? Even if there is, it is limited to a small number), and since it is formed in a thin, substantially box-like shape (approximately bag-like shape), it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance) especially at the right edge.

Further, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the upper front edge of the lining foundation member 21410, the vertical (vertical) displacement of the lining foundation member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , The degree of freedom of displacement of the lining foundation member 21410 can be improved in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). As a result, the displacement of the lining foundation member 21410 can prevent, for example, the occurrence of a problem that the lower plate 50 is displaced up and down and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 bounces.

According to the present embodiment, the rigidly constructed V-shaped design member 21450 is used as a base (reference) to vibrate a flexible (high degree of freedom of displacement) lining base member 21410 as compared with the V-shaped design member 21450. Therefore, the right side portion of the lining foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration) by driving the vibration device 21500.

In addition, since vibration transmission to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates. It is possible to avoid vibration due to the vibration of the device 21500, and from this, it can be said that the right side portion of the lining foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration) by driving the vibration device 21500.

The connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is formed in a long plate shape along the longitudinal direction of the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 described later. As a result, the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other over the longitudinal direction of the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541, and a large load generation area can be secured. It is possible to avoid stress concentration (at the time of pressing).

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is configured to have a dimensional relationship of abutting (pressing) the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, vibration can be received at least through the contact position between the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in the present embodiment. That is, compared to the case of fastening and fixing to a single member, the case of fastening and fixing the vibrating device 21500 to a plurality of members may cause deviations from the design dimensions of each member to accumulate. The deviation tends to be large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the transmission strength of the vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviation, the shell (regardless of the size within the limit value of large and small) regardless of how the dimensional deviation occurs. By designing the dimensions so that the overhanging portion 21541 comes into contact with the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (when the interval is short, the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is deformed to abut while being crushed), the shell-shaped overhanging portion is stably formed into a shell shape. The overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, the vibration can be stably received.

In this embodiment, the contact direction between the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is set in the front-rear direction as in the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even when the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by the operation of the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced by sliding with respect to the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the push-down displacement from being transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibrating device 21500 from being pushed down by the operation of the operating device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the portion where the vibration device 21500 is arranged is a flexible portion of the lining foundation member 21410, so that the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 is destroyed and penetrates into the inside (for example, a thin metal wire is inserted). It is a place that is easily broken in the event of fraudulent activity. That is, in the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is arranged at a place where a person who commits an illegal act can easily select it as an intrusion route.

Therefore, when the lining foundation member 21410 is broken, the vibrating device 21500 may be destroyed or disconnected at the same time. In this case, the vibration device 21500 is connected to the vibrating device 21500 and the conduction of the electric wiring 21513 is cut off. By controlling the voice lamp control device 113 to output an error signal when the voice lamp control device 113 detects this, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

Further, instead of the vibration device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be arranged, but in the present embodiment, by intentionally arranging the vibration device 21500, vibration occurs when no fraudulent activity has occurred. It can be used for directing. That is, since the vibration device 21500 can be used for both the vibration effect and the detection of fraudulent activity (it can be configured as a multifunctional device), it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the device.

FIG. 290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibrating device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibrating device 21500. As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 21500 includes a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration by controlling the eccentric weight 21512 to rotate, and a soft resin material (silicon resin or the like). It is formed from a covering member 21520 that covers the vibration motor 21510 and a material that is harder than the covering member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and partially covers the covering member 21520 from the back surface side. It includes a covering cover member 21530 formed in a possible shape and a flat plate-shaped facing plate member 21540 arranged to face the covering cover member 21530 with the covering member 21520 interposed therebetween.

The covering cover member 21530 and the facing plate member 21540 are held so as to surround the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is, the concealed cover 21530 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 21532 (two locations in the present embodiment) through which the screw portions of the fastening screws can be inserted, and the facing plate member 21540 is screwed with the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 21532. It comprises a plurality of fastening portions 21542 that can be formed. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the facing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. be. FIG. 294 illustrates a perspective view of the covering member 21520 looking down from diagonally forward and upward.

The vibration motor 21510 has a main body portion 21511 whose shaft portion is rotated and controlled by energization, a top view fan-shaped eccentric weight 21512 that is fixed to the shaft portion and whose center of gravity is arranged at a position different from the shaft portion, and a lower surface of the main body portion 21511. It is provided with an electrical wiring 21513 (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface) extending downward from the surface.

The covering member 21520 has a cylindrical main body portion 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a protrusion vertically along the back surface of the tubular main body portion 21521. 21522 It is provided with a circular overhanging portion 21524 that projects downward.

The overhanging portion 21524 is formed in an oval shape having a size that surrounds the connection position between the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electric wiring 21513 in a bottom view, and the upper surface side is recessed so as to accept the electric wiring 21513.

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the overhanging portion 21524 is vertically recessed in a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a recessed downward from the lower surface side of the tubular main body portion 21521 and the recessed portion 21524a. It is provided with a wiring through hole 21524b to be bored and a pair of spare holes 21524c to be bored in the vertical direction at a position opposite to the wiring through hole 21524b sandwiching the recessed portion 21524a.

With the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held by the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in the present embodiment, the covering member 21520 can be provided with a function of preventing and holding the electric wiring 21513 from hanging due to its own weight, a function of bundling the electric wiring 21513, and a function of guiding the electric wiring 21513. As a result, the number of required binding bands can be reduced, the material cost can be reduced, and the manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

Further, since a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the facing plate portion 21540 when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, it is possible to prevent the person performing the assembling work from forgetting to attach the covering member 21520. .. Therefore, as compared with the case where the binding band is separately prepared and the electric wiring 21513 is held, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble the member for holding the electric wiring 21513.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 is configured as a part of the other device 228, and the vibration is controlled by the control signal transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

The spare hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even when the electric wiring 21513 is about to come off from the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body portion 21511 side by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing the electric wiring 21513. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is arranged in the lower plate unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower plate unit 21400 is formed so as to be removable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker performing maintenance work accidentally removes the lower plate unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 will be connected. Excessive load may be applied and the wire may break. Further, when an excessive load is applied to the electric wiring 21513 when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is generated, there is a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connecting position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, the connecting position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 is excessive. It is possible to prevent displacement.

Further, since the electric wiring 21513 having a length held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring 21513 from being disconnected by this length. You can (you can have a margin). Further, even if a load is applied to the electric wiring 21513, the length direction of the electric wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a (that is, the overhanging portion 21524) is not the connection direction between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511. Since the load is applied along the (longitudinal direction), it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In addition, as described above, even if the electric wiring 21513 falls off from the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 21513 can be easily reconnected to the main body portion 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the maintenance work including the step of removing the lower plate unit 21400.

In the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, at the same time as the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. In the description of FIG. 295, FIGS. 290 and 291 are referred to as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 includes a main body portion 21531 forming a frame in which the front side and the lower side are opened, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and a receiving recess 21533 recessed in the front side of the main body portion 21531 to receive the vibration motor 21510. , A plurality of ridges 21534 that are ridges that project inward from the left and right inner side surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extend in the front-rear direction, and are bored in the front-rear direction at the vertical position of the insertion hole 21532. , The lining base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and a plurality of insertion portions 21535 that allow the fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (see FIGS. 288 and 289) to be inserted.

The receiving recess 21533 includes the weight receiving recess 21533a for receiving the eccentric weight 21512, the main body receiving recess 21533b for receiving the main body 21511, and the weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction. It is provided with a bearing recess 21533c for connecting the receiving recess 21533b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c by an extra length as compared with the left side. On the contrary, the ridge portion 21534 is projected on the right side by an extra length as compared with the left side, so that the protrusion tip of the ridge portion 21534 is substantially left and right with respect to the bearing insertion recess 21533c. It is placed in a symmetrical position.

As a result, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, in the non-excited state (stop state) of the vibration motor 21510, it is held by the protruding tip of the ridge portion 21534, while in the excited state (vibration state) of the vibration motor 21510, the main body is held. Deformation (displacement, flow) of the covering member 21520 can be coped with by a deep recess (a recess formed between the ridges 21534 arranged in parallel vertically) formed on the right side of the receiving recess 21533b. As a result, it is possible to prevent an overload from being applied to the covering cover member 21530, and it is possible to improve the durability of the covering cover member 21530.

Since the ridge portion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 that is supported by abutting left and right with respect to the ridge portion 21534 is affected by the engagement and biting with the ridge portion 21534. Therefore, it tends to occur in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration in which the eccentric weight 21512 is arranged at the upper end of the main body 21511 and the main body 21511 tends to tilt with the lower end as a fulcrum when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration is suppressed. , The displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The protrusion 21534 has a mode (covering) in which the protrusion length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (rear surface side) formed in the shape of a flat plate having a vertical width half of the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531. Since it is formed in a manner that follows the outer shape of the member 21520, the covering member 21520 can be supported from the left and right and the back surface side.

In addition, the ridge portion 21534 includes a back inclined portion 21534a that rises from the nearest ridge portion 21534 toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b below the intermediate lower surface 21531b constituting the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.

The distance between the back inclined portion 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 directly above it narrows toward the back side. Therefore, compared to the case where the distance between the upper and lower ridges 21534 is not narrowed, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the back surface and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the back inclined portion It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 directly above the ridge portion 21534a. This makes it possible to prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced toward the back surface side.

The ridges 21534 are not completely symmetrically arranged, but are partially displaced vertically. This makes it easier to avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from both the left and right directions on the same horizontal plane as compared with the case where the ridge portion 21534 is arranged at a completely symmetrical position. , The compression load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

The ridge portion 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a non-fragile material as the material of the covering member 21520.

The formation of the lower half portion of the back side wall portion of the main body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, the displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half portion of the main body portion 21513, while the displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half portion of the main body portion 21531.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced toward the back surface due to the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the ridge portion 21522 which is restricted to the upper half of the main body portion 2153 and the lower half where displacement is allowed. Both can be deformed so as to proceed (flow) to an open region in the lower half of the main body portion 21531, and work to improve the vibration effect of the vibration device 21500, which will be described in detail later.

The right side of the plate-shaped protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported from below by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530. Further, the left side portion is open to the covering cover member 21530, while being supported by the support extension portion 21543 of the facing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 291). Thereby, in addition to being able to support the own weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, it is possible to form an open portion accessible from the outside under the covering member 21520.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering cover member 21530 covers the lower portion from the rear right side, and the facing plate member 21540 covers the lower surface from the front left side to the lower portion. The left rear portion of the lower portion of the member 21520 can be opened as an opening portion. This open portion functions as a portion for ensuring contact between the overhanging portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The facing plate member 21540 is a plate-shaped member arranged to face the covering cover member 21530 from the open portion side of the covering cover member 21530, and has a shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 formed by projecting to the front side. The above-mentioned fastening portion 21542 and a support extension portion 21543 extending from the left lower end portion to the back surface side are provided.

The shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is formed as thin as the facing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the overhanging tip portion and the covering member 21520. Therefore, with respect to the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541. Even if a load is applied in the direction of being pushed in (toward the back surface) and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, it is possible to avoid transmitting a large load to the covering member 21520.

296 (a) is a top view of the lower plate unit 21400, FIG. 296 (b) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit 21400 in the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line of FIG. 296 (a), and FIG. 297 is a lower view. It is a rear view of the dish unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 21400 in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line of FIG. 296 (a).

As shown in FIG. 296 (b), the protrusion portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 of the bottom member 21De are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, and the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state). ), The overhanging portion De3 slightly bites into the ridge portion 21522 (the ridge portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the overhanging portion De3 to the ridge portion 21522, the arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in the vibrating device 21500 can be moved to the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position closer to the back surface side.

FIG. 299 (a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower plate unit 21400 schematically showing the lower plate unit 21400, and FIG. 299 (b) is a lower plate unit in the direction of the arrow CCXCIXb of FIG. 299 (a). It is a partial side surface schematic diagram of 21400, FIG. 300 (a) is a partial top surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit 21400 which schematically shows the lower plate unit 21400, and FIG. 300 (b) is FIG. 300 (a). It is a partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit 21400 in the direction view of the arrow CCCb.

In FIGS. 299 (a) and 299 (b), a state in which the vibration device 21500 is arranged at the front side limit position of the vibration displacement is shown in the same manner as in the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510. In FIG. 300B, a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state and the vibration device 21500 is arranged at the limit position on the back side of the vibration displacement is shown. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibrating device 21500 is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. 300. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body portion 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibration is directly transmitted.

The vibration transmission mode of the vibration device 21500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 300. As described above, in the vibrating device 21500, a plurality of portions are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidity. This is intended to effectively generate the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 in a specific part.

More specifically, if the member to which the entire vibration device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration is suppressed too much, but if it is too soft, the vibration may be attenuated too much. Therefore, a part of the vibration device 21500. Is fixed to the member on the hard side, and the member on the soft side fixed to the other part of the vibrating device 21500 is vibrated around the fixed position. As a result, the portion fixed to the other portion of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (hard side), and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is in contact with the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458, while vibrating. The insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the lining base member 21410 (soft side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is an lining foundation member in such a manner that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (vibration axis). By transmitting to 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position close to the finger of the player holding the operation handle 51.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced toward the back surface side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the ridge portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the overhanging portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the ridge portion 21522 receives a load toward the front side from the overhanging portion De3, so that the vibrating device 21500 returns to the front side as compared with the case where the overhanging portion De3 is not formed. Can be increased.

Further, when the vibrating device 21500 is displaced in a manner of rotating backward with respect to the left end portion due to vibration, the left plate-shaped protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left surface of the bottom member 21De due to this displacement (FIG. 300). (A)). As a result, the plate-shaped protrusion 21523 receives a load toward the right side from the bottom member 21De, and the momentum for the vibrating device 21500 to return to the front in the rotational direction about the left end portion can be increased.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back surface side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is restricted by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is made to be able to flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 between the covering member De3 and the overhanging portion De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, so that the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3 can be increased. Can be done. Since the bottom member 21De provided with the overhanging portion De3 is not a member that is expected to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to assume that the covering member 21520 will be deformed due to the displacement of the overhanging portion De3.

As a result, the load generated between the vibrating device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 can be limitedly increased in the excited state of the vibrating motor 21510. In this case, when the vibrating device 21500 is de-excited during the operation of the operating device 10300 or the vibration effect of the vibrating device 10366 (see FIG. 216) of the operating device 10300, the vibrating device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 While it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the vibrating device 21500 side by keeping the load generated between them small, it occurs between the vibrating device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 in the excited state of the vibrating motor 21510. By increasing the load, the action of assisting the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (the flexibility of the covering member 21520 is sufficiently exhibited). In the excited state of the vibrating device 21500, compression deformation (strain) occurs in the ridge portion 21522, so that the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be increased.

On the other hand, since the ridge portion 21522 is a ridge formed of a flexible resin material, it is possible to prevent the overhanging portion De3 from being displaced by being pressed against the ridge portion 21522. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the overhanging portion De3, it is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from vibrating due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced toward the back surface side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 and then displaced so as to return to the front side, the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458. As a result, the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 receives a load toward the back surface side from the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458. The momentum to return to the side can be increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the vibrating device 21500 is configured to assist the displacement in both the front and rear directions, the vibration from the excited state of the vibrating device 21500 to the extent that the player feels the vibration becomes strong. The period of can be shortened.

In the above description, the state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-energized during the operation of the operation device 10300 and the vibration effect of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the operation of the operation device 10300 may be executed during the vibration of the vibration device 21500.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300 and the covering covering member 21520. Since the directions of the loads generated between the overhanging portion De3 and the overhanging portion De3 intersect with each other, it is possible to suppress the interaction between the load generated from the vibrating device 21500 and the load applied to the operating device 10300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 fail due to the simultaneous load generated from the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300.

FIG. 301 is a partial top surface schematic view of the lower plate unit 21400 schematically showing the lower plate unit 21400. In FIG. 301, the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end portion of the bearing insertion recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the vibration motor 21510 is arranged at the right limit position of the displaceable region. Illustrated.

In the present embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 21510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the covering cover 21530 due to deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like. ing. Further, as described above, in the vibrating device 21500, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) on the left side as a reference (vibration axis), so that the displacement is centrifugal. The force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 becomes intense, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced to the right due to the centrifugal force generated in the vibrating device 21500 (see FIG. 301). Since the ridge portion 21534 formed on the right side of the covering cover 21530 is formed in a curved shape toward the left at the rear end (see FIG. 295), the vibration motor 21510 vibrates as it moves to the right. The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 when the motor 21510 is displaced toward the back surface increases. As a result, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by the vibration motor 21510 being displaced in the direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-back direction). Since the action occurs, the vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the stop of the vibration motor 21510 by the control is executed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510.

Further, by configuring the vibration motor 21510 to suppress the vibration due to the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to the overvibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need for the arrangement of the detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the overvibration of the vibration motor 21510. .. As a result, the product cost of the lower plate unit 21400 in the present embodiment can be reduced, and the wiring can pass through the vacant area by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor, and the heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 is dissipated. It can be effectively used as a space for doing things.

Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. In the first embodiment, the gaming machine frame has been mainly described, but in the 22nd embodiment, the operation unit A300 visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the gaming board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 according to the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 has a base plate A60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit A80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is fixed.

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board A13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board A13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board A13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 302.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board A13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board A13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board A13, which is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member A73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

In this embodiment, the strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened by incorporating the metal plate-shaped member 75 (see FIG. 308) into the outer edge member A73. However, the details will be described later.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be described below.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball into the first winning opening 64 by the route passing through the left side of the third symbol display device 81, but the first winning is achieved. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the opening 64 wins a prize in the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of affecting the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is that the number of winnings to the first winning opening 64 will be increased with a small number of balls during normal times.

On the other hand, in the game during the time reduction or the probability change, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball into the second winning opening 640 by the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins a prize in the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of affecting the game during the probability change or the time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning opening 63, the more it is possible to suppress the ball loss during the probability change or the time reduction.

By suppressing the ball loss, even if you do not play a game (even if you keep hitting) in a firing mode that stops the firing of the ball at the right time during the probability change, you will get the next big hit before the ball held in the upper plate 17 runs out. Since it is easy to do so, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives during the game. Therefore, even when the number of rotations until the next big hit frequently increases (for example, 100 rotations or more) during the probability change, the player can comfortably execute the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a by the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but on the right side of the second winning opening 640. A part of the ball flowing down the area flows down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and wins a prize in the general winning opening 63a. Since the prize ball associated with the prize in the general prize opening 63 is paid out as a prize ball different from the prize ball in the specific prize opening 65a, the player can change the prize ball by the end of the special game state. In addition to the prize ball based on the number of prizes to be entered in the specific winning opening 65a, the prize ball based on the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general prize opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of increasing the number of payout prize balls that can be acquired by the player in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so that the elapsed time until the end of the special gaming state tends to increase. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special gaming state (specified number of winnings for each round) are the same in terms of control due to the arrangement location, the number of arrangements, and the design of the upstream flow path of the general winning opening 63. However, the time required to end the special game state (long and short) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (somewhat) can be different.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of payout prize balls based on the prize in the specific winning slot 65a and the number of payout prize balls based on the prize in the general winning slot 63 may be displayed separately, or the payout based on the prize in the specific winning slot 65a may be displayed. A numerical value obtained by totaling the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Toward, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit A80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and it is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

In the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and it is required to hit the ball on the left and right according to the game state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 302). In this case, "right-handed" can be aimed at the first winning opening 64, or "left-handed" can be aimed at the second winning opening 640. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state), the method of firing the ball is changed to "left-handed" or "right-handed" for the player. It can be unnecessary to make it. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

In this embodiment, the input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225 (see FIG. 4). The other device 228 includes a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AMT2, a drive motor for raising and lowering the staging unit A710, and the like.

FIG. 303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 showing a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a figure. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and FIGS. 303 and 304 omit the reference numeral of the internal configuration of the game board A13 for convenience.

Next, the structures of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323. FIG. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300, and FIG. 306 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300. It is a figure. In FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is magnified. Further, in the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 will be referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, fitted from the front side into a through hole 13a formed in the game board A13, and fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the peripheral edge portion. The lining part 86h that is laid down on the left side, the distribution extending part 86a that extends from the lining part 86h to the front side so that the ball can be distributed on the left side, and the downward inclination from the upper end to the left. The left inclined portion 86b extending from the lining portion 86h to the front side and the right inclined portion 86c extending downward from the upper end portion to the right from the lining portion 86h to the front side. And the right flow path forming wall portion 86d extending downward from the position where it is connected to the lower end portion of the right inclined portion 86c and is arranged facing the return rubber 69 from the lining portion 86h to the front side. , A plurality of lateral ridges 86e projecting to the flow path side (right side) as ridges extending in the front-rear width of the right flow path forming wall portion 86d, and positions that are staggered with the horizontal ridges 86e. In relation to the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and a plurality of front protrusions 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h to the flow path side (front side) as ridges extending over the flow path width in the region between the outer edge member A73. Mainly includes a separation wall portion 86g extending downward from the lower end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion 86d so that the lower right corner portion of the through hole 13a can be separated from other portions.

307 (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 in the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307 (a). ..

When the player rotates the operation handle 51 to the right with strength and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the distance between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is such that the sphere can flow down (the diameter of the sphere is 11 mm, whereas the distance is about 16 mm). Since the length is set to have a slight gap), the sphere will flow down while being in contact with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is repelled to the left and right center sides of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Since the right flow path forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that inclines downward toward the right, the sphere flowing down by its own weight tends to flow down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d so as to roll down.

In the process of flow, the ball rides on the lateral ridge 86e. In the present embodiment, the projecting length of the lateral protrusion 86e is designed to be about 2 mm (a little less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere) and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the flow path width). Therefore, it is possible to achieve a good balance between deceleration of the flowing ball and prevention of ball clogging.

In addition, in the present embodiment, at the intermediate position of the plurality of lateral protrusions 86e, the front protrusions 86f are formed with the same protrusion length (2 mm) as the lateral protrusions 86e. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of ball clogging while improving the deceleration action by setting the forming interval of the ridges to half the width of the flow path.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game store, it is installed by lying it slightly (a little less than 1 degree) from the vertical state to the back side. Therefore, the lining portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that inclines downward toward the front side, and the ball that flows down by its own weight tends to flow down so as to roll down the lining portion 86h. Since it is configured in this way, as compared with the case where the projecting portion is formed from the glass unit 16 side (front side) toward the flow path, the front projecting portion 86f projecting from the lining portion 86h A collision with a sphere can be satisfactorily generated. In FIG. 307 (b), the tilt angle of the game board A13 is shown larger than usual (about 5 degrees) in order to make it easier to grasp the tilt.

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion that is arranged to face the lottery unit A600, and has a role of closing and separating the region in which the lottery unit A600 is arranged in the region of the through hole 13a. Hereinafter, the assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has a small recess 13b protruding to the right from a substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86, and a small recess 13b below the small recess 13b to the lower right. A large recess 13c overhanging is formed. As described above, by forming the small recesses 13b and the large recesses 13c as the arrangement area of the lottery unit A600 as the recessed portions connected to the open portions for receiving the center frame A86 of the through holes 13a, a plurality of independent through holes are formed. It is possible to secure a wider area that can be used as the arrangement area of the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 as compared with the case of forming (the case of occupying the area required as the width of the portion forming the boundary). The details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a back surface formed in a box shape whose front side is open from the bottom wall portion A311 and the outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. A case A310 is provided.

The rear case A310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening A311a in the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operating unit A300 includes a plurality of first operating units A400 in which movable devices having substantially the same configuration are arranged in the internal space of the rear case A310 so as to cover the upper peripheral portion of the internal space, and the first operating unit A400 thereof. The second operating unit A700, which is arranged on the lower side where the arrangement of the above is omitted, is accommodated, and this is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit A400 is located on the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operating unit A700 is located on the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310 at a position below the opening A311a. Arranged. Note that FIGS. 305 and 306 show a state in which the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 are mounted on the rear case A310.

The rear case A310 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion A312, and faces the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304). A support plate portion A313 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion projecting from the back surface to the back surface side of the game board A13, and a fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center thereof is projected in a positionable shape. The positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and the fastening screw screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d can be inserted into the substantially center position of the positioning convex portion A313a (the position corresponding to the female screw of the fastening convex portion 13d). The hole A313b is bored.

That is, the gaming board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening convex portion 13d by the positioning convex portion A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening convex portion 13d. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the A13 and the operating unit A300 as a whole.

The shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening convex portion 13d (circular in the present embodiment) may be used, or the support plate portion A313 may be provided in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. It may be a convex portion along an oval shape along the forming direction. Further, when the fastening convex portion 13d is formed in a rectangular columnar shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is also formed along the rectangular shape.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in the present embodiment, many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310, and the formation of the support plate portion A313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. This is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back surface side of the game board A13 can be visually recognized through the game board A13. The entire back surface side of the game board A13 is effective as the area for the effect to be arranged. On the other hand, at the portion where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 in the front view. The area that can be disposed of will be narrowed. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the support plate portion A313 while the strength problem is solved, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion A313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the fact that many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310 is related to the range of the area where the player can see the launched ball such as the game area. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed in a place other than the range where the fired ball can be visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball launched from the launcher 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. Introduced, and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In the ball game, the place that is considered to attract the most attention is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61). ) Is usually low in attention.

Therefore, as a range that the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left parts based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right parts based on the upward convex arc. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be low.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is formed of a light-impermeable resin material, the back side of the game board A13 cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the game board A13 via the outer edge member A73 or the block-shaped member 74. It is configured as follows.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially arranged in the places where the attention is low or invisible. In fact, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where many support plate portions A313 are formed, the support plate portion A313 is formed near the corner portion of the rear case A310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62. Will be done.

In other words, by selecting the place where the space is eroded by forming the support plate part A313 from the place where the visibility is low (low production ability) in the first place, the rigidity of the operation unit A300 and the game board A13 as a whole is increased. While achieving the effect of securing, it is still possible to secure a wide area in the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, the range in which the ball does not flow down is the lower left and upper left. It is easy to ask for the part and the upper right part. On the other hand, it is difficult to specify a common range in which the sphere does not flow down on the downstream side of the return rubber 69 as a portion where the kinetic energy of the sphere is once absorbed and the subsequent flow mode can be adjusted.

That is, downstream of the return rubber 69, the flow path of the ball changes not only in relation to the member forming the outer edge of the game area but also in the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Until the specifications on the game board A13 side are determined, the location of the support plate portion A313 cannot be determined.

Since the operation unit A300 can be freely designed compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball ejection performance of the pachinko machine A10, the design of the operation unit A300 proceeds earlier than the design of the game board A13. This is normal, and the internal configuration of the operating unit A300 can be elaborated by this. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the rear case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 This will lead to a design change of other devices arranged in the above, and the cost of the design change will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted at the position corresponding to the downstream of the return rubber 69. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, in the area downstream of the return rubber 69, the internal space of the rear case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and sufficient space for arranging the first operation unit A400 for staging is secured. In addition, since the path through which the ball flows down and the range in which the first motion unit A400 is arranged can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, the first motion unit A400 naturally enters the field of view of the player paying attention to the ball. Can be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the back position of the outer edge member A73 is formed inside (left side) from the outermost right end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate portion A313 formed on the left side portion of the back case A310 is formed on the outer side (left side) of the outer wall portion A312 on the left outermost short side. That is, the forming mode of the support plate portion A313 (the forming direction with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is asymmetrical.

As a result, the distance between the outermost right end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 can be shortened as compared with the distance between the outermost left end of the outer wall A312 and the leftmost end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the rear case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13.

The outer wall portion A312 on the right side does not have a surface to be arranged facing the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the front edge portion abuts on the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the outer wall portion A312 on the right side abuts on the game board A13 by line contact.

The substantially lower half of the outer wall portion A312 on the right side is provided with a notch portion A312a that is notched (notched is formed) toward the back surface side. The cutout portion A312a is cut out below the upper end edge of the lottery unit A600, and forms a gap with the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304).

By forming the notch portion A312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch portion A312a can be made to function as a wiring passage through which the wiring connected to the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 passes to the outside of the rear case A310. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring interferes with the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A700 side as compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Further, the gap formed by the notch portion A312a can be used as an arrangement space having a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. The configurations required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which a ball flows, a substrate that accompanies a light emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a ball, and the like. Other structures and the like are exemplified. In the present embodiment, the discharge path ER from which the winning ball is discharged into the second winning opening 640 of the lottery unit A600 is configured to pass through the gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (FIG. 317). reference).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch portion A312a, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means as light having a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the rear case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Therefore, the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 can be blurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 from depending on the shape of the rear case A310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the light emission effect.

The length of formation of the notch A312a (length in the vertical direction) is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion A312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening and fixing with the game board A13 is omitted in the right side portion of the rear case A310. Therefore, in considering the rigidity in the right side portion of the game board A13, the rigidity of the operation unit A300 is relied on. Can't.

As a countermeasure for this, in the present embodiment, a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal is arranged on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. Hereinafter, the metal plate-shaped member 75 will be described.

FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75. In FIGS. 308 and 309, the game board A13 is shown as a single unit for easy understanding, and the illustration of other members arranged on the game board A13 is omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, has an arc wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper portion and has an arc shape on the inner side surface, and is extended downward from the lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a in a thin wall shape. The vertical wall portion 73b is provided with an inclined wall portion 73c formed having an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b to the left. In this way, by forming the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 can be compared with the case where the outer edge member A73 is formed of a plurality of members that are vertically divided. The man-hours for assembling to the game board A13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b is formed by being bent in a U-shape in the vertical direction from a plurality of plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 projecting from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion in a plate shape along the right surface portion. A columnar projecting portion 73b3 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back surface at a joint portion between the plurality of bent portions 73b2 and the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and being attached to and fastened to the columnar projecting portion 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4 formed so that a screw can be screwed in is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-shaped member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75. Can be improved.

In other words, the metal plate-like member 75 has the plate-like protrusion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 as compared with the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed to any one of them. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction, while being bent to the left at the main body plate portion 75a formed without creases in the longitudinal direction and the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction, and formed through the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through hole 75d and an insertion hole 75e in which a fastening screw is inserted into a plate portion provided on the plate portion on which the through hole 75d is formed and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the long direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the main body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced by integrally arranging the vertical wall portion 73b which is easily curved in the long direction.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size capable of inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 through the seam penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a columnar protrusion is provided. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

From the above configuration, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is arranged above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-shaped member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and the tip portion thereof engages with the game board A13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the game board A13 will be described.

The game board A13 accepts a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed so as to accept a plate-shaped protrusion 73b1 on the right side edge of the front surface, and a cylindrical protrusion 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portion 13e. It is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 13f, which are formed through as long holes vertically and vertically as possible.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 are assembled to the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-shaped member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. This makes it possible to reduce the number of positionings.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b, it is not necessary to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b by itself, and the vertical wall portion 73b does not need to be sufficiently rigid. The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Further, since the deformation of the game board A13 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be improved) by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75, the game board can be used even when the game board A13 and the rear case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated from each other. The shape of A13 can be maintained. As a result, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening convex portion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the right edge of the small recess 13b or the large recess 13c can be arranged at a position where the distance from the right end of the game board A13 is short (a position extremely close to the right end). As a result, the right limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b, and the large recess 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved to the right side, and the opening shape thereof can be increased.

In this case, when a game area is formed by using a game board A13 having the same vertical width and a horizontal width and a center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is on the right. Since it can be moved toward, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path through which the game ball flows when hitting to the left (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide flow path, the position of the ball passage port, etc.).

Further, a distribution device (for example, a device that switches the route to flow down in the order of arrival of the balls), a lottery unit A600, and a variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 305) in which the ball flows down during a right-handed game. Since a large arrangement area can be secured, the degree of freedom in designing the sorting device, the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65 (not shown) can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 has a second winning opening 640 in which the above-mentioned electric accessory 640a and the electric accessory 640a are switched between a state in which the ball can pass and a state in which the ball cannot pass, depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in the open state or the closed state. It is an assembly that constitutes.

The lottery unit A600 consists of a main body member A610 in which a second winning opening 640 is formed through and a flow path through which a ball flows down to the front side, and is fastened and fixed to a game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. An engaging member A620 that is rotatably supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a, a driving device unit A630 that generates a driving force for operating the engaging member A620, and a main body member A610 are arranged on the front side. An lining member A650 that defines the flow path of the sphere, a main irradiation device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light to a region corresponding to the flow path of the sphere, and an arrangement on the back side of the main body member A610. It is provided with an auxiliary irradiation device A670 that irradiates light to a region that is provided and whose visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 and is different from the flow path of the sphere.

The main body member A610 has a main body plate portion A611 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side, and a left extending wall portion extending like a wall from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side. The back side of the A612, the right extension obstacle wall part A613 extending from the position including the right edge of the main body plate part A611 to the front side, and the second winning opening 640 in a rectangular frame shape. An extended rectangular frame A614 extending to the rear, a protruding receiving portion A615 protruding toward the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614. A main light emitting holding frame A616 extending to the back side in a frame shape including a portion, and an auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 extending to the back side in a frame shape on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614 are provided.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the spheres trying to enter the inside of the lottery unit A600 passes through the through gate 67 and flows downstream.

The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion arranged to face the separation wall portion 86 g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86 g of the center frame A86 and the left extension wall portion A612 are engaged (contacted) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through hole 13a can be stably held in such a manner as to suppress the misalignment of the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 while forming the through hole 13a in a sufficiently large shape that allows both the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 to fit together.

The right extension obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that constitutes the rolling surface of the sphere. That is, the ball flowing down the lottery unit A600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extension obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 includes a shaft support hole A614a formed as a portion for rotatably supporting the engaging member A620, and the extended end edge thereof can accept the front end portion of the drive unit A630. Formed from shape. That is, the drive unit A630 is fixed to the extension rectangular frame A614 by fastening the extension rectangular frame A614 with the front end portion of the drive unit A630 attached to the extension end.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be in contact with the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the moving end position thereof. Will be described later.

The main light emitting holding frame A616 is a frame constituting an outer frame of light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed inside the frame. The fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the lining member A650, but as will be described later, the fastening portion A652a overlaps with the low transmission range A651b of the lining member A650 in front view. Formed in position. As a result, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be visually recognized from the front, and it is possible to avoid damaging the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 is a frame constituting the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position overlapping with the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in front view.

The engaging member A620 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole A614a of the extended rectangular frame A614, and is configured to engage the claw-shaped portion A622 arranged at the rotational tip portion with the electric accessory 640a. .. As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the electric accessory 640a is configured to change with the change in the posture of the engaging member A620. Next, the details of the engaging member A620 will be described with reference to FIG. 312.

FIG. 312 (a) is a side view of the engaging member A620 in which the engaging member A620 is visually recognized from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and FIG. 312 (b) is an engaging member in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb of FIG. 312 (a). It is a front view of A620, and FIG. 312 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member A620 in the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG. 312 (b).

The engaging member A620 is formed on a pair of rotating arm portions A621 formed of a flexible resin material and formed of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal) with the rotating shaft J1 and at the rotating tip of the rotating arm portion A621. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A621 in a columnar shape centered on the rotating shaft J1, and a rotating base of the rotating arm portion A621. A rod-shaped portion extending radially from the end side, and a base end side connecting rod portion A624 formed in a U-shape in front view in a manner of being joined after being curved toward the mating side at the extended end. And, it is a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the base end side connecting rod portion A624 from the rotation tip side of the rotating arm portion A621, and is joined after being curved toward the mating side at the extended end portion. A front end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U-shape in a front view is provided.

The pair of rotating arm portions A621 are arranged so as to face each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the flow path of the ball can be formed so that the ball passes between the rotating arm portions A621 (see FIG. 313), so that the degree of freedom in designing the flow path of the ball configured by the lottery unit A600 is improved. be able to.

The base end side connecting rod portion A624 protrudes toward the tip end side connecting rod portion A625 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a formed from substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the long direction of the rod and the main body rod portion A624a. It is provided with a projecting regulation unit A624b to be installed. The protrusion restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting the over-rotation of the engaging member A620, and the details will be described later.

The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed in a rod-shaped portion A625a extending in parallel with the rotation axis J1 so that the cross-sectional shape is different from that of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624. That is, in the rod-shaped portion A625a, the surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 is formed in a plane shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is the rotating tip. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that inclines toward the direction away from the rotating arm portion A621 toward the side. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotation tip side and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the rod-shaped portion A625a is recessed in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is inclined so as to approach the surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 as it approaches the center side in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c to be provided.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when visually recognized in the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the concave surface A625c is the same except for the thickness direction of the tip side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621). It is visually recognized as a point.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operating member A632 so as to be able to accept the operating member A632 of the drive unit A630, and the details will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engaging member A620, and the drive unit A630. FIG. 313 illustrates a state in which the engaging member A620 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole A614a of the main body member A610.

To assemble the engaging member A620 to the main body member A610, the engaging member A620 is deformed by applying a compressive force to the inside of the extended rectangular frame A614, and the shaft support hole A614a and the engaging member A620 are projected. It is executed by removing the load and releasing the deformation in a state where the position is aligned with the shaft portion A623.

That is, after grasping the engaging member A620 from the direction of the rotation shaft J1 by sandwiching it with a finger and applying a compressive force, the protrusion shaft portion A623 is deformed to the extent that the arrangement width is shorter than the inner width of the extended rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by inserting the engaging member A620 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the positions, and releasing the fingers.

In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be connected by the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625, which are narrower and more easily deformed than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when a load for assembly is applied can be caused to the base end side connecting rod portion A624 and the tip end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, since the deformation of the rotating arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to the deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are connected by a pair of rod-shaped portions (base end side connecting rod portion A624 and tip end side connecting rod portion A625) instead of a single rod-shaped portion, the load is released. After that, it is possible to easily prevent the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 from being displaced from each other.

Further, by arranging a rod-shaped portion wider than the rotation base end side on the rotation tip side, which tends to increase the load during operation, among the pair of rod-shaped portions (see FIG. 312 (c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to prevent the rotation arm portions A621 from being displaced from each other when operating by the driving force of.

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the rotation base end side (see FIG. 312 (c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required for assembly is brought into the vicinity of the protrusion shaft portion A623 on the rotation base end side. Can be caused intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 comes into contact with the lower end of the projecting receiving portion A615, so that further rotation is restricted. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and the ball may enter the second winning opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory 640a. The ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A620 and the extended rectangular frame A614, and is arranged facing the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the back side. It flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b and flows into the drive unit A630.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arm portions A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter of the sphere (11 mm), the sphere can flow between the opposing portions of the rotating arm portion A621. As a result, the engaging member A620 can be arranged so as to surround the flow path of the ball from above, so that the engaging member A620 and the flow path of the ball can be compactly arranged.

The drive unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box portion A631 having an open front side connected and fixed to the rear end side end portion of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper portion of the main body box portion A631. It is held by the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and the lower portion of the main body box portion A631. A detection sensor A634 for detecting the passage of a sphere is provided.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is not excited, the operating member A632 is arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 314 (a)) by the urging force of the coil spring A633, and when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is excited, the coil spring A633 The operating member A632 is driven against the urging force and is arranged at the rear side position (see FIG. 314 (b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where the disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the projecting receiving portion A615. Next, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described with reference to FIG. 314.

314 (a) and 314 (b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b), for ease of understanding, only the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are shown, and other configurations for holding these members are shown. Illustration is omitted.

Further, FIG. 314 (a) shows a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (closed state of the electric accessory 640a), and FIG. 314 (b) shows an excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (opening of the electric accessory 640a). State) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the non-excited state and the operating member A632 is arranged in the front side position, the engaging member A620 is in the downward tilted posture (see FIG. 314 (a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the excited state. When the operating member A632 is arranged at the back surface side position, the engaging member A620 is in an upward tilted posture (see FIG. 314 (b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by a shaft support-shaped portion A653 of the lining member A650, and includes an eccentric protrusion 640b projecting from a position eccentric to the rotation shaft toward the back surface. The eccentric protrusion 640b is arranged so as to be in contact with the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620 in the vertical direction, and the eccentric protrusion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion A622. The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-shaped member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-shaped portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a are connected to each other. It may be composed of a pair of blade-shaped members facing each other. In this case, the engaging member A620 of the present embodiment can be diverted.

It will be described back to FIG. 310 and FIG. 311. The covering member A650 is a member formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween, and is a main body plate portion A611 of the main body member A610. The main body plate part A651 that constitutes the flow path of the ball between the two, the regulation wall part A652 that is projected like a wall toward the back side of the main body plate part A651 and regulates the flow of the ball, and the back surface of the main body plate part A651. It is provided with a shaft strut-shaped portion A653 that is projected to the side in a columnar shape and rotatably supports the electric accessory 640a.

The main body plate portion A651 includes a high transmission range A651a that makes it easy to see the back side in front view, and a low transmission range A651b that has lower light transmission than the high transmission range A651a and makes it difficult to see the back side.

In this embodiment, a sticker whose printed surface is designed so as to form a high-transparency range and a low-transparency range is attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651 to obtain a high-transparency range A651a. The low transmission range A651b is configured, but the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color molding of resin, or the main body plate portion A651 may be machined to roughen the surface to form a range having low transparency.

In the present embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side portion) of the flow path of the ball, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with the regulation wall portion A652 that regulates the flow of the ball. It is formed on the left side (mainly the left side). As a result, it is possible to block the view so that the player cannot see the internal structure in the range where the ball does not flow, while ensuring the visibility of the flow path of the ball.

The restricting wall portion A652 includes a fastening portion A652a into which a fastening screw to be inserted into, for example, an insertion hole A616a is screwed in for fastening and fixing to the main body member A610. Since the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is opaque, it is easy to create a shadow when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the fastening portion A652a is arranged outside the flow path of the ball, it is possible to prevent the shadow generated by the fastening screw from entering the flow path of the ball, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's concentration force for visually recognizing the flow mode of the ball from being scraped by the shadow of the fastening screw.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed inside the main light emission holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an illuminated substrate A662 in which a light emitting means A663 such as an LED is arranged on the diffusion plate A661 side, and a lighting substrate A662 thereof. It is provided with a rear lid portion A664 which is formed in an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the illuminated substrate A662 and is fastened and fixed to the rear end side end portion of the main light emitting support frame A616.

The diffuser plate A661 has an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and is a plate-shaped member having a diffused shape that diffuses light on both front and rear surfaces, and is a plate-shaped member having a diffused shape that diffuses light on both front and rear surfaces. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. The extended portion A661a is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffuser plate A661 from tilting while the diffuser plate A661 is housed in the main light emitting holding frame A616. When the diffuser plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extending portions A661a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and resistance is generated in the direction of returning the tilt, so that the posture of the diffuser plate A661 is maintained.

In the state where the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the front surface of the illuminated substrate A662 comes into contact with the extending end portion of the extending portion A661a, so that the diffuser plate A661 is restricted from coming off to the back side. ..

The outer shape of the illuminated board A662 has substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and the outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 has substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the illuminated board A662. .. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the illuminated substrate A662 is held in such a manner that it is sandwiched between the main light emitting holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 from the front and back (held by abutting on the surface).

As a result, even when the thickness of the rear lid portion A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A664 alone is low, the rigidity of the main light emitting holding frame A616 can be used to stably hold the illuminated substrate A662. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which the fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screw, it is necessary to remove the diffusion plate A661 from the main light emitting holding frame A616. Therefore, by increasing the man-hours required to remove the fastening screw, mischief can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the fastening screw is opaque and tends to cause a shadow, but according to the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 are emitted from the back surface side of the fastening screw. A diffuser plate A661 capable of diffusing is arranged. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be thinned (shadow is cast) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is arranged at a position where the insertion holes A616a do not overlap on the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outer shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). As a result, the shadow of the fastening screw can be thinned (shadow is cast), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw inconspicuous can be made more remarkable.

As described above, the main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the flow path of the sphere, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 irradiates the flow path of the sphere. Light reaches the flow path through it. Therefore, the light can be made lighter and wider than the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffuser plate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is an illuminated substrate A671 arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and having a plurality of light emitting means A672, and an illuminated substrate A671 arranged on the back side of the illuminated substrate A671. A rear lid portion A673 formed from an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape is provided.

The illuminated substrate A671 is fixed in the same holding mode as that of the illuminated substrate A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the illuminated substrate A671 is held in such a manner that it is sandwiched between the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and the rear lid portion A673 from the front and back (held by abutting on the surface).

As a result, even when the thickness of the rear lid portion A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A673 alone is low, the rigidity of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 can be used to stably hold the illuminated substrate A671. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, the diffuser plate is not arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate A671. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated to the main body member A610 in a state where the light emitting intensity is maintained without being diffused.

Although the light is irradiated in such an embodiment, in the present embodiment, since the light emitting means A672 is arranged at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in the front view, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It passes through the transmission range A651b and is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, since the player visually recognizes the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to avoid giving an excessive feeling of fatigue to the eyes of the player who sees the light.

In addition, by using light that maintains the emission intensity, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the character brightly with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

FIGS. 315 (a) and 315 (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit A600 in the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG. 312 (b). FIG. 315 (a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314 (a)), and FIG. 315 (b) shows the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314 (b)) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, in addition to the disk portion of the operating member A632 advancing toward the front side to the extent that the concave surface A625c is arranged so as to face the vicinity of the intermediate position in the width direction of the concave surface A625c, the concave surface A625c moves in the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves. The load applied from the engaging member A620 to the operating member A632 becomes a load mainly composed of components in the vertical direction (direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, it is possible to move (retract) the operating member A632 by the load from the engaging member A620 to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620. It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts that try to change to an open state by invading a wire rod such as the above and applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Here, conventional pachinko machines have a function to output an error notification when fraudulent activity is detected, but an electromagnetic solenoid is provided by improperly applying a load to the movable accessory 640a that can be seen from the front side. If the movable accessory 640 could be opened regardless of the state of ASOL, the deterrence against fraudulent activity was not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a pass through the eccentric protrusion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314 (a)), in the configuration of the present embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620, a load is applied to the movable accessory 640a. It can also be difficult to open the movable accessory 640a.

Further, in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent act of applying a load to the movable accessory 640a, in the present embodiment, the recessed surface A625c is provided so that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotation tip side of the engaging member A620. Since it is inclined, when the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced from the state shown in FIG. 315 (a) in the rising direction (for example, while deforming the tip side connecting rod portion A625), it has a rod shape with the operating member A632. The contact position of the portion A625a shifts to the thick wall side (rotation tip side), and the tip side connecting rod portion A625 is less likely to be deformed.

Therefore, each time the engaging member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the load required for further displacement of the engaging member A620 can be increased. Therefore, by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a, the load can be increased. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to open the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane on the opposite side of the concave surface A625c of the rod-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 315 (a), when the rod-shaped portion A625a bends and deforms in the thickness direction due to the load received from the operating member A632, the reaction force applied to the operating member A632 is increased and inclined toward the front side. Can be turned to.

As a result, the load in the front-rear direction given to the operating member A632 from the rod-shaped portion A625a can be generated as a load on the front side, and the operating member A632 can be prevented from retracting backward due to the load from the rod-shaped portion A625a. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably regulate the rising displacement of the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 315 (b), in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end of the disk portion of the operating member A632 and the protrusion restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620 come into contact with each other, so that the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is contacted. Further backflip movement (movement in the rising direction) of the engaging member A620 is restricted before colliding with the portion. That is, since the rotation of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 can be used for the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as collision with the part and cracking or bending.

316 (a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, FIG. 316 (b) is a side view of the operation unit A300 in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 302, and FIG. 317 is a game board A13 and an operation unit. It is a rear view of A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316 (a) and 316 (b), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is formed from the veneer plate while the first operation unit A400 is arranged in this way, it is necessary to form a recess or a hole on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first action unit A400. However, in the present embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed of the resin base plate A60, it is possible to design in advance in a shape that can avoid interference with the first operation unit A400 and manufacture the mold. The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in the present embodiment, since it is recessed from the back side to the front side along the left and right and upper surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is Interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while being configured so as to project toward the front side of the rear case A310 from the front end. As a result, the arrangement of the first operation unit A400 can be brought closer to the player side, so that the effect of the effect of visually recognizing the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 316 (b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 arranged at the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged inside (lower side) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312. As a result, compared with the case where the support plate portion A313 is arranged outside the outer wall portion A312 while the arrangement of the outer wall portion A312 in the left and right center where the support plate portion A313 is not arranged is moved to the outer side (upper side). The upper end position of the rear case A310 can be lowered.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in disposing the back case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while increasing the degree of freedom in disposing the first operation unit A400 (or the second operation unit A700) with respect to the rear case A310.

In addition, as described above, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the upper part of the rear case A310 is arranged are located outside the game area in the front view, so that the support plate portion A313 is on the lower side of the outer wall portion A312. By arranging in, the influence (disadvantage) on the game can be suppressed to a small extent.

As shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the back case A310, unlike the left side, the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is omitted except for the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is arranged can be omitted below the upper end position, the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 is moved closer to the right end of the game board A13 by that amount. Can be done.

FIG. 318 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 in the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line of FIG. 302. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60 is a region inside the outer edge extending portion 60a as compared with the outer edge extending portion 60a extending to the back side along the outer edge, and is at least a gaming area. The front-rear width is formed shorter in the central overhanging portion 60b that projects toward the back surface in the region where a part of the front-rear overlaps.

Since the front end surface of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the back side end portion of the central overhanging portion 60b is arranged on the front side side rather than the back side end portion of the outer edge extending portion 60a. As a result, interference between the base plate A60 and the first operating unit A400 is avoided.

A recessed portion 60c that is recessed toward the front side is formed between the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b, and in the forming range of the recessed portion 60c, the base plate A60 is formed. It is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of the light passing through the base plate A60 can be made lower in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c than in the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b.

A center frame A86 is laid on the front side of the base plate A60, and the lining portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73 as shown in FIG. 318. This gap is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the recessed portion 60c in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the decrease in energy of light passing through the base plate A60 can be maintained even on the front side of the base plate A60.

The light whose energy reduction is suppressed is applied to the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73, and is used for the effect of illuminating the sphere. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of decrease in energy when the light used in the effect of irradiating the sphere with light passes through the game board A13 can be reduced, so that the light is weaker and more effective. It is possible to perform an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner side surface of the outer edge member A73 is arranged outward from the inner side surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60 in front view, the flow path of the sphere is concave. It can be easily arranged at a position where it overlaps with the setting portion 60c in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate-shaped member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. Thereby, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be configured to be integrally and mutually assisted from the viewpoint of rigidity.

Further, the light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased by utilizing the fact that when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light, the light is reflected by the metal. This locally enhanced light emission is generated at a position where the inner end portion (left end portion) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b can be visually recognized via the outer edge member A73. It can be limited to the formation range of 73b (see FIG. 308) (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when light is irradiated from the back surface side toward the entire upper and lower sides of the metal plate-shaped member 75, the portion where the light emission intensity is locally increased is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is possible to easily concentrate the line of sight of the player on the lottery unit A600 arranged to face the vertical wall portion 73b and the formation range of the flow path above the lottery unit A600.

319, 320, 321 and 322 are front views of the operating unit A300. In the description of FIGS. 319, 320, 321 and 322, the description of all the first operating units A400 and the plurality of first operating units A400 is described as five first operating units A400, A400A, A400B. It means A400C and A400D. Further, the first operating unit A400 may be described as a representative of the configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted in the five first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

FIG. 319 shows how all the first operating units A400 and the second operating unit A700 do not project to the third symbol display device 81 side and maintain the retracted state. In FIG. 320, all the first operating units are shown. It is shown that the operating unit A400 is excited to be in an overhanging state overhanging to the third symbol display device 81 side, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the retracted state.

FIG. 321 shows that all the first operation units A400 are maintained in the retracted state, and the second operation unit A700 is in the overhanging state so as to project toward the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 322 shows one. The first operating unit A400B, A400C of the unit is in the retracted state, the other first operating units A400, A400A, A400D are in the overhanging state, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the overhanging state. To.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 are formed in a color that stands out to the player in a range partitioned by the colored (ultramarine in this embodiment) cover member A591. In the present embodiment, the front cover A410 (with gold plating on the front surface) and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visible, and the edge of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side. The portions are arranged so as to be closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radiation spreading from the inside (center) to the outside of the third symbol display device 81, they serve as the center of the radiation. The line of sight of the player can be concentrated toward the inside of the third symbol display device 81.

Since the side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side is closest to the adjacent first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. 319, the side surface of the first displacement member A440 (next to it). The side surface including the side surface adjacent to the first displacement member A440) is chamfered so as to taper toward the tip side (the third symbol display device 81 side). This avoids interference with the adjacent first displacement member A440.

The starting point of chamfering is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, a straight line extended along the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. Chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection that intersects the straight line, but chamfering is done from just before the intersection. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide range in which the first displacement member A440 can be visually recognized while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400, the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range extending from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is arranged in the posture that becomes. Therefore, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in front view is compared with the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) is directed to the front side. It is possible to suppress the amount of displacement in the front view and to increase the visual change.

This configuration is effective when the range available for the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the overhanging state of the first operating unit A400, the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the overhanging position, while the first displacement member A440 is at the overhanging position (third symbol display device 81). It is placed at a position away from).

To be described in detail, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range extending from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and is a second displacement member. From the state of interfering with the movement locus of A490 (retracted state of the first operation unit A400), it is moved closer to the game board A13 side to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490, and is arranged on the front side of the second displacement member A490. The state changes to the state (extended state of the first operation unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 transmits light to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490 regardless of whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state. It is possible to produce a light emission effect. In particular, in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440, the light emitting mode of the elongated hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 can be switched. Is configured to be inducible, but details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the effect unit A710 is vertically movable toward the center side of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the second operation unit A700 includes a rotating body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the effect unit A710, and the rotation of the rotating body A720 executes a light emitting effect that causes light to travel in multiple directions. It is possible, but details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 322, since each of the plurality of first operating units A400 has an individual drive device, each of the first operating units A400 can independently change and maintain the state. That is, the combination of the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 322, and can be arbitrarily set.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is also possible to execute the state change in different first operation units A400 in order. For example, the state change can be executed in order from the first operation unit A400 in the lower left to the front view clockwise, or the state change can be executed in both directions from the third operation unit A400B in the clockwise direction from the lower left. You can also do it. In this way, various effects can be executed by using the first operation unit A400.

Further, for example, when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation units A400B and A400C, which is in the retracted state in FIG. 322, is arranged at the overhanging position so as to interfere with the second operation unit A700. Can put the first operating units A400B and A400C, which may interfere with the second operating unit A700, in the retracted state, and the other first operating units A400, A400A and A400D in the overhanging state. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the combination of the operation (state) of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 as compared with the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device. can.

FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged so that the gaming area can be effectively decorated. This will be described below.

First, when the game area is defined as the area where the ball passing between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, the section (ball launching unit) in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are arranged to face each other and guide the ball. The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating units A400 and A400A (from the lower left to the second) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 is arranged near the inner rail 61 (outer side). (It is not necessary to extend to the outer rail 62).

On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the region after the ball has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly, the region where the right-handed ball flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating units A400B and A400C (third and fourth from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is near the outer rail 62 (outer side). Is placed in.

Further, the outer frame of the game area in the region where the outer rail 62 is interrupted and the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right) arranged on the back surface side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner side surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. .. This is feasible because, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is omitted in the right middle abdomen of the rear case A310, and the right end portion of the rear case A310 is brought closer to the right end portion of the game board A13. It will be.

That is, by forming the internal region of the rear case A310 closer to the right end portion of the game board A13 in front view, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end portion of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path is arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path through which the ball hit to the right flows down (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, see FIG. 302). The first operation unit A400D can be arranged in such a manner that the outer end portion of the front cover A410 is arranged on the outer side (right side).

In other words, like a general right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not a symmetrical machine), the right-handed flow path is extremely narrower than the left-handed flow path, and is moved toward the right end of the game board A13. In the case of being arranged, the back surface of the gaming area is configured so that a movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be arranged right-justified in the internal area of the rear case A310 as in the present embodiment. Movable devices can be placed on the entire side.

On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in front view, and the line of sight of the player is concentrated up to this guide portion. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the back case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is optimal to dispose the support plate portion A313 on the left side of the back case A310 and omit the support plate portion A313 on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the game area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in a plurality of ways in FIG. 323, since the plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged in the game area, patterns and figures to be visually recognized by the player paying attention to the game area can be visually recognized through the game board A13. It can be composed of a plurality of front covers A410.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to decorate the game area by attaching a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13. Further, the area where the front cover A410 is arranged is configured so that the appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of the displacement members and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400, as described above. It is possible to increase the variation of the mode for decorating the game area as compared with the case where the sticker or the like is attached to the game board A13. The details of the change in appearance will be described later.

Since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305), it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated even if the structure is exposed or the drive device is arranged here. can.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operating units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 arranged between them is the first in such a manner that the adjacent first operating units A400 are connected to each other. 1 Fastened and fixed to the operating unit A400. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are coupled to each other to form an integrated structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operating unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operating unit A400. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reinforcing the above-mentioned rear case A310. , It is possible to avoid relying too much on the metal plate-shaped member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore, since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be lowered, the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be improved.

As a result, it is possible to easily design a shape that facilitates noise suppression and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12, which is the original function of the metal plate-shaped member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operating units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 toward the front side, and the second operating unit A700 is mounted on the rear case A310.

Each of the first operation units A400 is configured to be operable in a substantially common operation mode, and a plurality of the first operation units A400 are arranged so as to surround a part around the internal space of the rear case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operating unit A400 moves toward the center of the internal space of the rear case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the rear case A310). It is configured to move with.

Therefore, for example, since the influence given by gravity can change in each first operation unit A400, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without relying on gravity, but the details will be described later. do. As described above, since each of the first operating units A400 has a substantially common configuration, the first operating unit A400 arranged at the lower left will be described in detail, and the other first operating units A400 will be described. Omit.

325 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the region of the first operation unit A400 is a region of a substantially rectangular front view covered by the front cover A410, and the main body region A400b on which the light emission effect is mainly executed and the main body thereof. It is composed of an annexed area A400v attached to the end of the area A400b.

The side-by-side area A400v is not an area that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blindfold cover member A591 is laid on the central side that may be visible to the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, wiring, a connector, etc.) that is inevitably generated by an effect performed in the main body area A400b, not for the purpose of being visually recognized by a player, is provided. By arranging the main body region A400b, the main body region A400b can be used to the maximum extent for arranging the members assuming that the player can visually recognize the main body area A400b. That is, since it is possible to prevent the main body region A400b from being eroded by a configuration that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make full use of the area of the main body region A400b to arrange a large member.

FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. In addition, in FIG. 327 and FIG. 328, the state in which the front cover A410 is removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operating unit A400 includes a front unit FU including a front cover A410 and a first displacement member A440 displaceable so as to enter between the front cover A410 and the front cover A410. It mainly includes a rear unit BU arranged on the back surface side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 is composed of a thin plate bent into a U shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU, and is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. A plurality of through holes A412 formed at positions defined in relation to the front unit FU, and a guide portion A413 for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU are mainly provided.

With the above-described configuration, the front cover A410 has a function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU invisible to the player while making a specific area visible through the through hole A412, and a first displacement member of the front unit FU. It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the A440.

FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover A410. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A410 is arranged to face the effect central portion A411a so as to be laminated on the back side of the effect center portion A411a of the main body portion A411, and has the shape of the effect center portion A411a. A diffuser plate A415 formed of a light-transmitting resin material in a plate shape having a corresponding outer shape, and an LED arranged opposite to the diffuser plate A415 and having an optical axis directed toward the diffuser plate A415 (a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329). A substrate fixing plate which is arranged to face the illuminated substrate A416 on which the light emitting means A416a such as (shown in the figure) is arranged and the illuminated substrate A416, fixes the illuminated substrate A416, and is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU. Mainly equipped with A417.

Hereinafter, the configurations of the diffusion plate A415, the illuminated substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417, and the fact that the positional deviation is suppressed by the configurations will be described.

The diffuser plate A415 is supported by being sandwiched between the main body portion A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front-rear direction, instead of being fastened with a fastening screw or the like, and the shaft corresponding position A415a is arranged to face the light emitting means A416a on the back surface side. A wave pattern formed from ridges having a shape concentrically spreading around the center is formed, and is formed as a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a smaller diameter than the light emitting means. A plurality of small-diameter holes A415c and a plurality of projecting plate portions A415d projecting from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends to the back surface side in a plate shape are mainly provided.

The ridge forming a wave pattern on the back surface side of the diffuser plate A415 is made to advance in the radial direction of the circle centered on the axis corresponding position A415a by refracting the light emitted to the axis corresponding position A415a side. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis-corresponding position A415a side is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but vice versa. That is, it is formed so as to prevent the light incident on the position away from the axis corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference of the members, and in the present embodiment, the purpose is to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the illuminated board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. Is formed by.

The small diameter portion 415c is a position not facing the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 (a position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411) in order to make it difficult to see in front view, and is an insertion column of the substrate fixing plate A417. It is a through hole formed at a position corresponding to the portion A417f, and is used for positioning the diffusion plate A415, the illuminated substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417, and the details will be described later.

The projecting plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so that the diffusion plate A415 can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417. The protrusion plate portion A415d is formed with a protrusion length of about 4 mm and a width of about 10 mm as the upper limit, and has a certain degree of rigidity, so that a load generated during assembly or maintenance (for example, with other members) is formed. It is possible to prevent the projecting plate portion A415d from bending or breaking due to a load generated by collision, rubbing, etc., and the alignment function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffuser plate A415 has a wave pattern formed on the entire back surface side and can play a function of light diffusion in the entire area, but is clearly divided into a first region AC1 and a second region AC2 from the aspect of staging. That is, the first region AC1 is a region that overlaps with the illuminated substrate A416 in front view, and the second region AC2 is a region that does not overlap with the illuminated substrate A416 in front view.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illuminated substrate A416 passes through the first region AC1, and the player can visually recognize the first region AC1 in a strong light emitting mode as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second region AC2 corresponds to a region formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and corresponds to the region formed so as to protrude from the light emitting means A416a of the illuminated substrate A416. The optical axis does not pass, and the light from the light emitting means A416a weakens and arrives.

On the other hand, the second region AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of light emission in the light emission effect by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, which will be described in detail later.

The illuminated substrate A416 includes the above-mentioned light emitting means A416a, a recessed portion A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c drilled with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter penetration. A plurality of assembly fastening holes 416d arranged as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back surfaces to connect the ends of the wiring, and an electric wiring FC (this) that supplies electricity to the first displacement member A440. In the embodiment, it mainly includes an intermediate connector A416f to which a flat cable) is connected.

The light emitting means A416a is a position where the intensity of light visually recognized by the player is likely to be maximized, and in the present embodiment, the light emitting means A416a is preferentially arranged at a position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed and is aligned in the front-rear direction. To. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure the intensity of the light visually recognized by the player through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted into the through hole A417b for fastening and fixing the substrate fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large-diameter hole A416c is a through hole formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion column portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion column portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar portion A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the illuminated substrate A416 can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged along the upper and lower sides. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper through hole of the pair of through holes.

For example, as a maintenance measure, the main body A411 and the diffuser plate A415 are removed while the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the rear case A310, and the failed illumination board A416 is removed from the substrate fixing plate A417 to obtain a normal illumination board. The work of attaching the A416 to the substrate fixing plate A417 is assumed, but before the fastening and fixing, the illuminated substrate A416 is tilted forward by its own weight. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper through hole (the side where the displacement to the front side due to the forward tilt is large) in the pair of upper and lower through holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed by the fastening screw, the front is moved by its own weight. It is possible to return the posture in the backward tilting direction satisfactorily by the fastening screw even if it has fallen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the illuminated substrate A416 from being erroneously fixed when the maintenance is fastened and fixed.

It should be noted that, in the through hole on the lower side of the assembly fastening portion A416d, the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c projecting from the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417 is inserted to position the illuminated substrate A416 and to position the illuminated substrate A416. It has a function to temporarily fasten. That is, even before the fastening screw is fastened, the lower through hole is hooked on the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c, so that the illuminated substrate A416 can be prevented from falling by its own weight.

The connector A416e has a first connector A416e1 which is arranged on the front side and is connected to a wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting means A416a, and a wiring connected to a detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected and a third connector A416e3 to which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 arranged in the rear unit BU is connected.

In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, the second connector A416e2), or even if the mating member is movable, there is a sufficient distance between the connectors (1st connector A416e1 and 2nd connector A416e2). For the reason of the third connector A416e3), it can be arranged at an arbitrary position. In the present embodiment, the position corresponding to the lower end portion of the illuminated substrate A416 and included in the side-by-side area A400v is located so that interference with other members is unlikely to occur and there is no risk of being visually recognized by the player. Have been placed.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring sandwiches the substrate fixing plate A417 and is a region on the opposite side of the illuminated substrate A416 (the substrate fixing plate A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (FIG. Since it is configured to displace the gap (gap formed between) and the connector (see 335), the distance between the connectors (front-back distance) becomes short. May be given.

In the present embodiment, unlike the connector A416e in which the wiring direction may be any direction (in the present embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the posture of the intermediate connector A416f is set to the first position of the front unit FU. Along the direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the displacement member A440, and the stretchable (flat cable band extends, easily bendable, and less likely to break) direction of the electrical wiring FC. It is set.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a main body portion A417a whose front side is opened and is formed in a box shape capable of accommodating the illuminated substrate A416, and a ridge portion on the back side of the main body portion A417a for receiving a fastening portion of the front unit FU. Then, from a plane common to the plurality of through holes A417b in which the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion can be inserted, the fastening portion into which the fastening screw is screwed, and the tip surface of the fastening portion, to the front side. A plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c composed of a set of small-diameter columnar portions to be projected are provided.

Further, the main body portion A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 is parallel to the plate-shaped deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c and the deep-bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1, and the front surface is the substrate fastening portion A417c. A shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 formed on the same plane as the tip surface of the fastening portion of the above.

That is, the back surface of the illuminated substrate A416 can be surface-supported by the tip surface of the fastening portion of the plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c and the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharp overhanging portion A417d having a sharp tip protruding from the deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 toward the front side, and a vertical width of the sharp overhanging portion A417d at the lower left of the sharp overhanging portion A417d. It is provided with an insertion hole A417e formed in a rectangular shape having the same width.

The sharp overhanging portion A417d is arranged at the lower left of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross section in such a manner that a space of about the thickness of the electric wiring FC, which is a flat cable, is provided between the sharp overhanging portion A417d and the illuminated substrate A416. It is formed as a linearly extending ridge of shape, and the extending direction of the ridge intersects (orthogonally) the direction A416x in a front view. Then, the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e, so that the electrical wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f has the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp overhanging portion A417d. It is sandwiched between.

In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp overhanging portion A417d, the portion where the electric wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is located in the intermediate connector A416f. It is possible to shift from the end position of the electric wiring FC to be connected to the position sandwiched between the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp overhanging portion A417d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from falling off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f projecting in a columnar shape from the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 to the front side at positions corresponding to the large-diameter holes A416c, the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2, and the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion thereof. A plurality of through holes A417g formed through the boundary between A417a2 and the deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 and a side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body portion A417a to the front side can accept the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415. A plurality of notches A417h formed in width and a plurality of projecting pieces A417i projecting inward of the main body A417a along the front side end portion of the side wall A417a3 formed diagonally on the right side of the front view. And.

The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter hole A416c of the illuminated substrate A416c and exceeds the thickness of the illuminated substrate A416, and is a large diameter base projecting from the flat surface formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. And a small-diameter tip that projects from the tip of the large-diameter base with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

As a result, the illumination substrate A416 can be aligned and the diffuser plate A415 can be surface-supported at the large diameter base portion, and the diffuser plate A415 can be aligned at the small diameter tip portion. That is, the diffusion plate A415 is aligned at the small diameter tip portion and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large diameter base portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the posture of the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced even though it is not directly fastened and fixed.

The through hole A417g has a function of forming an air passage and suppressing heat generation of the illuminated substrate A416. In the present embodiment, the diffusion plate A415 is arranged so as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the illuminated substrate A416, and it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side. Is forming. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat generation of the illuminated substrate A416 without reducing the effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The notch portion A417h receives the projecting plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and engages in the direction along the side wall A417a3. As a result, even if the small-diameter tip of the insertion column A417f is broken due to deterioration over time, or the small-diameter tip is dropped due to manufacturing defects, the diffusion plate A415 projects from the substrate fixing plate A417. It is possible to prevent the plate portion A415d from being displaced in the longitudinal direction (the direction along the forming direction of the side wall A417a3, the upper right direction). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the diffuser plate A415 from being displaced in the support mode in which the diffuser plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above.

The projecting piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape so that the illuminated substrate A416 can enter between the projecting piece A417i and the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2. In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the projecting piece A417i is formed with a projecting length that interferes with the illuminated substrate A416 in front view, and the projecting piece A417i is downward (obliquely downward) from the side wall A417a3. ), So even if the illuminated board A416 receives a load in the direction of tilting forward due to gravity etc., this projecting piece A417i is on the tilted tip side (upper right side) of the illuminated board A416. Is locked (stopped from the front side), so that it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate A416 from tipping forward.

The projecting piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operating unit A300, and regulates the displacement of the illuminated substrate A416 toward the front side (suppresses fluttering). Therefore, the illuminated substrate A416 can be stably fixed while omitting the arrangement of the fastening screw inside the internal space of the operating unit A300. As a result, while avoiding the reduction of the light emitting effect due to the arrangement of the fastening screw inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, which tends to attract the attention of the player (due to the shadow caused by the fastening screw), The illuminated substrate A416 can be stably fixed to the substrate fixing plate A417.

When assembling the illuminated board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, insert the right edge of the illuminated board A416 diagonally between the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 and the projecting piece A417i, and insert it all the way to the tip. The illumination board A416 can be smoothly assembled by pushing it backward from the starting point. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

FIG. 331 (a) is a front view of the illuminated circuit board A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417, and FIG. 331 (b) shows the illuminated circuit board A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417 in the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line of FIG. 331 (a). FIG. 332 (a) is a cross-sectional view, FIG. 332 (a) is a front view of the illuminated circuit board A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the substrate fixing plate A417.

FIGS. 331 (a) and 331 (b) show a state in which the illuminated substrate A416 is inserted into the substrate fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332 (a) and 332 (b) show the illuminated substrate A416. Is shown in the state of being assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417.

The illuminated substrate A416 includes chamfered portions A416g and A416h chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate main body. The formation mode of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent notch portion A417h. That is, the length of the illuminated substrate A416 to the notch A417h at the lower end is shorter than the length of the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417. The second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed to have a shorter distance from the right side of the illuminated substrate A416 than the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end.

In FIG. 331, a state in which the illuminated substrate A416 is displaced upward along the inclination of the left side of the substrate fixing plate A417 is shown as compared with the state shown in FIG. 332. The degree of this displacement is limited to the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A416g and the upper side surface of the substrate fixing plate A417, and in the state of FIG. 331, the first chamfered portion A416g. The edge portion of is inserted into the gap formed by the notch portion A417h.

Contrary to the state shown in FIG. 331, when the illuminated substrate A416 is displaced downward, the upper limit is the length of the space formed between the second chamfered portion A416h and the lower surface of the substrate fixing plate A417. The illuminated substrate A416 can be displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 332, and the edge portion of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch portion A417h in the downwardly displaced state.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the illuminated substrate A416 in this way, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the position of the illuminated substrate A416 when the illuminated substrate A416 is inserted into the substrate fixing plate A417. That is, even if the right side of the illuminated substrate A416 and the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 do not have a positional relationship as shown in FIG. 332, the illuminated substrate A416 is fixed to the substrate by allowing a slight vertical deviation. It can be inserted into the plate A417. As a result, the illuminated substrate A416 can be easily inserted into the substrate fixing plate A417.

In order to change from the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the illuminated substrate A416 may be tilted so as to be close to the substrate fixing plate A417 with the right side thereof as the tilting axis. At this time, as shown in FIG. 331, as can be seen from the fact that the insertion column portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417 is visible through the large diameter hole A416c of the illuminated substrate A416, the tapered insertion column portion A417f (FIG. 329). By guiding the large-diameter hole 417c (see), the vertical misalignment of the illuminated substrate A416 is corrected, and the position is within the state shown in FIG. 332. Therefore, since the vertical deviation of the illuminated substrate A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the illuminated substrate A416, the illuminated substrate A416 can be easily assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417.

The protrusion plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h in the assembled state (see FIG. 325) to fill the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, while providing the notch A417h with a function of widening the gap at the time of assembling the illuminated substrate A416, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate A416 is maintained by filling the gap after the assembled state. It can have a function.

As shown in FIG. 332 (b), in a state where the illuminated substrate A416 is assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417, the projecting piece A417i projects to the front side of the illuminated substrate A416 to prevent the illuminated substrate A416 from coming off. Since they interfere with each other, it is possible to prevent the right side of the illuminated substrate A416 from falling off from the substrate fixing plate A417.

By preventing the illuminated substrate A416 from falling off by such a retaining structure, in the present embodiment, the substrate fastening portion A417c is configured not to be arranged near the right side of the illuminated substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417. (The placement of the fastening screws is omitted). As a result, it is possible to secure an arrangement region of the light emitting means A416a near the right side of the illuminated substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417, and it is possible to prevent shadows from being generated by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect in the vicinity of the right side of the illuminated substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417.

When the illuminated substrate A416 becomes defective and the maintenance work for replacing the illuminated substrate A416 is performed, the illuminated substrate A416 is attached to the substrate fixing plate A417 from the state shown in FIG. 332 (b) as shown in FIG. 331 (b). Need to tilt. At this time, since the illuminated substrate A416 is surrounded by the substrate fixing plate A417, it is difficult to directly tilt the illuminated substrate A416. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and the illumination board A416 can be easily attached by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 toward the front. It can be tilted with respect to the board fixing plate A417.

Further, since the first connector A416e1 is arranged at a position opposite to the right end portion (the end portion facing the side wall A417a3) which is the starting point of the posture change of the illuminated substrate A416, the first connector A416e1 is arranged. The illumination board A416 can be efficiently rotationally displaced by the load applied to the wiring connected to the A416e1. In other words, the moment of the force applied to the illuminated circuit board A416 due to the load applied to the wiring can be increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent an extra (excessive) load from being applied to the illuminated circuit board A416 and the wiring during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and FIG. 334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and the front unit FU is fixed to the opened front side with a lid. That is, the second displacement member A490 arranged on the front side of the rear unit BU is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, the drive device arranged in each first operation unit A400 is only one drive motor AMT1. By transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, the movable effect of the first operation unit A400 is executed.

In the present embodiment, the units that can be disassembled as a unit are merely referred to as a front unit FU and a rear unit BU, and when a movable effect is executed, the front unit FU and the rear unit BU are configured. Do not work independently, but work in relation to each other. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the rear unit BU.

FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400. be. That is, FIGS. 335 and B11 are exploded perspective views of the first operating unit A400 with the front cover A410 removed. In addition, in FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, the illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 is a support plate formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting and colorless (black in this embodiment) resin material as constituting the front unit FU. The first displacement member A440 is arranged on the front side of the support plate portion A420 with a gap that allows advancing and retreating, and is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420. The first displacement member A440 and its first displacement member A440, which are guided by the gap between the guide plate portion A430 and the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420 to advance and retreat (slide displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344). 1 The slide link A450, which is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the displacement member A440 and is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, the drive motor AMT1 to be fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and the drive motor AMT1 thereof. It mainly includes a drive gear AMG1 that is fastened and fixed to the drive motor AMT1.

Further, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the rear unit BU, and is meshed with the drive gear AMG1 and the transmission gear group A460 in which each component rotates with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1 and its transmission. A support box portion A470 that rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed in a box shape with the front side open from a light-transmitting colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a light-transmitting and colorless support box portion A470. A rear plate portion A480 formed of a resin material, arranged with a gap on the back side of the support box portion A470 and fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a gap (support) formed on the front side of the support box portion A470. A second displacement member A490 that advances and retreats (rotational displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) in the gap between the plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470, and the drive motor AMT1 in the second displacement member A490. It is a rack and pinion mechanism that transmits a driving force, and mainly includes a rack and pinion A510 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the support box portion A470.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a plate-shaped portion (support plate portion A420, bottom portion of the support box portion A470) arranged on the back surface side thereof, and the transmission mechanism is on the back surface side. It has a common configuration in which (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are arranged, and both the slide link A450 and the second displacement member A490 are provided in the gap between the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. Displaced.

That is, the first displacement member A440 on the front side has a configuration in which the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are arranged in the front and rear so as to be easy to be bulky in the front and rear with the plate-shaped portion interposed therebetween. Compared with the case where the slide link A450 as the transmission mechanism of the above and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in the front and rear independent gaps, the arrangement of the plate member for forming the independent gaps is omitted. Therefore, the front-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, another effect mechanism unit can be arranged in the front-rear gap that can be formed by the amount that the front-rear width can be suppressed, so that the effect of the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes a first displacement member A440 and a second displacement member A490 having different displacement modes, and the configurations required for the respective displacements are partially different. The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be described, and the remaining configurations required for the displacement of the second displacement member A490 will be described later.

The support plate portion A420 is a portion that constitutes the framework of the first operation unit A400 and guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A part A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 formed through as long holes extending in parallel with the direction A416x, a punched hole A423 provided as a similar long hole in one of the guide holes A422, and parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide protrusions A424 projecting to the front side as ridges, and a main body plate part A421 that is recessed along the direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate part A421 so that the concave end portion faces the front side. A recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the right edge portion of the above, a detection sensor A426 for detecting that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an initial position, and a cover of the slide link A450. A cylinder with a circular cross-section that can support the shaft support hole A452 from the main body plate A421 to the back side at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the shaft support A427 protruding from the main body plate A421 to the back side and the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 that are projected in a shape.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and a plurality of second guide holes A422b that guide the displacement of the guided projecting portion A455c of the slide link A450.

The withdrawal hole A423 is a through hole for the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 to pass toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d is a coil spring ASP1 in a state of projecting to the front side of the main body plate portion A421. Lock (hook) the end of the.

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) to the lower left corner of the main body plate A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

The guide ridge A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electric wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, and the details will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor that is arranged so that it can be determined that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but detects the position of the detected plate portion A455e of the slide link A450.

In the present embodiment, the sensor arranged for determining the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are located at the overhanging position. The arrangement of the detection sensor for determining that the sensor has been arranged is omitted.

As a result, while it is possible to reduce the member cost and create a space for arranging other displacement members, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already arranged at the overhanging positions. Nevertheless, it is assumed that problems such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping may occur. On the other hand, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, measures are taken to prevent an overload from occurring at a portion related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and to maintain the arrangement of the first displacement member A440. However, the details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 is projected in a cylindrical shape formed with an inner diameter of approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and the tip of the protrusion is projected with a slight gap in the transmission gear. It is arranged to face group A460. That is, the retaining cylinder portion A428 has a function of suppressing the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side falling direction.

In this embodiment, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, as long as the screw does not loosen or fall off, it is possible to restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side falling direction by the screw. As described above, in the present embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylinder portion A428 are configured to suppress the retaining of the transmission gear A461 in two stages, so that the transmission gear A461 is sure to fall off the shaft. Can be prevented.

The guide plate portion A430 has a plate-shaped main body plate portion A431 whose right side edge is parallel to the right side edge of the main body plate portion A421 and is arranged so as to face each other along a plane parallel to the surface formed by the main body plate portion A421. A plurality of elongated recesses A432 recessed in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x on the back surface side of the main body plate portion A431, and toward the lower left along the direction A416x toward the right edge in front of the main body plate portion A431. Corresponds to the width of the inclined surface A433 and the recessed portion A425 of the support plate portion A420, which are formed to be inclined toward the front side and can assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear lid portion 443). Mainly includes a guide plate portion A434 formed in the shape of a long plate along the direction A416x with a width thereof.

The main body plate portion A431 includes a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a into which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion. Since the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by a surface (side) on the side wall portion A421a raised from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420 to the front side, the left side portion of the main body plate portion A431 is supported. The guide plate portion A430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420 while the insertion hole portion A431a arranged at the edge portion is used at one place.

Further, in the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431 as a position where the first displacement member A440 passes through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 moves forward and backward, the insertion hole portion A431a is arranged only at a substantially central position of the vertical width. Compared with the case where the insertion hole portion A431a is arranged at an unbalanced position, the deviation of the distance between the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion. At the same time, the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement member A440 can be improved as compared with the case where a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a are arranged.

The long recess A432 is a recess that guides the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement stop protrusion A441e is displaced, and is the displaceable length of the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440. It is recessed with a length approximately equal to that of the above. That is, the first displacement member A440 is guided not only on the back surface side by the guide hole A422 of the support plate portion A420 but also on the front surface side by the long recess A432.

The guide plate portion A434 includes a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged on the right edge side at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable, and between the claw portions A434a. The electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap and temporarily fixed. By this. One end of the deflection displacement of the electric wiring FC that bends and displaces due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be set to the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electric wiring FC to the left of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized. ..

Therefore, since the electric wiring FC composed of the flat cable can be maintained in a state of being close enough to be in contact with the guide plate portion A434, the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434. However, when the electric wiring FC is also displaced in the same manner (see FIG. 346), it is possible to prevent the first displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC from interfering with each other. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. In addition, in FIG. 338, for convenience of explanation, it is shown in a direction different from that in FIG. 336.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 is colored with the guided plate portion A441 which is a plate-shaped portion guided between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430 along the direction A416x. It is a plate-shaped portion that is formed of a light-impermeable resin material (which is plated with gold in this embodiment), is pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and is displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441. It is formed in a plate shape from a rear lid portion 443 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the interlocking plate portion A442 and the interlocking plate portion A442 to form a gap between the interlocking plate portion A442 and a colorless light-transmitting resin material. The diffuser plate A444 is arranged to face the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the diffuser plate A444 is arranged to face the back side of the diffuser plate A444 to have an outer shape substantially equivalent to the outer shape of the diffuser plate A444, and is arranged to face the rear lid portion 443. Mainly includes an illuminated substrate A445.

Here, the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the illuminated substrate A445 are fixed together, and these will be described first. That is, the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffuser plate A444 are positioned with each other by inserting the plurality of positioning pins A442a projecting from the back surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 into the plurality of insertion holes A444a of the diffuser plate A444, and the diffuser plate A444 is positioned. The diffusion plate A444 and the illuminated substrate A445 are positioned with each other by inserting the plurality of positioning pins A444b projecting from the back surface of the lamp into the plurality of insertion holes A445a of the illuminated substrate A445.

Then, the fastening screws that have passed through the plurality of insertion holes 443a of the rear lid portion 443 are fastened and fixed to the plurality of screwed portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442, whereby the diffusion plate is formed between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the rear lid portion 443. The A444 and the illuminated substrate A445 are held in such a manner as to allow displacement (displacement less than the height of the positioning pin) to such an extent that the positioning pins A442a and A444b do not fall off. As a result, the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screw into the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445.

In this embodiment, a plurality of protruding ribs 443b projecting toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 abut against the illuminated substrate A445 and press against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship that causes a load. By this pressing force, the diffusion plate A444 and the illuminated substrate A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illuminated substrate A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as an LED (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed toward the diffuser plate A444 on the front side.

The diffuser plate A444 has a wave pattern formed from ridges having a shape concentrically spreading around the axis corresponding position A444c arranged opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back surface side, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is the interlocking plate portion. It is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of A442.

On the front side of the diffusion plate A444, a fitting portion A444d is formed so as to project to the front side with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the fitting portion A444d is fitted into the opening A442c in the assembled state. Is done.

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be visually recognized by the player as the light that has passed through the opening A442c among the light that has passed through the diffuser plate A444.

The illuminated board A445 is provided on the back side and includes a connector A445c to which an electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable is connected. The electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442. Thereby, the bending position of the electric wiring FC can be configured on the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of bending can be made gentle.

The rear lid portion 443 is provided alongside a ventilation opening 443c formed at a position corresponding to the connector A445c and a circuit configuration device (capacitor, resistor, etc.) (not shown) in the direction A416x with respect to the ventilation opening 416c. A through hole A443d formed through is provided.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c will be arranged in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electrical wiring FC is routed to the back side of the rear lid portion 443 through the through hole A443d. .. As a result, the electric wiring FC can be sandwiched between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d and the illuminated substrate A445, so that electricity can be obtained between the connector A445c and the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e. It is possible to prevent the wiring FC from being displaced. The through hole A443d also has a role of forming a space for arranging the electric wiring FC, and the electric wiring FC is compared with the case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x. The load applied to the can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e is formed so as to project toward the illuminated substrate A445 side in the same manner as the projecting rib 443b. Therefore, the distance between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e and the illuminated substrate A445 is narrowed. From such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point where the load is applied from the rear lid portion 443 to the illuminated substrate A445. That is, only the projecting rib 443b and the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the illuminated substrate A445.

Thereby, even when the electric wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from being disconnected from the connector A445c.

Next, the connection mode between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and the details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 includes a support shaft portion A442d projecting in an outer circular shape, a shafted support hole A442e which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and a central shaft of the support shaft portion A442d. A roller member A442f, which is a resin member pivotally supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 so as to be rotatable around a parallel axis and is formed in an outer circular shape, is provided.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b projecting in an outer circular shape from an upper end portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and a support shaft portion A441b thereof. A shafted support hole A441c formed at the lower end of the main body plate A441a in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft A441b, and a long straight line from the front to the front side of the main body plate A441a. A plurality of guide protrusions A441d to be projected, a plurality of displacement stop protrusions A441e to be projected toward the front side in a long shape along a direction intersecting (orthogonal) with the guide protrusions A441, and electricity. An inclined surface A441f that inclines toward the outside (lower left side) toward the front side at a position facing the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative substrate A445, and a direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide grooves A441g formed as small diameter grooves along the main body plate portion A441g, a recessed portion A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right side edge portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and fastened to the back surface side of the main body plate portion A441a. A fastening portion A441i, which is projected so as to be able to fasten a screw, is provided.

The support shaft portion A441b and the shafted support hole A441c are used for connecting to the interlocking plate portion A442. As an assembly method, after arranging the interlocking plate portion A442 so that the shafted support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged in the axial shape of the support shaft portion A441b, the interlocking plate portion A442 is covered along the shaft. By moving it with respect to the guide plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A441b can be inserted into the shaft support hole A442e, and the support shaft portion A442d can be inserted into the shaft support hole A441c to form a shaft support state. The shaft-mounted support hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, and the shaft-mounted support hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured to have dimensions such that a slight gap is formed between them so as to be rotatable.

In this embodiment, after the shaft support state of the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 is configured by the above method, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b, and the screw is fixed. By making the diameter of the head of the shaft larger than the inner diameter of the shafted support hole A442e, it is possible to prevent the interlocking plate portion A442 from coming off from the guided plate portion A441.

The guide ridge portion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement stop protrusion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the long recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the long recess A432 in the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 324). It is formed by the protrusion length.

The formation position of the displacement stop protrusion A441e is designed so that the displacement stop protrusion A441e is arranged at the end of the long recess A432 in the long direction when the guided plate portion A441 is arranged at the displacement end. Will be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not stop normally at the displacement end, the displacement of the guided plate portion A441 is restricted by locking the displacement stop protrusion A441e with the long recess A432. be able to.

The inclined surface A441f is a plane for receiving and guiding the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the illuminated board A445. By forming it in an inclined manner, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. The mode of bending of the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A424 of the support plate portion A420, is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A424, and has a cross section half from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove. It has an overhanging part that overhangs in a circle. The distance between the tips of the overhanging portions is slightly longer than the thickness of the guide ridge A424. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated between the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A424 while suppressing the extension direction of the guide groove A441g from deviating from the long direction of the guide ridge A424.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion recessed in order to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole portion A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 can be arranged on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), and is connected to the displacement side elongated hole A453 of the slide link A450. That is, the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, so that the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

It will be described back to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336. The slide link A450 is a long link A451 rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420, and a deformed slide member connected to the long link A451 and supported so as to be translateable along the direction A416x. A455 and.

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and has a shafted support hole A452 formed with a diameter capable of inserting the shaft support portion A427 and a long side with the shafted support hole A452 as a reference. Displacement side long hole A453 drilled at the end in a long hole shape along the long direction, and long hole shape along the long direction at the opposite end on the side where the displacement side long hole A453 is arranged. The transmission side elongated hole A454, which is bored in the above, is provided.

The deformed slide member A455 is arranged in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 recessed on the front side of the base end surface on which the shaft support portion A427 of the support plate portion A420 is projected, and is arranged in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 and the long link A451. A plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the two, and a transmission protruding portion A455b that is projected in an outer circular shape toward the back surface side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the transmission side elongated hole A454 of the long link A451. A plurality of guided projecting portions A455c that are projected in an outer circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the second guide hole A422b of the support plate portion A420, and the tip toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a. The spring hooking portion A455d, which is projected like a hook and is inserted into the extraction hole A423 of the support plate portion A420, and the end portion of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked), and the thinness that allows entry into the detection gap of the detection sensor A426. The plate-shaped detected plate portion A455e and the modified transmitted portion A456 to which the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460 are provided.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470, and a pair of transmission gears A461 in which one gear is meshed with the drive gear AMG1 and a pair of transmission gears A461. On the other hand, it includes a pinned gear A462 meshed on the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1 and an in-phase member A465 that follows the pinned gear A462 in phase.

The pinned gear A462 has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission protrusion A463 protruding from the eccentric position toward the front side in an outer circular shape and the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end. It includes an arc wall portion A464 formed as a wall portion.

The arc wall portion A464 has a center angle of about 230 degrees, and the formation length toward the front side is shorter than that of the transmission protrusion portion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, both the transmission protrusion A463 and the arc wall portion A464 are portions that transmit the load to the deformed transmission portion A456, but the load generation location is different in the front-rear direction. That is, the position where the load is generated via the transmission protrusion A463 (the intermediate point or the average point when the load is generated at a plurality of points) is on the front side as compared with the position where the load is generated via the arc wall portion A464. Will be. Since the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be described by the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

339 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339 (c) is the first operation on the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the unit A400.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 339 (a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A461 and the electrical wiring FC are not shown, and the gear with a pin is omitted. For A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arc wall portion A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339 (c), the front cover A410 is shown by an imaginary line. Further, in FIGS. 339 (a) and 339 (b), the illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless otherwise specified. The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

FIGS. 339 (a) to 339 (c) show a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position before excitation of the drive motor AMT1. In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is arranged on the outermost side (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is the shortest. Therefore, the urging force loaded on the deformed slide member A455 from the coil spring ASP1. Will be the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pinned gear A462, and is rearward from the main body plate portion A455a on the overhanging position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463. The protrusion plate portion A456a projecting to the side in a plate shape and the protrusion plate portion A456a facing the protrusion plate portion A456a at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side. It is provided with an opposed arrangement portion A456b to be formed, and an insertion gap A456c formed between the projecting plate portions A456a and the facing arrangement portion A456b.

The protrusion length of the protrusion plate portion A456a is formed longer than the length of the facing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), with respect to the transmission protrusion portion A463 and the arc wall portion A464. It is possible to make contact in the direction of movement.

The facing arrangement portion A456b is made to be in contact with the transmission protrusion A463a in the moving direction (overlap), while is not in contact with the arc wall portion A464 in the moving direction (does not overlap). That is, the facing arrangement portion A456b and the arc wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship in which a front-rear gap is generated.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to accept the transmission protrusion A463, and a relief portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed on the open end side. With this relief portion A456d, the advance / retreat displacement of the transmission protrusion A463 with respect to the insertion gap A456c can be smoothly performed (with low resistance).

In FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A461 is not shown, but in the actual assembled state (see FIG. 324), the pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears having the same shape, have the drive gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462. The driving force of the driving gear AMG1 is transmitted to the pinned gear A462.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the first displacement member A440 guided by the first guide hole A422a and the deformed slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b are connected by the long link A451. .. That is, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x by the long link A451 that is rotationally displaced about the shaft support portion A427.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the detected plate portion A455e has entered the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 339 (c), in the first displacement member A440, the roller member A442f is arranged between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, and the roller member A442f is arranged. Since the arrangement of the A442f is restricted between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the interlocking plate portion A442 becomes the shaft support hole with the slide displacement of the guided plate portion A441. It is configured to rotate from A442e as a starting point. An action diagram for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in time series will be described.

340 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340 (c) is a first operation on the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the unit A400.

In FIGS. 340 (a) to 340 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excitedally rotated, the roller member A442f is positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG. 339 (c), and the guide wall portion of the support box portion A470. The state of contact with the bent corner portion of A471b is illustrated.

From the state of FIG. 339 to the displacement of the state of FIG. 340, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the first angle d1 from the initial angle d0. Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and displaces, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 340 (b)).

In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x at the initial angle d0, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is tilted by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (only 10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). It may be formed as a straight line (tilted). In this case, the section from the initial angle d0 to 10 degrees can be configured as a section in which a load in the traveling direction is not applied to the projecting plate portion A456a, so that excessive drive resistance occurs immediately after the start of rotation. It can be avoided.

That is, a section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0, the projecting plate portion A456a can be pushed vigorously, so that the drive resistance can be increased. It can be suppressed. Further, when driving in the direction of returning to the initial angle d0, a section for 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

341 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341 (c) is a first operation on the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the unit A400.

FIGS. 341 (a) to 341 (c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the gear A462 with a pin is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 341, the gear A462 with a pin is rotated by a second angle d2 from the initial angle d0. Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and displaces, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 341 (b)).

342 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the unit A400.

FIGS. 342 (a) to 342 (c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the long direction of the long link A451 is substantially orthogonal to the direction A416x.

From the state of FIG. 339 to the displacement of the state of FIG. 342, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the third angle d3 from the initial angle d0. Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and displaces, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 342 (b)).

In this embodiment, in a state where the first displacement member A440 starts sliding along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455. Since (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) is configured to be substantially orthogonal to each other, the slide displacement in one direction (same plane) of the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly executed.

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement side elongated hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is on one side (lower side in this embodiment) with respect to the displacement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the deformed slide member A455. Can be limited. As a result, during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440, the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, as compared with the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed. It is possible to suppress the rattling of the slide displacement of.

343 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the unit A400.

In FIGS. 343 (a) to 343 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is displaced from the state of FIG. 342 (c) to the overhang position of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 344 (c)). ) Is shown in the state of being arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement until reaching the state of.

From the state of FIG. 339 to the displacement of the state of FIG. 343, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and displaces, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 343 (b)).

344 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the unit A400.

In FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (c), a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhang position (also referred to as an overhang state) is shown.

From the state of FIG. 339 to the displacement of the state of FIG. 344, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the fifth angle d5 from the initial angle d0. Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and displaces, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 344 (b)).

When the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 begins to be displaced in the opposite direction to the direction A416x. Here, since the arc wall portion A464 and the protrusion plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship in which they abut in the direction A416x, the arc wall portion A464 even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the protrusion plate portion A456a. Is in contact with the projecting plate portion A456a, and the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted.

The contact points between the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a are arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the load applied from the projecting plate portion A456a to the arc wall portion A464 is configured to pass through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462, the pinned gear A462 rotates due to the load from the projecting plate portion A456a. Can be prevented.

Further, since the arc wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, the contact area can be line contact. Is 0). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344 (theoretically, it is set to 0). Therefore, it is possible to avoid requiring an extra driving force for regulating the displacement of the deformed slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the pinned gear A462.

In addition, in reality, if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is taken into consideration, the contact area increases over time, and the space between the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is increased. It is considered that the frictional force generated in the above is increased. On the other hand, a low friction seal may be attached to the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a, or a lubricating material (grease or the like) may be applied to take measures. In the present embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed to be small, the area that needs to be dealt with by a low friction seal or a lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 344 (b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. It can be difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the protrusion A463 to the contact state with the arc wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the deformed transmission portion A456.

From the state of FIG. 339 to the displacement of the state of FIG. 345, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) from the initial angle d0 (see FIG. 360). After the state of FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protrusion plate portion A456a and is displaced without contact with other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protrusion plate portion A456a is restricted in displacement by coming into contact with the arc wall portion A464, and is maintained in the state of FIG. 344 (b) (displacement in the return direction is regulated). ). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission portion A456 is the position on the overhanging position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the place where the load is applied to the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) and the place where the load is applied to the deformed transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345 are different. As a result, even if the pinned gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and an overload occurs on the transmission protrusion A463 or the deformed transmission portion A456, it is possible to prevent the shape of the insertion gap A456c from changing. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is affected after the overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the deformed slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction). Since the deformed slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the moving range in this direction, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463.

In this way, the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 can be softened by the elastic deformation (deflection or expansion / contraction) of the facing arrangement portion A456b while avoiding the displacement of the deformed slide member A455.

As shown in FIG. 345, the portion where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts is the side wall of the facing arrangement portion A456b on the side of the detected plate portion A455e, and the transmission protrusion A463 applies a load to the detected plate portion A455e by contact. ing. In the present embodiment, when the deformed transmitted portion A456 is overloaded due to the overrotation of the pinned gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially broken. That is, the detected plate portion A455e is more vulnerable than the transmission protrusion A463.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load due to the over-rotation of the pinned gear A462 from destroying the structure of the deformed transmitted portion A456 that is related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455. Therefore, the durability of the deformed slide member A455 can be improved.

When the detected plate portion A455e is broken, the detected plate portion A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position. , It is possible to assume the possibility that the pinned gear A462 has over-rotated, and it is possible to carry out timely maintenance.

The design mode of the detected plate portion A455e is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the transmission protrusion A463 abuts on the deformed transmitted portion A456 in each series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, and is controlled to excite the drive motor AMT1 until a slight load is applied, and fatigue fracture occurs due to long-term use. The plate portion A455e to be detected may be designed to break due to the accumulation of a load having the same number of contact times as the durable operation number of the portion where the displacement is likely to occur (for example, the transmission protrusion A463). In this case, in addition to being able to assume the possibility of over-rotation of the pinned gear A462, it is possible to notify the replacement time of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be executed.

346 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 in the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of FIG. 339 (a), and FIG. 346 (b) is a first operation in the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of FIG. 344 (a). It is sectional drawing of the unit A400. In FIG. 346 (a), the state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (also referred to as the retracted state) is shown, and in FIG. ) Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346 (a) and 346 (b), an electric wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to the connector A445c of the first displacement member A440. The electrical wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is formed so as not to come into contact with the electric wiring FC. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is retracted to a position slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440) (to the side away from the first displacement member A440). It is formed at the displacement position), and the distance between the inclined surface A441f and the electric wiring FC can be secured.

The electric wiring FC is retracted from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440, while is arranged so as to enter the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. Displacement. As a result, the space VE, which will be described later, can be shared as the space for the electric wiring FC to enter and the space for the second displacement member A490 to enter, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electric wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back surface side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding means for shielding the view to the electric wiring FC, and it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from being visually recognized from the front-back and left-right directions. Space VE will be described.

In the space VE, when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, the surface on the side to be visually recognized by the player (the surface on which the opening A442c on the interlocking plate portion A442 side is formed) is inclined toward the third symbol display device 81 side. It is the space behind that is formed in association with being composed of. In this way, the space VE is configured with the first displacement member A440 being formed in a plate shape and the first displacement member A440 in an inclined posture that is easy for the player to see in the retracted state in which the first displacement member A440 is in a wide posture in the front-rear direction. It is easily formed by.

On the other hand, since this space VE is also a space in which the second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters due to displacement, it is preferable that the view in the front view can be widely maintained in consideration of the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view in the front view expands at an angle centered on the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outer shell of the space VE is formed so as to incline toward the back side toward the third symbol display device 81. In the embodiment, for ease of manufacture, the outer shell of the space VE (the boundary surface on the side far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed by a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space VE generated for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as a region for loosening and arranging the wiring. As a result, when the loosened portion of the electrical wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the overhanging position, the area required for loosening the wiring (in other words, in other words). It is not necessary to secure the area between the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 and the first displacement member A440).

Therefore, the electrical wiring FC is located inside the rear case A310 as compared with the case where the loose portion of the electrical wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the overhanging position. The displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to (close to) the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 while being accommodating.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the first displacement member A440, the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged on the front limit line FL at the overhanging position (see FIG. 346 (b)), and the retracted position (FIG. 346 (a)). In the displacement process up to (see), at least a part (mainly, the overhanging position side portion) of the interlocking plate portion A442 projects to the front side from the front limit line FL. In this overhang, the posture change of the first displacement member A440 is completed from the state where the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position (see FIG. 339 (c)) in the process of displacement of the first displacement member A440 from the retracted position (see FIG. 339 (c)). Since it occurs up to (see FIG. 342 (c)), the first displacement member A440 may project to the front side beyond the front limit line FL, particularly on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440.

Therefore, since it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate A416 is further separated from the first displacement member A440 (front side). However, in the present embodiment, the illumination substrate A416 is not formed on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440, so that the space for the first displacement member A440 to overhang is generated. Is forming. In addition, by forming only the diffusion plate A415 overhanging on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a arranged on the illuminated substrate A416 can be visually recognized is the illuminated substrate. It avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, the forming range of the illuminated substrate A416 is limited, and the diffuser plate A415 is formed so as to project from the outer edge of the illuminated substrate A416 so that the front-rear distance between the illuminated substrate A416 and the first displacement member A440 can be increased. While narrowing, it is possible to sufficiently secure a range in which the light emission effect by the illuminated substrate A416 can be visually recognized.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operation unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of light emission effect. This change in appearance is a change that occurs because the first displacement member A440 is partially visibly configured through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position (position after excitation). be.

347 (a), 347 (b) and 348 are front views of the first operating unit A400. FIG. 347 (a) shows the retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 347 (b) shows the first displacement member A440 arranged at an intermediate position (position shown in FIG. 342) of the displacement section. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 347 (b) and FIG. 348, the shape of the portion hidden by the front cover A410 of the first displacement member A440 is shown by a hidden line.

A diffuser plate A415 that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a arranged on the illuminated substrate A416 is arranged on the back side of the front cover A410. The diffuser plate A415 is the first region AC1 described above. And the second region AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is arranged on the back surface side of the diffuser plate A415 at least in the overhanging position, and the light irradiated from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffuser plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping with the first region AC1 in the front view, since the illuminated substrate A416 is arranged in the first region AC1, it has passed through the opening A442c. The light is shielded by the illuminated substrate A416.

Therefore, the light that has passed through the opening A442c can reach the diffuser plate A415 in the second region AC2. In other words, in the second region AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) arranged on the illuminated substrate A416 and diffused to the diffuser plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440b. It can be visually recognized in a state of being mixed with the light emitted from (see FIG. 337).

More specifically, the second region AC2 has a mode in which the light emitting means A416a is turned on and the light emitting means A445b is turned off, a mode in which the light emitting means A416a is turned off and the light emitting means A445b is turned on, and a mode in which the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A416a are turned off. It is configured to be switchable in at least four types of modes: a mode in which both A445b are turned on and a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the aspect of the second region AC2 is visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 is the edge of the front cover A410 on the third symbol display device 81 side as the through hole A412. It is provided with a plurality of elongated holes A412a formed at three locations in a straight line along the portion.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of elongated holes A412a, the central elongated hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the elongated holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged to the outside of the opening A442c. (Do not place facing each other). As a result, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be improved when the light is visually recognized through the long holes A412a in the center as compared with the case where the light is visually recognized through the long holes A412a on both sides.

For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is visible through the central elongated hole A412a, but is not visible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. Can be configured as. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b is visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a is visually recognized through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. (The light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the mode (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 depends on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) while the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 is turned off. .. Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the influence of the light emitting means 416b on the light emitting effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the overhanging position without causing a change in the aspect of the front cover A410 in the front view.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on while being arranged at the overhanging position 440, the elongated hole A412a formed in a position closer to the third symbol display device 81 side in common with each first operation unit A400. Since the light emitting mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

The effect of the change in the mode visually recognized through the through hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 of the first operation unit A400 arranged in a set of five is arranged at the overhanging position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 arranged at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent to the front view clockwise is turned on, and then at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the next is the first adjacent front view clockwise. The light emitting means A445b may be turned on in order to light the light emitting means A445b in order, such as turning on the light emitting means A445b of the displacement member A440.

In this case, by keeping the light emitting means 416b lit, while maintaining the brightness of the front cover A410 itself, only the mode of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a is sequentially changed clockwise in the front view. Can be executed.

Here, the light emitting modes of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is the second unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view, the first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view, and the first operation unit A400C is. The first operation unit A400D is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view, and the first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view. The main difference between the first operating unit A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operating unit A400 is the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the openings corresponding to the openings A442c of the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are shown as openings WA, WB, WC, and WD, respectively, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first operating unit A400 for convenience. With the sign of.

349 (a) and 349 (b) are front views of the first operating unit A400A. Note that FIG. 349 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349 (b) shows the first displacement member. The state in which the A440 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 349 (a) and 349 (b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400A is configured such that the opening WA overlaps the elongated holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Further, since the width and length of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (the retracted position side is longer), the opening WA and both ends as the first displacement member A440 approaches the overhanging position. The area overlapping with the elongated hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the appearance of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a can be changed in conjunction with each other.

350 (a) and 350 (b) are front views of the first operating unit A400B. Note that FIG. 350 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350 (b) shows the first displacement member. The state in which the A440 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400B is configured so that the opening WB may overlap with the elongated holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width and length of the opening WB are configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the area where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WB overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position is maximized in the state shown in FIG. 350 (a), and the first displacement member It can be configured to decrease once with the displacement of A440 and increase again in the state shown in FIG. 350 (b). Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

351 (a) and 351 (b) are front views of the first operating unit A400C. Note that FIG. 351 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351 (b) shows the first displacement member. The state in which the A440 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 351 (a) and 351 (b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400C is configured so that the opening WC may overlap with the elongated holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width and length of the opening WC are configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. That is, the opening WC is widened in a tapered shape in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end portion.

As a result, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a and the opening WC overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position is once reduced and increased again with the displacement of the first displacement member A440. Can be configured as follows. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the elongated holes A412a at both ends can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

352 (a) and 352 (b) are front views of the first operating unit A400D. Note that FIG. 352 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352 (b) shows the first displacement member. The state in which the A440 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b), the first operating unit A400D is configured such that the opening WD is branched in the front view, unlike the first operating unit A400. That is, the opening WD is configured to be branched in such a manner that the opening WD expands toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 near the lower end portion.

As a result, it is possible to divide the range where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position. That is, the central elongated hole A412a is divided into a plurality of ranges from the embodiment in which the entire central elongated hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352 (a)). It can be changed to a mode in which light is emitted (see FIG. 352 (b)).

In the first operation unit A400D, the case where the edge portion of the opening WD divides the central elongated hole A412a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the entire three elongated holes A412a may be configured to divide the visible range of light. That is, when the three elongated holes A412a and the opening WD overlap and uniform light can be visually recognized through the three elongated holes A412a, and when the opening WD is the central elongated hole A412a among the three elongated holes A412a. By overlapping only with the elongated holes A412a at both ends, the visible range of light is divided into the elongated holes A412a in the center, and the case where the light is limited to the elongated holes A412a on both sides can be switched. Is also good.

It will be described back to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336. The support box portion A470 has a main body box portion A471 formed in a box shape with the front surface and the upper right side open, and a shaft hole through which the rotation shaft of the pinned gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 is bored in the main body box portion A471. A472, a shaft support hole A473 in which the second displacement member A490 is axially supported, a notch portion A474 formed in a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and a cut thereof. A fastening portion A475 whose tip is formed so that a fastening screw which is projected in a columnar shape in the vicinity of the notch A474 and inserted into the through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed in, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. It is provided with a rack support portion A476 that supports the rack and pinion so as to be slidable, and a pinion support portion A477 that supports a pinion A517 that meshes with the slide rack A511 supported by the rack support portion A476.

The main body box portion A471 is provided with a protruding wall portion A471a projecting from the back bottom edge portion to the back side in a wall shape and a wall-shaped projecting from the front upper edge portion to the front side to assemble the first operation unit A400. In the state (see FIG. 324), the guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the roller member A442f and the protrusion wall portion A471a is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the notch portion A474 interposed therebetween. It is provided with a wiring guide unit A471c.

The detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, but the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in a manner in which the roller member A442f abuts on the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b and slides or rolls (FIG. 339). See FIG. 344).

The wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that its shape can appropriately correct the arrangement of the wiring HC described later, but the details will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected to each other through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, and the details will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions projecting toward the back surface side of the main body box portion A471, and is a support columnar portion A476a inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b which extends along the slide moving direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and is formed in a stepped shape extending toward the back surface side from the surface on the side where the support columnar portion A476a is arranged. Be prepared.

The pinion support portion A477 has a wall shape (plate) from the bottom of the main body box portion A471 along an arc centered on the pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported and the pinion shaft A477a. It is provided with an arc wall portion A477b extending in a shape).

Through the shaft hole A472, the pinned gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the in-phase member A465 are connected. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, a connection mode of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 will be described.

FIG. 353 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465, and FIG. 353 (b) is a front perspective view of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 on the left side and the right side. It is a rear perspective view of the gear A462 with a pin and the in-phase member A465. In FIG. 353 (a), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are shown in a posture in which the side connected to each other is facing the front.

As shown in FIG. 353 (a), the gear A462 with a pin has a plurality of phase-matching peripheral protrusions A462a projecting from a surface on the side facing the in-phase member A465 toward the in-phase member A465. Be prepared.

The in-phase member A465 has a phase matching diameter protrusion A465a projecting from a surface facing the pinned gear A462 toward the pinned gear A462 side, and an outer circular shape from an eccentric position to the back surface side. A transmission protrusion A466 to be provided and an arc wall portion A467 formed as an arc-shaped wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465 with the transmission protrusion A466 as a base end are provided. Compared with the transmission protrusion A466, the arc wall portion A467 has a shorter formation length toward the back surface side.

The phasing peripheral protrusion A462a and the phasing radial protrusion A465a will be described. In the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a, a plurality of arc-shaped wall portions are formed by making a notch along the axial direction in the circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462.

Further, the phase matching radial protrusion A465a is provided with a protrusion that is projected outward in the radial direction from a cylindrical protrusion having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a, and the protrusion is phased. It is formed so as to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the mating peripheral protrusion A462a. By inserting the ridge into the notch of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a, the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 can be connected in a state where the phase of the in-phase member A465 is matched with that of the pinned gear A462. The pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 can be fixed by inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pinned gear A462 and screwing it into the tip of the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a.

Here, in the present embodiment, the angles between the cuts of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a are not made uniform (120 degree intervals in the case of three divisions as in the present embodiment), but are made uneven. The pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are configured to be connected only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353 (b)).

That is, by combining the angles between the cuts of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a at 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees (by making them uneven), the angle at which the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 can be connected. The relationship can be limited to one type.

In the present embodiment, the case where the notch (phase matching diameter protrusion A465a) of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a is formed at three points has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be at one place or at two places, or at a plurality of places of four or more, and can be appropriately selected in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465.

It will be described back to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336. The rear plate portion A480 is a fastening portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and a fastening portion A485 which is formed in the main body plate portion A481 and screwed into a fastening portion A475 of a support box portion A470. A plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that are projected toward the outer peripheral side of the arc wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and the through hole A482 through which the screw is inserted and are used for alignment by abutting on the outer peripheral side thereof. And a plurality of projecting plate portions A484 projecting from the main body plate portion A481 to the front side so as to form a plate along the outer shape of the moving range of the slide rack A511 of the rack pinion A510.

The outer edge portion of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge portion in FIGS. 335 and 336) abuts on the back surface side end portion of the projecting wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and is projected for positioning in the left-right direction. Only the plate portion A484 works.

On the other hand, in the inner edge portion of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge portion in FIGS. 335 and 336), the alignment protrusion A483 and the arc wall portion A477b come into contact with each other in a plurality of directions (up / down / left / right directions). Can be aligned. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide space near the outer edge portion by eliminating the alignment portion from the vicinity of the outer edge portion while performing good alignment of the rear plate portion A480 with respect to the support box portion A470. In the present embodiment, this secured space is utilized as the arrangement space for the wiring HC (see FIG. 356 (a)), and the details will be described later.

The protrusion plate portion A484 is arranged so that the tip of the protrusion is close to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (with a slight gap that abuts or the wiring cannot pass through), and the rack and pinion A510 is arranged. It functions to partition the moving range of the slide rack A511 and the outer area. This makes it possible to prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the moving range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, which will be described in detail later.

FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 is a shafted support plate A491 formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and pivotally supported by a shaft support hole A473 of the support box portion A470, and a shaft support plate A491 thereof. A cover formed from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, which is formed in an inner shape similar to the outer shape of the shaft support plate A491 and is fitted to the shaft support plate A491 so as to cover the shaft support plate A491 from the front side. It includes an installation member A492 and an illuminated substrate A493 in which a light emitting portion A493a composed of an LED or the like is arranged and accommodated in a shaft-mounted support plate A491 and an covering member A492.

The shafted support plate A491 has a shafted support protrusion A491a that is projected toward the back surface in an outer circular shape and is inserted into the shaft support hole A473, and a protrusion having a shorter protrusion length than the shafted support protrusion A491a. A fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a long hole A491d formed in a long rectangular shape along the radial direction of the axial support protrusion A491a. , A plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting toward the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on the insertion hole A491c, and projecting toward the front side in a narrow projecting shape along the side wall portion forming the outer circumference. It is provided with a plurality of narrow protrusions A491f.

The circular support portion A491e and the narrow protrusion A491f are in contact with the outer peripheral edge portion of the illuminated substrate A493 in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIGS. 335 and 336), and the illuminated substrate A493 is placed on the back side of the illuminated substrate A493. Support from.

In particular, the narrow protrusion A491f is formed at a position where the shape of the illuminated substrate A493 to be accommodated is constricted, that is, at a location where the outer peripheral side wall of the shaft-mounted support plate A491 is recessed inward. It is possible to selectively support the part where the shape of A493 is constricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the illuminated substrate A493 at the constricted portion where the rigidity is expected to be likely to decrease due to the shortening of the width dimension, and it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate A493 from breaking. ..

The lining member A492 is inserted into the supported portion A493b of the illuminated substrate A493, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A491c is screwed into the plurality of fastening portions A492a, and the fastening portion A492a in the radial direction at the base side of the fastening portion A492a. A plurality of projecting support portions A492b projecting from the above and connecting to the plate-shaped portion of the covering member A492, and a side wall portion forming an outer periphery at a position corresponding to a thin projecting portion A491f of the shafted support plate A491. It is provided with a plurality of narrow protrusions A492c that are formed along the fine protrusions and are projected toward the back surface side.

According to the above configuration, the outer peripheral edge portion of the illuminated substrate A493 is supported by the narrow protrusions A491f and A492c, and is supported by the circular support portion A491e and the protrusion support portion A492b around the fastening screw. As a result, the illuminated substrate A493 can be satisfactorily fixed to the shafted support plate A491 and the covering member A492.

The support mode of the illuminated substrate A493 is not limited at all. For example, the illuminated substrate A493 may be fixed by applying a load along the fastening direction, or the dimensional relationship in which a compression load does not occur (for example, the front-rear distance between the narrow protrusions A491f and A492c is the illuminated substrate. It may be formed with the same dimensional relationship as the thickness of A493) to maintain the arrangement of the illuminated substrate A493 without causing a load.

The illuminated substrate A493 is arranged on the back surface side of the above-mentioned plurality of light emitting portions A493a, a plurality of supported portions A493b formed by being bored or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening portion A492a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a board-side connector A493c to which the end portion (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a posture in which wiring extends along the long direction of the long hole A491d of the axial support plate A491, and the long hole A491d is long from the inner edge portion on the short side. A section extension A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side is shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extension A491d1. A ridge portion A491d2 is formed so as to project from the opposite edge portion of the substrate side connector A493c to the back surface side.

The board-side connector A493c is arranged on the visible area side (left side of FIG. 355) of the third symbol display device 81 with reference to the section extension portion A491d1, and the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is long on the opposite side. It passes through the hole A491d. That is, the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is sandwiched and supported between the section extension portion A491d1 and the illuminated board A493.

As a result, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the section extension portion A491d1 can be suppressed, so that the substrate-side connector when the second displacement member A490 is displaced can be suppressed. The possibility that the wiring will come off from A493c can be reduced.

The ridge portion A491d2 is formed with a protrusion length sufficient to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to stand up toward the back side of the shaft-mounted support plate A491 (in the projecting direction of the protrusion A491d2). Can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch A474 as compared with the case where the wiring HC is arranged close to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491 and routed to the back surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being broken.

In addition, since the ridge portion A491d2 projects at a right angle to the back surface of the shaft support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be moved to the right angle side, and contact with the wiring HC is avoided. The width of the notch A474 can be suppressed. As a result, a large area (area) on the fastening portion A475 side of the main body box portion A471 can be secured, so that the rigidity of the main body box portion A471 can be secured and the degree of freedom in arranging the fastening portion A475 is improved. be able to.

It will be described back to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336. The rack and pinion A510 is meshed with a slide rack A511 that is supported so as to be slidable along the direction A416x and a gear portion of the slide rack A511, and is pivotally supported by a pinion shaft A477a of the support box portion A470 and is supported by the slide rack A511. It is provided with a pinion A517 that rotates in synchronization with the slide movement of the above, and a reinforcing arm portion A518 that is meshed with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the above-mentioned second displacement member A490, whereby the second displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so as not to be pulled out. That is, it is fastened to the shaft support protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position of the reinforcing arm portion A518, and is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the rotation tip side portion of the reinforcing arm portion A518 (see FIG. 355). .. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 is formed into a pair of support holes A512 formed in an elongated hole shape extending along the direction A416x with a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to be inserted, and a plate shape along the gear portion. The supported plate portion A513, the projecting plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position separated from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and the projecting plate portion A514 facing the same phase member A465 and having the same phase. A deformed transmitted portion A515 to which a driving force is transmitted from the member A465 is provided.

The support hole A512 is inserted with a small diameter portion at the tip of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large-diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced toward the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large-diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. .. In this way, the slide rack A511 has plate-shaped portions facing each other with a gap of at least about the height of the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a between the slide rack A511 and the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x while being maintained.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the projecting plate portion A514 has a slight gap with the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. It is placed facing each other with a space between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the projecting plate portion A514 can prevent the displacement from occurring.

Various causes of the slide rack A511 being displaced in the front-rear direction are exemplified. For example, a case where a player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called “dotsuki”), a case where fine particles are clogged in a gap, and the case where the meshing resistance becomes excessive and an excessive load is generated at the meshing position are exemplified. Tooth.

356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. In addition, in FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 357 (b), and FIG. A state in which the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is broken is shown so that the transmission portion A515 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 and the deformed transmitted portion A515 are shown in an enlarged manner for easy understanding.

In FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358, the second displacement member A490 is extended from the retracted position (see FIG. 356 (a)) (FIG. 356). The state of displacement to 358) is illustrated in chronological order.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, the driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. As described above, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, it is described above in FIGS. 339 to 345 in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358. Rotation of the pinned gear A462 will occur, and these relationships will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356 (b), the deformed transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the in-phase member A465, and the transmission protrusion A466 is accessible and can move independently (load is applied to the slide rack A511). A non-transmission recess A515a recessed in (movable without giving), a connecting recess A515b which is a recess of the same depth connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A515a, and a narrower width than the connecting recess A515b. There is an insertion gap A515c, which is a recess of the same depth connected to the connecting recess A515b on the opposite side of the non-transmission recess A515a, and the front from the slide rack A511 at the retracted position (lower left) side of the transmission protrusion A466. A distance of more than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466 on the overhanging position (upper right) side of the protrusion plate portion A515d, which is projected to the side in a plate shape and constitutes the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the protrusion plate portion A515d. It is provided with an opposed arrangement portion A515e that is vacantly arranged so as to face the projecting plate portion A515d and constitutes the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.

The protrusion length of the protrusion plate portion A515d is formed longer than the length of the facing arrangement portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), with respect to the transmission protrusion portion A466 and the arc wall portion A467. It is possible to make contact in the direction of movement.

The facing arrangement portion A515e is capable of abutting (overlapping) with the transmission protrusion A466 in the moving direction, while is non-contacting (does not overlap) with the arc wall portion A467 in the moving direction. That is, the facing arrangement portion A515e and the arc wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship in which a front-rear gap is generated.

The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A515d and the facing arrangement portion A515e are configured as a plane orthogonal to the moving direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the slide rack A511.

The connecting recess A515b has the same function as the relief portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to accept the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. As a result, the advance / retreat displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be smoothly performed (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358, the in-phase member A465 is a drive motor similar to the pinned gear A462. The driving force of the AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, a displacement mode in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited, the drive gear AMG1 rotates, and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described in chronological order.

In FIG. 356 (a), in the state before the drive gear AMG1 rotates, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the retracted position side end of the moving range, and the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position accordingly. The state of being evacuated is illustrated.

In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is not in contact with the deformed transmission portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x), while the arc wall portion A467 is arranged to face the protrusion plate portion A515d. At A467a, it abuts against the projecting plate portion A515d from the upper right (overhanging position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). As a result, the displacement of the projecting plate portion A515d can be regulated by the arc wall portion A467, so that the slide rack A511 is unintentionally displaced by the external force applied in the non-excited (non-driven) state of the drive motor AMT1. It can be prevented from doing so.

The contact points between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d are arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the load applied from the projecting plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 is configured to pass through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, the in-phase member A465 rotates due to the load from the projecting plate portion A515d. Can be prevented.

Further, since the arc wall portion A467 is curvedly formed, the contact area between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, the contact area can be line contact). Is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 356 (a), the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d can be reduced (theoretically, to 0). Therefore, it is possible to avoid requiring an extra driving force for regulating the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the displacement of the slide rack A511 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the in-phase member A465.

In addition, in reality, if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d is taken into consideration, the contact area increases over time, and the space between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d is increased. It is considered that the frictional force generated in the above is increased. On the other hand, a low friction seal may be attached to the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d, or a lubricant (grease or the like) may be applied to take measures. In the present embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed to be small, the area that needs to be dealt with by a low friction seal or a lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include a load generated by gravity and vibration during an earthquake, a force generated when a player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10, and the like.

FIG. 356 (b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the connecting recess A515b. By the time the phase member A465 is displaced from the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the state of FIG. 356 (b), the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the first angle d11 from the initial angle d10, but the transmission protrusion A466 is still deformed and transmitted. It is considered to be non-contact with the portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arc wall portion A467 is still in contact with the projecting plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (overhanging position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). As shown in FIGS. 356 (a) and 356 (b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a is in the moving direction (direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. Does not displace. Therefore, even in the state of FIG. 356 (b), the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side, as in the state shown in FIG. 356 (a).

As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 356 (b)).

FIG. 357 (a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the insertion gap A515c. By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the state of FIG. 357 (a), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 corresponds to the protrusion plate portion A515d. Contact.

In FIG. 357 (a), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are parallel. That is, since the portion of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 comes into contact with the protrusion plate portion A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 357 (a), The restriction by the in-phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 can be displaced to the overhang position side (upper right side).

As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 357 (a)).

FIG. 357 (b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has entered the inside of the insertion gap A515c. The in-phase member A465 rotates by the third angle d13 from the initial angle d10 until the state of FIG. 356 (a) is displaced to the state of FIG. 357 (b). Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposed arrangement portion A515e, so that the slide rack A511 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 357 (b), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are orthogonal to each other. That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 357 (b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the overhang position side end of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 is stretched. The state of being placed in the displacement position is shown in the figure.

From the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the displacement of the state of FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates by the fourth angle d14 from the initial angle d10 (rotates by one or more rotations). Along with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposed arrangement portion A515e, so that the slide rack A511 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 358, the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are parallel. That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposite arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See Fig. 358).

In FIG. 358, since the portion of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts on the facing arrangement portion A515e, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 358, the slide rack There is a risk that A511 will be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In the present embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, the slide rack A511 is allowed from the arrangement of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) in the state where the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the overhanging position of the movement range. It is configured to allow rotation of the in-phase member A465 up to the angle dd1.

That is, since the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion plate portion A515d are configured to come into contact with each other only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion A466 collide with each other until the allowable angle dd1 is rotated. Since the plate portion A515d is not in contact with the plate portion A515d and the load is not transmitted, the arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhanging position side end portion of the moving range.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes shown in FIGS. 356 to 358, in the control of stopping the rotation of the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14, the in-phase member A465 actually rotates beyond the fourth angle d14. Even if there is, if the excess of the rotation angle is up to the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhanging position side end of the moving range, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the overhanging position. can.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (even if there is an error of the allowable angle dd1 or less), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the overhang position. With a simple configuration, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the in-phase member A465 and realize highly accurate displacement of the second displacement member A490 (second displacement without suddenly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465). The member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the overhanging position).

Further, when the rotation angle excess of the allowable angle dd1 or less is intentionally generated from the fourth angle d14, and the excess is driven toward the retracted position of the second displacement member A490 (when the drive direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the same phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the facing arrangement portion A515e move in the moving direction (direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. By abutting in the parallel direction), it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from returning to the retracted position side and performing an operation (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be regulated (return rotation can be prevented) in the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from returning from the overhanging position (see FIG. 358) and rotating.

FIG. 359 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit BU in the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line of FIG. 356 (a). In addition, in FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted from the illustration, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly shown.

Hereinafter, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described with reference to FIG. 359. In the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate. The wiring HC is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables having a round cross section connected to the substrate side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is a space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. Is arranged in.

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension portion A491d1 and the illuminated board A493, and is along the ridge portion A491d2 in the support box portion A470. You will be guided to the space surrounded by the rear plate part A480.

As described above, since the protrusion A491d2 is formed with a protrusion length sufficient to enter the notch A474 of the support box A470, the wiring HC is guided to separate from the notch A474. , Contact with the notch A474 is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch A474 and disconnecting.

On the other hand, the wiring HC is guided to the ridge portion A491d2 so as to be close to the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 without countermeasures and may be disconnected in a short period of time. However, in the present embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa of the wiring HC is preferably inserted between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480 to suppress the friction with the rear plate portion A480. This will be described in detail below.

In the present embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the illuminated board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around the winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the projecting wall portion A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 that is bound by the binding band KB and is connected to the substrate side connector A493c is wound around the fastening portion A475 once, and the tip thereof is connected to the substrate side connector A493c. ..

The wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, so that the wiring HC is separated from the fastening portion A475 even in a loosened state (see FIG. 356 (a)) (direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends). The amount of displacement to can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In the present embodiment, since the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, there is an advantage in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing are completed by the fastening screw in the middle of screwing.

In addition, at the time of this fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box portion A470 (the side overhanging the fastening portion A475) faces upward, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, and then the rear plate portion A480 is wrapped around the support box portion A470. By screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC can be assembled while being prevented from dripping in the direction of gravity in the main body box portion A471, so that the assembly can be easily completed. .. That is, it is easier to assemble the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480 by winding the wiring HC around the fastening portion A475, as compared with the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be forced to assemble in a downward posture. Can be.

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fastened by the binding band KB is guided (closed) to the rear plate portion A480 side. As a result, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 at the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while allowing a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wiring HCs intersect with each other. At the position, the end portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the substrate side connector A493c is wound so as to be slid between the wiring HC already arranged and the support box portion A470.

Thereby, the intermediate portion HCa can be configured to be in contact with the rear plate portion A480 side of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side (see FIG. 356 (a)), and the wiring HC is connected to the rear plate by the protrusion portion A491d2. It is possible to suppress the degree of proximity to the portion A480 side.

The displacement mode of the wiring HC when the displacement of the second displacement member A490 occurs will be described. The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the binding band KB and the substrate side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the displacement (deflection) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is generated by utilizing the entire length of the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the substrate side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Since the load (fatigue) associated with the wiring can be made uniform, it is possible to avoid a large load locally from occurring on the wiring HC.

The board-side connector A493c has a retracted position as compared with a shaft-supported protrusion 491a that functions as a rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 and a reinforcing arm portion A518 formed on the overhanging position side of the second displacement member A490. Displaced on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the retracted position, the substrate side is inside the member of the support plate portion 420 (see FIG. 346 (a), right side) that shields the line of sight toward the second displacement member A490. The connector A493 is arranged.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes to the outside of the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 or the support box portion A470. That is, by arranging the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the overhanging position side (third symbol display device 81 side), wiring is performed while ensuring a large overhanging amount of the second displacement member A490. It is possible to prevent the HC from being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356 (a), the substrate-side connector A493c is configured to be able to accept the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of the circle centered on the shaft-supported protrusion A491a. When the board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side of the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356 (a)). , The case where it is arranged on the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) is switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a difference in the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC on the outward path and the return path of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the substrate side connector A493c. As a result, fluctuations in the load applied to the wiring HC can be suppressed, so that disconnection of the wiring HC can be prevented.

Further, the displacement of the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily displaced to the straight line side connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 357 (b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 starts displacement from the retracted position to the overhanging position and is rotated by about 45 degrees. In this state, the direction in which the wiring HC connected to the substrate-side connector A493c extends is substantially parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the axial support portion A491. That is, the amount of deformation (deflection) of the wiring HC can be minimized by setting the fastening portion A475 as the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490. ..

Explaining the local displacement of the wiring HC in comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357 (a)), the portion that was in contact with the upper part of the fastening portion A475 and the portion that was arranged below the fastening portion A475 are described. It has risen slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the substrate side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position side, the wiring HC on the substrate side connector A493c side is between the intermediate portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480. While the effect of entering is not obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without rubbing the wiring HCs with each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as the load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the posture along the left-right direction is generated, and compared with the case where the second displacement member A490 is set to the retracted position (see FIG. 357 (a)). Therefore, the influence of the load given by the ridge portion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent an excessive frictional force from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in the present embodiment, only when there is a possibility that an excessive frictional force is generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480, the intermediate portion HCa is provided between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the substrate side connector A493c. It is allowed to enter so that the wiring HC is separated from the rear plate portion A480.

On the other hand, when it is unlikely that an excessive frictional force is generated, as shown in FIG. 357 (b), the front-rear overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the substrate-side connector A493c can be eliminated. It is possible to prevent extra resistance from being generated in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to achieve high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

In the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), the local displacement of the wiring HC is explained in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357 (b), and it is arranged above the fastening portion A475. The portion is slightly lowered, and the portion arranged below the fastening portion A475 is slightly raised. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is a displacement that is close to the straight line side connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, in a state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the overhanging position (that is, in a state where the second displacement member A490 is rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide portion A471c to arrange the second displacement member A490. Is corrected. The wiring guide unit A471c is designed for one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

More specifically, in the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490, the arcs that pass through the substrate side connector A493c and are in contact with the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c are the fastening portion A475 and the projecting wall portion A471a that are the paths of the wiring HC. It is configured to pass between. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the wiring HC, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic view showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 with respect to the initial angles d0 and d10. In the description of FIG. 360, unless otherwise described, the angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 continuously displaces from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5 and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 has the initial angle. While stopping from d10 to the second angle d12, it continuously displaces from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle range of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 for generating the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are set. An angle range that does not generate a driving force is inserted between the pinned gear A462 for generation and the rotation angle range of the in-phase member A465. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

The setting mode of the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be configured at the same angle. In this case, at the same time that the first displacement member A440 is switched from the state in which the displacement is continued to the stopped state, the second displacement member A490 starts the displacement from the stopped state. Therefore, since the timing for simultaneously displacementing the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 by the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 does not occur, a plurality of members (first displacement member) can be used with a single drive motor AMT1. The load received by the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load can be limited to the load applied from a single member) while adopting the configuration for driving the A440 and the second displacement member A490).

Further, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, a section in which the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 needs to be generated while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are simultaneously displaced. It can be limited to the range between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to the present embodiment, since the member that is displaced with respect to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 is switched, the pinned gear A462 is in the angle range on one side with respect to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12. And by reversing and rotating the in-phase member A465, one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490) is stopped, and the other member (second displacement member A490 or first displacement member A490) is stopped. A440) can be reversed.

As described above, it is not necessary to add a large driving force to stop one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members contact (rub) with each other by line contact, so that no frictional force is theoretically generated. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is generated, and the second displacement member A490 is maintained in the retracted state. It is also possible to drive the vehicle.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14. Therefore, the rotation of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 is mechanically restricted when the sixth angle d6 is rotated before the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are rotated by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). .. Therefore, since the in-phase member A465 does not rotate beyond the permissible angle dd1, the accuracy of stopping the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14 is low, and even in a configuration (control mode) in which over-rotation is likely to occur, the second displacement member A490 Can be maintained in the overhang position (see FIG. 358).

The numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle slightly exceeding the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, it may be set as an angle slightly exceeding the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, while allowing the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 to rotate by the allowable angle dd1 beyond the fourth angle d14, the rotation continues beyond the allowable angle dd1 to the sixth angle d6. When it reaches, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be stopped immediately by mechanical regulation.

As a result, the second displacement means A490 does not reach the overhanging position by controlling the stop at an angle (allowable amount) slightly exceeding the fourth angle d14 with respect to the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1. It is possible to avoid and stop the second displacement means A490 at the overhanging position), and when the stop timing deviation of the drive motor AMT1 becomes unintentionally large, the second displacement member A490 is erroneously difficult. It is possible to prevent the displacement.

Since the arc wall portion A464 is formed at a center angle of about 230 degrees as described above, the position that regulates the first displacement member A440 (the position of the fifth angle d5) even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle. Since the arc wall portion A464 is arranged up to the position where the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with the first displacement member A440), the displacement regulation at the overhanging position of the first displacement member A440 can be maintained.

The state in which the arc wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 comes into contact with the projecting plate portion A515d corresponds to a state in which the detection plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 to control the stop. There is little possibility that the stop timing deviation of the drive motor AMT1 will unintentionally increase near the angle state where the wall portion A467 abuts on the projecting plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arc wall portion A467 has a smaller angle than the arc wall portion A464 as the minimum required angle range for maintaining the second displacement member A490 in the retracted position from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12 (the present embodiment). Then, it is formed at about 210 degrees). As a result, the material cost required for the arc wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a left-right width exceeding the left-right width of the display visible area of the third symbol display device 81, and is below the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81. Placed in.

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second operation unit A700 includes an evacuation unit A701 having an evacuation unit A702 which is held by left and right long rectangular plate-shaped members and is configured to be capable of evacuation operation, and an evacuation unit. It is provided with an effect unit A710 that can be displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position by the ascending / descending operation of the A702 and can be operated (produced) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports a long left and right elevating portion A702 on the left and right, and is rotatably supported by a pair of arm members A703 around the left and right side ends, and an arm member A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). A pair of drive motors A704 for transmitting driving force to the vehicle.

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703, for example, a gear tooth is formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the rotation shaft side, and the gear tooth is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704. An example is a gear transmission mechanism in which gears are engaged with each other.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is disposed so as to project in the axial direction at a position where the pin inserted through the long hole is eccentric and a gear tooth is formed on the outer periphery thereof. A gear link transmission mechanism may be used in which the gear teeth of the body and the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 mesh with each other.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the end in the rotational outer radial direction of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. , A link transmission mechanism in which a driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the drive motor A704 is left and right corresponding to the asymmetry of the back side shape of the game board A13 arranged to face the front side of the second operation unit A700 (see FIG. 306). It is said to be asymmetric. That is, by inserting the drive motor A704 into the gap (space) of the rear side configuration of the game board A13, the front-rear width required for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is suppressed.

As described above, since it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 according to the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than the link transmission mechanism. Is preferable.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the staging unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the staging unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular front cover A711 that divides the effect range of the effect unit A710, and a skirt-shaped upper cover A712 that is arranged below the annular front cover A711 and fastened and fixed to the upper lid portion A740 described later. A state in which the skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is placed on the lower side of the cover A712 on the back side and is fastened and fixed to the elevating portion of the elevating unit A701, is disassembled and separated to the front side is shown.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714 formed in a ring shape substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 in the front-rear direction and forming an annular internal space IE is fixed to the upper lid portion A740 between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711. A rotating body A720 rotatably arranged at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714 is shown.

The rotating body A720 is configured such that a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 in a front view can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. It is possible to receive the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a such as the LED arranged on the plurality of illuminated substrates A715. Three light emitting means A715a are arranged on one side of the pentagon formed by the illuminated substrate A715 at equal intervals in the side direction.

In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate A715 is composed of three LEDs or the like arranged at equal intervals in the side direction on one side of a pentagon like the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed to the front side. The front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b emits light to the annular front cover A711 by irradiating the back surface side of the annular front cover A711 with light. That is, the light emitting effect can be visually recognized by the player through the light transmissive portion partially formed on the annular front cover A711.

In the present embodiment, each of the five flat plate-shaped illuminated substrates A715 constitutes one side of a pentagon, and the illuminated substrate A715 above the rotating body A720 is in a horizontal position and the illuminated substrates on the lower left and right sides. The lower end of the A715 is arranged so as to face the rotation axis side, and the light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each illuminated substrate A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center side of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotating outer portion of the rotating body A720 can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. As a result, the traveling direction of the light when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotating body A720 can be changed with the rotation of the rotating body A720, so that a gorgeous effect can be executed. ..

In this embodiment, the outer surface of the rotating body A720 is plated (gold-plated, silver-plated, etc.) in order to facilitate the reflection of light by the rotating body A720. The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and may be various other aspects. For example, a tape having a color that is easily reflected may be attached.

As described above, since the rotating body A720 rotates around a rotating axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotating body is on the rotating axis of the rotating body A720 regardless of the rotation of the rotating body A720. It is irradiated to the same place of. In the present embodiment, the upper portion of the rotating body A720 is opened by forming the light passing recess A722a at that position so that light can pass through, but the details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are used to surround the concave portions A711a and A714a constituting the window portion through which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes through the opposite edge portion and the rotation axis of the rotating body A720. It is provided with semicircular recessed portions A711b and A714b which are recessed in a semicircular cross section.

The inner peripheral surface of the annulus excluding the window portion composed of the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further applied to the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 to be reflected, so that a plurality of lights emitted from the same light emitting means A715a can be obtained. It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point of. As a result, the number of light emitting means A715a arranged can be reduced while performing a gorgeous effect.

In this respect, it is better to make the window portion required for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to secure a wider area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can be done. In the present embodiment, the shape of the window portion composed of the recessed portions A711a and A714a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a, and the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is determined. It is possible to secure a wide area for reflecting light without damaging it.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the staging unit A710, and FIG. 367 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the staging unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, the annular front cover A711, the upper cover A712, and the lower cover A713 of the staging unit A710 are not shown.

The rotating body A720 is a set of members that are composed of a plurality of rotating members and are supported by a plurality of support portions A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and have a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A second rotating member composed of a pair of members formed of a light-transmitting resin material having a shape that allows the outside of the first rotating member A721 and the first rotating body 721 to rotate and is colored (blue in the present embodiment). It is equipped with A728.

The first rotating member A721 is formed from a resin material having a substantially hemispherical shape, which is divided into front and rear parts and has a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton, and is fastened and fixed to a support portion A730 at the lower portion. An annular gear member A723 that is rotatably supported by an annular recess formed on the back side of the shell portion A722 on the front side and has gear teeth engraved on the back side. , The gear teeth A724a arranged on the back side of the annular gear member A723, rotatably supported by a pair of shell portions A722, and engraved on the shaft portion are the gear teeth and teeth of the annular gear member A723. It mainly includes a central rotating member A724 to be combined.

The pair of shell portions A722 are provided with light passing recesses A722a recessed in the upper portion thereof in a direction away from each other. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passing recess A722a is formed both above and below the annular gear member A723, and most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of the light passing recess A722a. It is arranged in such a manner.

That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passing recess A722a is viewed from above, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible in that direction, so that the central rotating member A724 arranged inside the annular gear member A723 is not visible. Can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passing recess A722a, it is possible to prevent the annular gear member A723 from blocking the light, and the light can be transmitted to the central rotating member A724. Can be reached. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, the shell portion A722 on the rear side is not shown in order to make the inside visible, and for convenience of explanation, a fixed gear SG that is non-rotatably arranged above the support portion A730 is an annular gear. It is shown in a state of being in mesh with the member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate about a rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) extending in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative positions of the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG arranged inside the first rotating member A721 change, and the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG are relative to each other accordingly. Displace (changes the interlocking relationship).

In the present embodiment, since the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, the rotation of the annular gear member A723 ensures a relative displacement with the fixed gear SG. .. When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the central rotating member A724 meshed with the annular gear member A723 rotates along with the rotation. Since the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724 extends in the direction (oriental direction) intersecting the axis extending in the vertical direction (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) as the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721, the first 1 With the rotation of the shell portion A722 of the rotating member A721 (horizontal rotation of the vertical axis), the central rotating member A724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation of the horizontal axis). The relationship between the rotation directions will be described later.

Since the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 continues to change in the same plane (synchronized with the rotation angle) with the rotation of the shell portion A722, the central rotation member A724 is subjected to a plurality of rotation axes up, down, left and right for the player. You can make it look like it rotates with. Therefore, by causing the shell portion A722 to rotate in one direction, the central rotating member A724 can be rotated in a plurality of directions.

In the present embodiment, since the number of gear teeth A724a and the number of fixed gear SG teeth are the same (both 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the central rotation member A724 Synchronized with the absolute value of the rotation angle. As a result, during the rotation of the shell portion A722, every time the shell portion A722 is placed in a posture in which the ring shape can be visually recognized from the front as shown in FIG. 368 (every half rotation), the central rotating member A724 is shown. As shown in 368, the posture is such that the disk portion side faces the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

It will be described back to FIG. 366 and FIG. 367. The second rotating member A728 is composed of a pair of members having a substantially symmetrical shape that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 on the lower side of the first rotating member A721, and the first rotating member A721 is formed from the lower side of the first rotating member A721. A rod-shaped extending portion A728a formed in a rod shape extending upward is provided in a manner of reaching a position covering the first rotating member A721 from above through the outside of the above.

The rod-shaped extending portion A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721, and may be used to hide a part of the first rotating member A721 or to the outside of the first rotating member A721 depending on the arrangement. A case where it can be seen (a case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, but the details will be described later.

The outer shape of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is configured to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the annular rear cover A714, and the gap in the vertical direction is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retaining member for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are placed in a state where the annular rear cover A714 is arranged. It is possible to prevent inadvertent disassembly by pulling it upward (disassembling).

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728) that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730, and they rotate with the rotation of the support portion A730. do. Next, this support portion A730 will be described.

FIG. 369 (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369 (b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735. FIG. 370 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support portion A730 is colorless and light with the first support portion A731 whose main body is formed in a cylindrical shape from a colored (white in this embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material. The second support portion A735 is formed of a permeable resin material so that the main body is formed into a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A731 and is divided into two in the radial direction. A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to a box-shaped portion A750, which will be described later, is inserted inside the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735, and a shaft having a deformed shape is inserted at the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751. It is non-removably supported by a metal ring-shaped C ring C1 and a fixed gear SG that are fixed so as not to rotate by fitting with.

The first support portion A731 has an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, and has a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a formed so that the shaft rod portion A751 can be inserted, and a main body thereof. A plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a plate shape in both directions in a straight line from the upper end portion of the portion to form through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, and projecting downward from two positions at the lower end of the main body portion. It is provided with a pair of projecting portions A733.

The projecting portion A733 is arranged at a position corresponding to the notch A772a of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of a force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed to have different widths from each other. To. As a result, it is easier to match the angle between the tubular extension portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting, as compared with the case where the width of the pair of protrusions A733 is the same. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 369 (b) and 370 (b), the second support portion A735 is a plate in both directions in a straight line from the half-cylinder portion A736 constituting the tubular portion and the upper end portion of the half-cylinder portion A736. It is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrically shaped split bodies including a plurality of semi-support plate portions A737 extending in a shape and forming through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The half-cylinder portion A736 is provided with a concave fitting portion A736a which is concavely recessed upward from the lower end at the center position of the arc at the lower end side portion and a rectangular shape protruding radially outward from the end portion of the arc. It is provided with a protruding fitting portion A736b.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is a recess that fits into the inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373) of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 described later, and the protrusion fitting portion A736b is formed in the notch A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. It is a protrusion to be fitted.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical ridge portion A762b, and the inner wall thereof is arranged outward in the radial direction of the half cylinder portion A736. The displacement to the second support portion A735 is restricted, and the protrusion fitting portion A736b is fitted with the notch portion A762c, so that the divided body constituting the second support portion A735 can be supported indivisiblely.

Further, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted so as to be in contact with the notch portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 in the circumferential direction of rotation with the shaft rod portion A751 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission unit for transmitting the rotation of the large-diameter gear LG12 to the second support portion A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from being divided and to transmit the rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion in which the semi-support plate portion A737 is formed. The groove portion A735a can reduce the contact area between the inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the outer surface of the first support portion A731, and can reduce the frictional force generated.

In particular, in a place arranged between the semi-support plate portions A737, there is a possibility that a load may be generated when fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728, and the inner diameter may be tightened compared to the dimensions at the time of design. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove portion A735a is formed at the position between the semi-support plate portions A737, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 come into contact with each other at a position where sliding friction is likely to occur. The area can be reduced. As a result, the frictional force generated between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 can be effectively reduced while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.

The semi-support plate portion A737 has a pair of assembling protrusions A737a projecting to the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, and a pair of positions protruding from one of the divided bodies. Fastening of the mating protrusion A737b, the insertion hole A737c drilled in the other split body as a through hole having a size through which the mating protrusion A737b can be inserted, and the second rotating member A728 drilled in the thickness direction. A portion A728b (see FIG. 367) is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d formed in a size that allows insertion.

The semi-support plate portion A737 is aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusion A737b into the insertion hole A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) assembled from the outside in the dividing direction is fastened to the fastening portion A728b. By screwing in and fastening and fixing, they are connected to each other. That is, since the fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-support plate portion A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The assembly protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning, and the protrusion interval is a pair of divided bodies constituting the second support portion A735. Different from each other. That is, the distance between the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the split body arranged on the front side is wider than the distance between the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the split body arranged on the back side.

By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support portion A735. That is, the assembling protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted only when assembled from the correct direction, and when the wrong direction is used, the assembling protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted. The position of the two-rotating member A728 does not match the recessed portion, and the assembly cannot be performed, so that an error in the assembly direction can be noticed.

Further, the second rotating member A728 differs greatly in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and the other configurations are substantially the same. There is a risk of making an error in trying to assemble two members of one of the sets. According to the present embodiment, since the forming intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because it is not a common embodiment), both members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support portion A735 are one member (combination). It is possible to notice the mistake of assembling the member on one side before inserting the fastening screw.

Prior to disassembly, the second support portion A735 is restricted in radial distance by the cylindrical ridge portion A762b of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (see FIG. 366), so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be assembled. , It is performed exclusively by translation in the axial direction, and with the translation, the protrusion A733 is fitted with the notch A772a and the recessed fitting portion A736a is fitted with the inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373). The joint portion A736b is fitted with the notch portion A762c, respectively. Here, from the shape, the second support portion A735 is assembled first, and then the first support portion A731 is assembled in that state.

Here, due to the shape of the mating member to be assembled, the posture when both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 are assembled is not an arbitrary posture but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A731, it is possible that the second support portion A735 obstructs the field of view and it becomes difficult to assemble the first support portion A731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second support portion A735 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the first support portion A731 is formed of a light-impermeable resin material. After assembling, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, since the tubular extending portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 for assembling the first support portion A731 is disposed so as to project long above the upper lid portion A740, the protruding portion A733 of the first support portion A731 is fitted. The position to be used is not hidden by the upper lid portion A740, and the position can be easily visually recognized.

Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A731, the posture can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, a through hole A741 surrounding the central axis of the support portion A730 is bored in the upper lid portion A740 that arranges (accommodates) the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later between the box-shaped portion A750 and the box-shaped portion A750. Therefore, in order to disassemble the upper lid portion A740 and modify the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the upper lid portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 is removed from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace the portion A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped portion A750.

At this time, if the support portion A730 is still assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A737 interfere with each other, and the upper lid portion A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, it is necessary to disassemble the support portion A730 before disassembling the upper lid portion A740. Then, as described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and the fixed gear SG is arranged inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), It is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is necessary to disassemble a plurality of members in order, so that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 can be illegally accessed. It can be made difficult, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunctions by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a directional view looking down from diagonally above, and FIG. 372 shows a directional view looking up from diagonally below (a directional view tilted by 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 is provided with through holes A741 bored vertically at the center positions on the left and right, and supports each transmission member of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (shape such as unevenness) is formed.

The box-shaped portion A750 is arranged below the upper lid portion A740 and is formed in a box shape in which at least the upper surface side is opened, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are arranged at the open position. A metal shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a and extending in the vertical direction coaxially with the central axis of the through hole A741 of the upper lid portion A740, and the upper surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A first detection sensor A752 composed of a detection device composed of a photocoupler system arranged in the box-shaped portion A750, and a second detection sensor composed of a detection device composed of a photocoupler system arranged on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. The A753, the drive motor AMT2 whose main body protrudes to the lower surface side and is fastened and fixed, the drive gear AMG2 which rotates by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and various sensors A752 and A753 and drive motors arranged below the bottom plate portion A750a. A relay board A754 for relaying wiring connected to AMT2 or the like is provided.

373 and 374 are exploded front perspective views of the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. 373 and 374 show a state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the vertical direction, FIG. 373 is shown in a directional view looking down from diagonally above, and FIG. 374 is shown from diagonally below. Illustrated in the direction of looking up.

The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to gears having two types of shapes (sizes). That is, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG2 having the same shape meshed with the small diameter gear PG1, and a small diameter gear PG2 thereof. It is composed of a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

Further, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshed with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter gear meshed with the large-diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small-diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large-diameter gear LG13 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2 meshed with the small-diameter gear PG11.

The large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream form the detected pieces A763 and A773 detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, respectively.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, the large-diameter gears are arranged via the small-diameter gears, but since the large-diameter gears are arranged again on the downstream side, both the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. If so, the absolute value of the rotation angle is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

In the present embodiment, the detected pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. Since the detected pieces A773 extending in the axial direction from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG1 from below are formed at four locations (90 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. From the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected in both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees, and the first detection sensor again. It returns to the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected in both the A752 and the second detection sensor A753. As described above, in the present embodiment, the detection timings of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are arranged is that the timing for functioning only one of the detection sensors occurs, but the details will be described later. ..

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of places, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for easy understanding. .. The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 is a transmission mechanism arranged in the lower layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and composed of four gears AMG2, PG1, PG2, and LG1 that are toothed with each other as described above.

On the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, a plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and one of the recesses A771 is formed with a protrusion A771a projecting inward in the radial direction. Will be done. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is formed so as to be different from the internal shape of the other recess A771.

The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 extending upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft rod portion A751. At the upper end of the tubular extending portion A772, a pair of notched portions A772a that are notched in a rectangular shape at symmetrical positions sandwiching the shaft rod portion A751 are formed. The notch portion A772a is a portion that fits with the projecting portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as notches having different widths from each other in accordance with the forming mode of the projecting portion A733.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is arranged below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and its upward extraction is restricted by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to remove the large-diameter gear LG1, it is necessary to remove the second detection sensor A753 that interferes in the vertical direction, so that the man-hours required to remove the large-diameter gear LG1 can be increased. This makes it easy to prevent the large-diameter gear LG1 from being inadvertently pulled out.

Further, by partitioning the region by the intermediate plate portion A750b, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. As a result, it is possible to prevent the large-diameter gear LG1 and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 from transmitting the driving force (on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path).

Next, the details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is a transmission mechanism arranged on the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and composed of four gears LG11, LG12, PG11, and LG13 that are toothed with each other as described above.

The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 transmits the driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the top) by the one-way clutch housed therein, and in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the top). It is configured to spin idle when it rotates, and includes a plurality of ridges A761 protruding downward from the lower side surface of the one-way clutch.

The ridge portion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits with the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2, and the corresponding portion A761a corresponding to the protrusion A771a has a shape in which the corresponding portion A761a is inserted in the radial direction (outward in the radial direction). It is said to be a linear shape with suppressed overhang). As a result, it can be configured so that it can be assembled only in a posture in which the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is provided with a through hole A762a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the tubular extending portion A772 of the small-diameter gear PG2 in the central portion, and protrudes into a large-diameter cylindrical shape from the upper surface side. A pair of notched portions A762c formed in a rectangular shape at opposite positions with the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 sandwiched between the cylindrical ridge portion A762b to be provided and the protruding tip of the cylindrical ridge portion A762b. A pair of inner protrusions that project along a straight line that passes through the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and is orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 with respect to a straight line that passes through the notch A762c and the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 in the top view. A unit A762d is provided.

The cylindrical ridge portion A762b is a portion that receives the lower end portion of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366) and regulates the displacement of the second support portion A735 in the dividing direction, and has a notch portion A762c and an inner protrusion portion A762d. Is a portion that is fitted with the protruding fitting portion A736b and the concave fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735, respectively, and is configured to be able to transmit the driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed over the axial direction by omitting the formation of the umbrella portion at the position where the pair of detected pieces A763 and the detected piece A763 have the same angle deviation in the same direction. It is provided with a lengthened gear tooth A764 and a columnar functional portion A765 which is arranged inside the large-diameter gear LG13 so as to be coaxially rotatable and is configured to be relatively rotatable with the large-diameter gear LG13.

The columnar functional portion A765 is arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to the rotation axis, and includes a pair of rotation restricting protrusions A765a supported by a support groove portion A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped portion A750. Here, inside the columnar functional portion A765, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with the large-diameter gear LG13 is housed.

That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the columnar function portion A765 is smaller (slight) than the reference, torque transmission is maintained, and the large-diameter gear LG13 and the columnar function portion A765 It is configured to cut off the transmission of torque when the load generated between them is excessive.

In the present embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 spins idle to block the drive force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. The torque limiter is used to generate resistance to prevent the rotation of the gear. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same manner as a resistance member that constantly generates resistance and a member that produces viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in the top view and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the drive force is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, the torque limiter. As a result, the transmission of torque is cut off and the resistance from the large-diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in the top view and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation continues to some extent (after rotating at a certain angle), the torque transmission is released. Therefore, before the switching occurs, a large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In the present embodiment, the lengthened gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in the top view is limited to the posture in which the detected piece A763 is in the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (see FIG. 373). By controlling the gears in this way, the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG 11 when the drive gear AMG 2 starts to rotate clockwise can be limited to a specific gear tooth.

By forming the specific gear tooth as an elongated gear tooth A764 in the axial direction, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the large-diameter gear LG13.

The first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of targets by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large-diameter gear LG13. First, when the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 rotates for driving force transmission and then stops, it can be detected that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch arranged inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idled to release the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above). ), It can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. That is, for example, when the cutoff (idle rotation) of the driving force transmission is insufficient due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a defect, it is large. When the driving force transmitted to the diameter gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 will rotate.

When the drive gear AMG2 is rotationally controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first detection sensor A752 notifies an error signal when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detected piece A763 is displaced. Can be used to detect problems with one-way clutches and torque limiters.

The mechanism for supplementing the release of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch by the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force faces the horizontal direction as in the present embodiment. be. That is, in the present embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members rotating around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be utilized in this configuration.

When the transmitted driving force has a component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to use the own weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted to suppress the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is released. In the embodiment, the own weight cannot be utilized, and there is a possibility that the driving force is transmitted even by a weak load generated by idling in the release direction of the one-way clutch.

Further, as a structure for suppressing displacement due to idling, it is conceivable to generate friction with other members, but in this case, it is necessary to generate a driving force higher than the friction to drive the member, which is another problem. May occur. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, a torque limiter is adopted so that the release of the driving force transmission due to the switching of the driving direction can be surely generated.

FIG. 375 (a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375 (b) shows the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, and the upper layer transmission mechanism. It is a front view of A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

The transmission of the driving force of the driving motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375 (a) and 375 (b). When the drive gear AMG2 is rotated by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) that fits with the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 also rotates.

When the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 runs idle, and the ridge portion A761 and the large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. By doing so, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains the same state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only in the lower transmission path DL1 transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force transmission in the upper transmission path UL1 transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is cut off. Therefore, of the tubular extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), only the tubular extension portion A772 rotates, and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b remains as it is. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the effect unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support portion A731 (see FIG. 369) fitted to the tubular extension portion A772 of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. ) Only rotates, and the second support portion A735 maintains the same state. Therefore, among the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, the first rotating member A721 (which is fastened and fixed to the first support portion A731). Only (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 maintains the same state.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise when viewed from above, as described above, a sufficient driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11, and the ridge portion A761 and the large diameter are large. The gear LG11 rotates in synchronization (integrally). That is, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only in the lower transmission path DL1 but also in the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, both the tubular extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369) rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the staging unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 are rotated. Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed to each other, rotate.

Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted by the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise on the top view, the large diameter gear LG11 rotates clockwise on the top view, and the large diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise on the top view in the opposite direction. Since it rotates, the rotation direction of the second rotating member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from above.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted by the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in the top view, the small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in the top view and meshes with the small diameter gear PG1. (See) rotates clockwise in the top view, so that the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 is clockwise in the top view.

That is, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is the opposite direction with the shaft rod portion A751 as the rotation axis. As a result, the player can visually recognize the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 as if they are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change) as compared with the case where the rotation directions are the same. Alternatively, it is possible to facilitate an effect such that the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be made to appear to rotate independently.

376 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 376 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 376 (c).

376 (a) and 376 (b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 376 (c) and 376 (d) show the initial state of the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721. The state (first state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown.

377 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 377 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 377 (c).

In FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (b), a state (second state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the first state is shown. In 377 (c) and FIG. 377 (d), a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the second state is illustrated.

378 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 378 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 378 (c).

In FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b), a state (fourth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the third state is illustrated. In 378 (c) and FIG. 378 (d), a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the fourth state is shown.

379 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 379 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 379 (c).

379 (a) and 379 (b) show a state (sixth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the top surface from the fifth state. In 379 (c) and FIG. 379 (d), a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the sixth state is shown.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the top surface from the seventh state, the first rotating member A721 returns to the initial state. That is, in FIGS. 376 to 379, one section (one cycle) of rotation of the first rotating member A721 is shown.

In the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376 (a)), the side of the shell portion A722 visually visible is referred to as the front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side thereof is referred to as the back shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the side visually recognized by the front view of the central rotating member A724 will be described as the member front surface A724F, and the opposite side thereof will be described as the member back surface A724B.

In addition, in FIG. 376 (a), FIG. 376 (c), FIG. 377 (a), FIG. 377 (c), FIG. 378 (a), FIG. 378 (c), FIG. 379 (a) and FIG. 379 (c). The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of the illuminated substrate A715 (see FIG. 364) is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 376 (b), 376 (d), 377 (b), and 377 (FIG. 377). In d), FIG. 378 (b), FIG. 378 (d), FIG. 379 (b) and FIG. 379 (d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes on this virtual plane VS.

Further, in FIGS. 376 (d), 377 (d), 378 (d), and 379 (d), arrows HL and VL schematically indicating the light reflection direction are shown. The arrow HL indicates the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell portion A722 and travels, and the arrow VL indicates the direction on the upper side of the central rotating member A724. The light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and represents a traveling direction.

As shown in FIGS. 376 (d), 377 (d), 378 (d), and 379 (d), the first rotating member A721 corresponds to one rotation counterclockwise in a top view. The direction of the arrow VL changes clockwise by one rotation when viewed from above. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is passed through the central rotating member A724 in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721. And the direction can be changed to the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721.

This is difficult to realize, for example, in a configuration in which light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the shell portion A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the shell portion A722, the change in the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotation direction as the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721.

Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the normal line of the surface when the light emitting means is arranged on the member front surface A724F or the member back surface A724B. The change in the traveling direction of the light emitted in the direction does not become a change centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (it becomes a change in the rotation direction having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected light emitting effect as compared with the case of adopting a configuration in which the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform the light emitting effect. For example, the rotation direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 are opposite to each other, so that the player can feel as if the rotation speed is higher than the actual rotation speed. You can feel it.

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 also rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface visible to the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back surface side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

That is, since the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as a region to be visually recognized by the player but as a region for another purpose, the purpose (in the present embodiment, light) is irrespective of the appearance. It is possible to select a configuration that makes it easier to achieve the purpose of reflection). For example, in the present embodiment, by intentionally exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to generate light reflection utilizing the gloss of the member surface of the fastening screw.

The aspect of the member surface of the fastening screw can be arbitrarily set. For example, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted black to make it easier to create a shadow, or the fastening screw member surface may be painted in a colored color to reflect the color, or the fastening screw may have an LED. A light emitting means such as may be attached.

The action of the light applied to the first rotating member A721 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. As described above, the illuminated substrate A715 provided with the light emitting means A715a for irradiating the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to form each side of the pentagon, and is arranged in a direction orthogonal to each side (inclined to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of the light. First, the illuminated board A715 (see FIG. 364) arranged above the first rotating member A721 will be described, and later, the illuminated board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

The illuminated substrate A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light passes through the light passing recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724 regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, by irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illuminated substrate A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721, it is possible to constantly irradiate the central rotating member A724 with light.

In the light emitting means A715a, where three LEDs are arranged side by side, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 may change depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, in the initial state (see FIG. 376 (b)), since the light passing recess A722a is formed in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a is arranged in parallel, the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also formed. Easy to reach the central rotating member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377 (b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a is arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is the light passing recess. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, among the light emitted from the illuminated substrate A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, it is possible to associate the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 with the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this viewpoint, in the initial state or the fourth state in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible from the front, the illumination substrate A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 is irradiated to reach the central rotating member A724. In the second and sixth states where it is difficult to visually recognize the member front A724F of the central rotating member A724 by maximizing the intensity of the light to be emitted, the center is irradiated from the illuminated substrate A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724. The intensity of the light reaching the rotating member A724 can be minimized. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in the front view and the magnitude of the intensity of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

The illuminated substrate A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 includes a light emitting means A715a in which the optical axis KJ is arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell portion A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721, but the location where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the first rotating member A721.

That is, a state in which the shell portion A722 is arranged between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)) or a fourth state (FIG. 378 (a) and 378 (a)). In FIG. 378 (b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell portion A722 and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

The shell portion A722 is curved in such a manner that the width becomes smaller toward the outside in the radial direction at the outer peripheral edge portion, and the connecting portion A722b connecting the edges of the openings of the shell portion A722 with an irregular arch-shaped bridge is provided. Be prepared. Therefore, even in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell portion A722 is curved at the outer peripheral edge portion of the shell portion A722 and the arch of the connecting portion A722b. By reflecting on the curve of, it can be advanced toward the player.

In addition, the shell portion A722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the player side (reflected along the arrow HL) in the state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721. Since the tilted posture is adopted, the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in the initial state and the state slightly deviated from the fourth state and the amount of light in other states can be emphasized. That is, the central rotating member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visually recognized in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, and the central rotating member A724 is displayed in a state where the angle is slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state. It is possible to execute a light emission effect of switching to a bright visual state.

On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, not all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 overlap, so that at least a part thereof. Light reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, the state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the illuminated substrate A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721 reaches the central rotating member A724 and the state in which the light does not reach the central rotating member A724 are determined. It can be switched in the state of the first rotating member A721. Thereby, even if the light emitting mode (for example, the blinking mode) of the light emitting means A715a is not controlled, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that makes the light reaching the central rotating member A724 visually recognized as if it is blinking.

For example, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a can be visually recognized as blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state. It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding a speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage is generated, the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate. The central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it is stopped regardless of the speed, but the blinking cycle of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be changed depending on the speed.

That is, the higher the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state, and the shell portion A722 enables the light emitting means A715a (center). Since the cycle in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the blinking cycle of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is in a state where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are arranged to face each other. , In the rotation axis direction view (or the optical axis direction view of the light emitting means A715a), the longitudinal direction is configured to overlap the shell portion A722. In the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is parallel to the member front surface A724F and the member back surface A724B (for example, the arrow LR direction, the arrow UD direction, or the arrow FB in FIG. 376 (a)). The lateral direction is defined as the direction connecting the member front surface A724F and the member back surface A724B (direction arrow FB in FIG. 376 (b)).

In other words, the central rotating member A724 has the thickness of the shell portion A722 in the longitudinal direction in the rotation axis direction view (or the optical axis direction view of the light emitting means A715a) in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotation member A721. It will be in a posture that goes inside (fits). Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by shielding the light by the shell portion A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. Therefore, for example, the light from the light emitting means A715a can be prevented from reaching the shell portion A722. It is possible to easily construct a situation in which the central rotating member A724 illuminates while the central rotating member A724 does not illuminate.

When the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotation speed. It is the same regardless of. As a result, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the first rotating member A721 visually recognized by the player from changing. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to prevent the first rotating member A721 from being visually recognized in the dark.

In this embodiment, the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed by rotating the first rotating member A721 while the light emitting means A715a is lit. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the light emitting means A715a to blink while having the same effect as the case where the light emitting means A715a itself is blinked. Therefore, the illumination substrate A715 can be downsized.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a that irradiates light from above the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a that irradiates light from the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are first with respect to the state of the first rotating member A721. It is configured so that how to illuminate the rotating member A721 is different. Therefore, by controlling them separately, it is possible to execute the light emission effect illustrated below.

For example, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b)), above the central rotating member A724. By controlling the light emitting means A715a arranged in the light emitting means A715a to be turned off and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 to be turned on or blinking, the central rotating member A724 is made to be visually recognized dark and the shell portion A722 is brightened. It is possible to perform a light effect to illuminate.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinks, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 is turned off. By controlling, it is possible to perform a light effect that brightly illuminates the central rotating member A724 and makes the shell portion A722 look dark.

Further, for example, light is emitted from both directions in the left-right direction, but light is emitted only from one side (upper side) in the up-down direction (reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side every half rotation). It is possible to perform a complicated light emission effect by utilizing the difference between the case and the case of being reflected to the back side). For example, the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 irradiates blue light, and the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 irradiates red light. Switching between the situation where the player who visually recognizes from the front is visually recognized by the blue light and the situation where the blue light and the red light are mixed and visually recognized every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. Can be done.

In this case, the cycle in which the appearance of the light changes can be arbitrarily changed by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while executing the control of continuously lighting without blinking the light. ..

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375 (b)), and the large-diameter gear LG1 arranged in the lower transmission path DL1 Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at 90-degree intervals, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) controls the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) every time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. By dividing this determination according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and separately determining the accumulated result, the state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined.

That is, for example, every time the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753 when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above. The value of the cumulative counter is incremented by 1, while the detected piece A773 is the second detection sensor when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotational direction (reverse direction) in which the shell A722 rotates clockwise when viewed from above. Every time it is detected by A753, the value of the cumulative counter is subtracted by 1.

If the value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, it is the initial state, if it is (multiple of 0 or 4) + 1, it is the second state, and if it is (multiple of 0 or 4) +2, it is the second state. If it is 4 states and (0 or a multiple of 4) +3, it can be determined that it is the 6th state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be specified, the initial state can be determined by determining the numerical value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2. The first rotating member A721 can be stopped in any of the two states, the fourth state, and the sixth state.

Therefore, the effect can be executed so that the postures in which the first rotating member A721 stops have different meanings. For example, it can be used as a staging means for notifying the difference in jackpot expectation or for notifying time information (such as changing the stop posture every two hours).

In the present embodiment, the case where the detected pieces A773 are formed at four locations at equal intervals has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pieces to be detected A773 may be arranged at non-equal intervals, may be formed at three places, at a plurality of places of 5 or more, or may be formed at one place.

380 (a) is a front view of the effect unit A710, FIG. 380 (b) is a top view of the effect unit A710 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 380 (a), and FIG. 380 (c) is a top view of the effect unit A710. It is a front view of the staging unit A710, and FIG. 380 (d) is a top view of the staging unit A710 in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (c).

381 (a) is a front view of the effect unit A710, FIG. 381 (b) is a top view of the effect unit A710 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 381 (a), and FIG. 381 (c) is a top view of the effect unit A710. It is a front view of the staging unit A710, and FIG. 381 (d) is a top view of the staging unit A710 in the direction of arrow D of FIG. 381 (c).

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotation direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and in FIGS. 380 (a) and 380 (b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. 380 (c) and 380 (b). 380 (d) shows the first state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 (b) show the second state of the first rotating member A721, FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d). ), The third state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotation direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, so that the second rotating member A728 also performs the first rotation. It rotates in the reverse direction at the same rotation angle as the member A721.

That is, in FIGS. 380 (a) and 380 (b), the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated, and FIG. 380 (c) shows. In FIG. 380 (d), the first state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the initial state is shown, and FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 (b) show. The second state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the first state is illustrated, and in FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d), the rod-shaped extending portion is extended. The third state of the second rotating member A728 in which the portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the second state is illustrated.

Since the pair of rod-shaped extending portions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetric shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise from the third state. do.

In FIGS. 380 (b), 380 (d), 381 (b), and 381 (d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic views (simplified shape views) for ease of understanding. ) Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIGS. 380 (a), 380 (c), 381 (a), and 381 (c), the outer shape of the illuminated substrate A715 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 380 (b) and 380 (d) are shown. ), FIG. 381 (b) and FIG. 381 (d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 is an illuminated substrate A715 (a substrate arranged two on each side) arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 as the second rotating member A728 rotates. It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from. Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the illuminated substrate A715 can be changed in accordance with the rotation of the second rotating member A728.

Here, unlike the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 made of a resin material having low light transmission, the second rotating member A728 is made of a light transmitting resin material, so that light is emitted. Instead of blocking the light as it passes through the optical axis of the light, it acts to cause a change in the refraction mode of the light and the color of the light. In the present embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is formed of a blue resin material, the light that reaches the first rotating member A721 at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis is colored toward blue. It can be changed to (a color mixed with blue).

In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape extending in the direction along the rotation axis and bending along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is configured so that it does not overlap with all of the optical axes of.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380 (d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illuminated substrate A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illuminated substrate A715 and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap, but on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (d), they are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illuminated substrate A715 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the other illuminated substrate A715 and the second rotating member A728 overlap. Does not overlap with. In the state shown in FIGS. 380 (b) and 381 (b), the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with the optical axis of any of the light emitting means A715a.

As a result, the central rotating member A724 is compared with the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to be overlapped or not overlapped. It is possible to increase the types of modes of light that reach. That is, the mode in which the light passing through the second rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724, the mode in which only the light arriving from the upper left and right passes through the second rotating member A728, and the mode in which only the light arriving from the lower left and right sides reach. It can be increased to a mode in which it passes through the second rotating member A728.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the second rotating member A728 and the optical axis are turned off. The appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed depending on whether the light emitting means A715a that overlaps with the light emitting means A715a is turned off and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned on. That is, it is possible to switch whether the central rotating member A724 emits light in a manner in which the color of the second rotating member A728 is mixed, or emits light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps with the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the upper left and right to the lower left and right depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728. Therefore, the color of the second rotating member A728 is similarly changed. It is possible to switch the portion of the central rotating member A724 to emit light in a mixed manner.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the light passing recess A722a in the top view. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728 and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. Head to A722a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 is turned off. It is possible to prevent the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

When this is to be realized by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 is turned on. It is necessary to control the light emitting means A715a to be turned off at the timing when the light axis intersects the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728), but in the present embodiment, it is arranged above the central rotating member A724. By the action of the light emitting means A715a, such control can be eliminated.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's field of view in a posture in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the effect function of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. (See FIG. 381 (a)), the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 is easily advanced to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect function of the rotating body A720 during continuous rotation.

Here, since the rod-shaped extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed from a rotationally symmetric shape, the shape (outer shape) in the front view is switched at 180-degree intervals. That is, the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 381 (a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). ..

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 that rotates inward of the second rotating member A728 does not have the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)) shown in FIG. 381 (a), the sixth state (see FIG. 379 (a)) is reached. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the posture in which the second rotating member A728 is arranged in front of and behind the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 381 (a)), the first rotating member A728 causes the first rotating member. Since the A721 is partially hidden, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state in which the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381 (a), the first rotation is performed while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated by 45 degrees in synchronization with each other. When the member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724. Is in the direction toward the front side (see the arrow VL in FIG. 377 (d)), and the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, while the first rotating member A721 is in the sixth state (FIG. 379 (a)). In the case of (see), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is the direction toward the back surface (FIG. 379 (d)). ), The central rotating member A724 is darkly visible to the player.

That is, the lighting mode of the light emitting means A715a is to change the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (the brightness of the central rotating member A724) while making the outer shape of the second rotating member A728 visible during displacement the same. It can occur without change. In this case, by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark with the high or low of the jackpot expectation of the special symbol lottery, for example, the second rotating member A728 in the state of FIG. 381 (a). When is stopped, the expectation for the subsequent operation mode can be increased, and the attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

Further, in this case, from the state in which the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381 (a), while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated by 90 degrees in synchronization with each other. , The member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from the upward posture to the front-back posture. Along with this, the direction of the light reflected through the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-back direction until just before the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reaches 90 degrees. (Changes in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721) On the other hand, when the rotation angles of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reach 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F moves in the front-rear direction. Since it faces (because there is no inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above), the anteroposterior component of the direction of the light reflected through the central rotating member A724 becomes close to 0, and the light reflecting direction returns to the vertical direction. ..

In this way, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is emitted by the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the components of the light in the anteroposterior direction when it is reflected. As a result, the longer the rotation time of the first rotating member A721, the easier it is to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state. Therefore, the first rotating member A721 rotates. It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the first rotating member A721 not only at the moment when it starts to rotate but also after it has rotated.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise from the top view from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 as it is. In this case, the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, so that the central rotating member A724 is easily visible in color. ..

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways at 180 degree intervals, and the state shown in FIG. 381 (a) is synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728. Since the first rotating member A721 can be rotated and only the first rotating member A721 can be rotated while maintaining the posture of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the center can be configured. As a way of showing the rotating member A724 to the player, a total of four ways of showing can be executed.

The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 not only functions as changing the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating the members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 377 (d)), the left flow path (game) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. It can be used as light that brightly illuminates the flow path formed in the left area with respect to the center of the left and right width of the area, and the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig.). 376 (d)) is a flow path on the right side of the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13 (a flow path formed in the area on the right side with respect to the center of the left-right width of the game area, mainly on the right side). It can be used as light that brightly illuminates the flow path through which the ball fired by hitting passes.

Further, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 378 (d)), the first arranged on the front left side of the third symbol display device 81. When the operating units A400, A400A, A400B, etc. can be used as light to illuminate brightly, and the light is reflected to the right rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379 (d)), the third It can be used as light that brightly illuminates the first operation units A400C, A400D, etc. arranged on the right side of the front side of the symbol display device 81. In this way, the light reflected through the central rotating member A724 can be switched in the direction toward different members. Therefore, by switching the direction of the light, the player's line of sight can be guided to different members (locations). Can be done.

Further, the second rotating member A728 is configured to have a vertical length capable of dividing the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in the front view into left and right (see FIG. 381 (a)). As a result, in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, in a state where the effect unit A710 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the inside of the annular front cover A711. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized through the area can be divided into left and right. That is, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member for executing the effect of the rotation operation but also as a member for dividing the display area of the display device when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotating member A721 can be rotated while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. , The effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 in a state where the display area of the display device is divided can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the upper surface, and reverse rotation (the first rotating member A721 is the upper surface). The second rotating member A728 is stopped in the driving mode (in the direction of rotation in the clockwise direction).

In other words, in one of the rotation directions, the action of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 by passing the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721. In the other direction of rotation, in addition to the action of changing the blinking cycle, the light emission mode (color,) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 by passing the second rotating member A728 through the optical axes arranged on the left and right. Width, etc.) can be changed.

In this way, by changing the direction of the rotational drive, the visibility of the light emitting effect can be changed. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728, the variation of the change in the emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is the first. 2 It depends on the resolution (switchable number) of the rotation speed of the rotating member A728.

Naturally, the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728 has a permissible limit, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variation in the change in the light emitting mode of light. However, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction is different. Since the second rotating member A728 is switched between operation and stop, even if the rotation speed is the same, if the rotation direction is different, the emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotation member A724 is changed. Can be different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 or the second rotating member A728 rotates only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotation directions are different (for example, when there is no second rotating member A728, or when the second rotating member A728 is absent, or when the second rotating member A728 is absent. Compared with the case where only the rotation direction of the 1-rotating member A721 changes and the 2nd rotating member A728 maintains the rotation, etc.), the change mode of the visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is doubled. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation in the appearance of the central rotating member A724.

The details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be described. As described above, the central rotating member A724 repeats the operation of turning the member front A724F upside down while maintaining the posture in which the member front A724F faces the front side.

Therefore, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding a speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage occurs, the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate. The A724 is visually recognized as if the vertically inverted shapes of the member front surface A724F are united in the front view. That is, in the present embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape having five corners is visually recognized as a star shape having ten corners.

In the present embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed from a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed from a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape in which the upside-down shapes are combined) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it is as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. Can be visually recognized.

Further, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either the upper or lower side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and the shape or the figure is inverted and combined to remind us of another concept. You may.

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangular figure on the member front A724F in such a manner that one side overlaps the rotating axis in front view above the rotating axis of the central rotating member A724, the central rotating member A724 is rotated to form an equilateral triangle. The diamond-shaped figure can be visually recognized by combining the top and bottom, and the lower end of the central rotating member A724 is overlapped with the rotating axis in front view. By drawing a character (figure), when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the inverted shapes are united up and down, so that the character (figure) of the number "3" can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect.

In FIG. 382, an example of an effect using the second operation unit A700 will be described. FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. FIG. 382 shows a state in which the effect unit A710 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 321), that is, a state in which the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. To.

In FIG. 382, a second state (see FIG. 381 (a)) of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is shown, and the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are annular fronts. In the area inside the cover A711 (inside the circular opening), the image displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

That is, the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize the second rotating member A728 as if it were rotating.

The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal may be arranged on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state in which the second rotating member A728 rotates may be displayed by the transmissive liquid crystal, or the front side or the back side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. An illumination plate may be arranged in the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate and the image of the third symbol display device 81 may be combined to be visibly configured as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including the means.

When irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a of the lighting substrate A715 in this state, the player anticipates the mode of the light effect in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the second rotating member A728 is in the stopped state. Since the light effect can be executed in the mode of the above, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected effect.

Further, this is not limited to the state in which the staging unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the overhanging position, and the same is true while the staging unit A710 is displaced up and down. For example, the effect unit A710 is configured so that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 at the retracted position (see FIG. 320), while the rotating body A720 is configured at the overhanging position. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized through the left and right positions of (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the effect unit A710 ascending toward the overhanging position, it is on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 and is inside the annular front cover A711 (inside the circular opening). ), The display area of the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized through the area of) is gradually widened. By displaying the second rotating member A728V on the above-mentioned display in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually visually recognized, the effect unit A710 is moved up while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. When controlled to, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player feel that the second rotating member A728 has started rotating before he knew it (the effect can be performed by utilizing the optical illusion).

In this case, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 to be visually recognized by the player depending on whether the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating or the second rotating member A728 is stopped during the ascending operation of the effect unit A710. On the other hand, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, there are cases where the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and cases where the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emitting mode (light reflecting mode) of the rotating body A720 to be visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to perform a highly unexpected effect.

Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 383. In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a has been described, but in the 23rd embodiment, the member passing through the optical axis KJ passes in the front-rear direction. It is configured as a slide member A2729 that moves in parallel. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 383 is a schematic top view schematically showing the first rotating member A2721 in the 23rd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable at a back surface side position that intersects the virtual plane VS and a front side position that does not intersect the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even when the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the rear side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position. The way light reaches the 1-rotating member A2721 can be changed. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-rear direction, it is difficult for the player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to grasp that the slide member A2729 is moving.

That is, the effect mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LEDs and the like constituting the light emitting means A715a are turned on while maintaining (retaining) the shape (outer shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in the front view. (How to shine) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to configure an unexpected effect without controlling the LED to be turned on.

The material of the slide member A2729 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be formed of a light-transmitting resin material, a light-impermeable resin material, or a metal material.

Next, the 24th embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission protrusion A463 has been described, but in the 24th embodiment, the pinned gear A3642 has been described. However, a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 are provided so as to project radially outward from the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 in a semicircular cross section. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that substantially divide the length of the arc wall portion A464 in the circumferential direction into five equal parts in the rear view.

In the 24th embodiment, the elongated holes (first elongated hole A422a, second elongated hole A422b, displacement side elongated hole A453, and transmission side elongated hole A454) formed to displace the first displacement member A440 are the first. By being formed longer than the 22nd embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement end on the overhanging position side in the 22nd embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 abuts on the arc wall portion A464 and movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the overhanging position. When the gear A3642 with a pin is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the deformed slide member A455 is pushed in the upper right direction from the state shown in FIG. Along with this, the long link A451 rotates, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced to the left of the overhanging position.

As a result, the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360).

In FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is shown at random, but the size is not limited to this. For example, they may all be provided with the same size, or external protrusions A3464 of different sizes may be formed. In this case, they do not have to be all different sizes.

In the present embodiment, the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed larger on the side closer to the transmission protrusion A463 than on the side farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, when the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhanging position and then continuously rotates the pinned gear A3462, the displacement caused by the contact between the external protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 is the previous two times. Compared to, the latter two times are smaller. That is, it can be produced so that the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 after reaching the overhanging position is gradually settled.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it goes away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arc wall portion A464, or vice versa. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes.

Further, a recessed portion that is recessed inward in the radial direction from the arc wall portion A464 may be formed at the formed portion of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. In this case, contrary to the description in the 24th embodiment, every time the recessed portion is arranged to face the projecting plate portion A456a, the deformed slide member A455 is attached to the coil spring SP1 in the lower left direction from the state shown in FIG. 384. The long link A451 is rotated by being pulled back by the force, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced to the right (retracted position side) from the overhanging position.

Further, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be different (shifted) by the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319). As a result, when the operation timings of the drive motors AMT1 configured in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are synchronized (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing). In the case), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be changed in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in the control mode in which each drive motor AMT1 is excited all at once, the displacement (small amount) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 with a displacement width predetermined by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. The timing of displacement) can be shifted.

For example, the timing at which each first displacement member A440 of each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319) reaches the overhang position (see FIG. 320) and the timing at which each second displacement member A490 is stretched. The displacement (small displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 after the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhang position while the timing of reaching the protrusion position (see FIG. 320) is the same. ) Can be adjusted to be sequentially generated clockwise from the first operation unit A400 arranged at the lower left of the front view.

As a result, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the front-view clockwise direction. Further, as described above, the mode of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a (see FIG. 320) can be changed in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, so that the player who visually recognizes the light can change the mode. It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in the clockwise direction of the front view. For example, an effect suggesting right-handed striking performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a big hit game (special game) can be performed by using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, the 25th embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 displaces the back surface side of the illuminated substrate A416 has been described, but in the 25th embodiment, the decorative member A4550 displaced to the front side of the illuminated substrate A416 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

385 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of FIG. 339 (a) of the first operating unit A4400 in the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 385 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line corresponding to FIG. 344 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation unit A4400 in the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of the above.

As shown in FIGS. 385 (a) and 385 (b), the decorative member A4550 is provided on the side surface of the plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 displaceably arranged on the front side of the front cover A410 and the main body portion A411. It is provided with a pair of guided portions A4552 guided by an elongated hole A4411b formed along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, and they are integrated with a pair of connecting arm portions A4553 formed on the outside of the front cover A410. It is connected and fixed to.

Since the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted through the elongated hole A4411b, the guided portion A4552 is allowed to be displaced only along the elongated hole A4411b. As a result, the posture change of the decorative plate portion A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to the slide displacement in the direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the elongated hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of projecting portions A4442g projecting from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 to the front side, and is the same as the configuration of the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In the present embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed so as to project inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can come into contact with the projecting portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the decorative member A4550 is interlocked with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the projecting portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 come into contact with each other during the displacement of the first displacement member A4440.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. The arrangement of the protrusion A4442g is set so that the can enter. As a result, the decorative member A4550 can be displaced in both the advancing and retreating directions (both left and right directions in FIG. 385) in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both the advancing and retreating directions.

According to the present embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure the timing for hiding the through hole A412 by the decorative plate portion A4551. This makes it possible to physically shield the light traveling through the through hole A412.

Further, unlike the first displacement member A4440 which is hidden on the back side of the front cover A410 at the overhanging position, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so that the player can see it without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 has the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 configured to have a different shape in each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured to have a series of meanings at the retracted position. In the hidden overhanging position, it cannot be visually recognized by the player in a series of senses, but it can be used as a means for solving the problem that it is difficult to obtain a sense of unity in the light emitting mode.

That is, by similarly configuring the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the drawn figure, the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the overhanging position and hidden by the front cover A410 (FIG. 385). The sense of unity of each first operation unit A4440 in (see (b)) can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

Further, the light emitting means is previously placed at a position visible through the through hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the overhanging position at the same position in the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400. A445b is arranged, and in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above, the light emitting means A445b is simultaneously lit by a plurality of first operation units A4400 to produce a light emitting effect with a sense of unity. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the elongated hole A4411b is formed by utilizing the gap region (the region on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the illuminated substrate A416. That is, the space created by limiting the forming range of the illuminated substrate A416 can be effectively used as a space for arranging the structure for realizing the displacement of the decorative member A4550.

The displaceable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the formation range of the elongated hole A4411b. That is, not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decorative member A4550 can be displaced only in the space created by limiting the formation range of the illuminated substrate A416. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of displaced members in the range in which the illuminated substrate A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

Further, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a posture change (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 in the range where the illumination substrate A416 is not formed (corresponding range in the front view).

The aspect of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a light-transmitting resin material, it may be formed of a resin material having low light-transmitting property, or an LED or the like or an illuminated substrate may be arranged inside. Further, a through hole formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction may be formed. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emitted from the illuminated substrate A416 through the through hole.

Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 386. In the 22nd embodiment, the arc wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, so that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the deformed slide member A455. However, in the 26th embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

386 (a) and 386 (b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 according to the 26th embodiment. FIG. 386 (a) shows a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is in the middle of displacement, and FIG. 386 (b) shows a state in which the displacement member A5001 is arranged at the displacement end.

The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line and is displaced to the left by an urging member (coil spring or the like) (not shown), and the displacement member A5001 is displaced along the displacement direction. The transmission member A5002 to which the driving force is transmitted, the axial support member A5003 rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and the axial support member A5003 from both ends to one side in the rotation direction. A thin-walled portion A5004 that is extended and connected to each other, a roller member A5005 arranged at the end opposite to the axially supported end of the shaft-supported member A5003, and a guide groove for guiding the roller member A5005. A5006 and A5007 are provided.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are formed by a first region A5006 extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 and a second region A5007 deviating from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 starting from the end of the first region A5006. It is composed. In the present embodiment, the second region A5007 is formed in an arc shape, but the shape is not limited to the arc shape as long as the shape deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.

The operation of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided through the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed toward the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386 (a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided to the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386 (b)), the portion in contact with the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin-walled portion A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001 Displacement to the left can be regulated.

Further, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 makes the position of the displacement member A5001 unchanged in at least one section while the roller member A5005 displaces the second region A5007 of the guide groove (the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is the displacement member A5001). By configuring it so as to be invariant in the displacement direction of the above, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be regulated in the above-mentioned one section.

Further, when the thin-walled portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to be crushed toward the shaft-supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin-walled portion A5004 and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed even after the contact between the shaft-supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released.

Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 and is supported so as not to fall off from the fastening portion A475 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the wiring HC is displaceably supported by the support box portion A470. A case where the wiring HC is supported by the wiring guide member A6560 so as to be relatively displaceable will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

387 (a), 387 (b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the 27th embodiment. In FIG. 387, the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the retracted position, in FIG. 388, the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the overhanging position, and in FIG. 387, the second displacement member A490 is arranged. 2 The state in which the displacement member A490 is arranged at a position (rotated by about 45 degrees) between the retracted position and the overhanging position is shown in the figure. In FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b), and 388, the rear plate portion A480 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 and the support box portion A6470 are used. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 or the rear plate portion A480. In the present embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 with the support protrusion A6471d projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the back surface side of the support box portion A6470. By fixing, the wiring guide member A6560 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so as not to fall off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in the shape of a long plate, and is arranged so as to face the back surface of the support box portion A6470 at a distance from the main body plate portion A6561, the lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561, and the front surface from the middle abdomen. It is provided with a plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting to the side (support box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the space on the front side of the main body plate portion A6561 can be increased, so that a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in the present embodiment, where the wiring HC is guided toward the back surface side (rear plate portion A480 side) by the ridge portion A491d2 and the binding band KB, the position between them (the position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged in, the main body plate portion A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 can be arranged. The rubbing with the plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed toward the rear plate portion A480 side at a position overlapping the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to make it easier for the situation to occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from being worn and improve the durability of the wiring HC.

The displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (a), the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the displacement of the substrate side connector A493c in the left-right direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large, so that the displacement of the wiring HC is mainly. It occurs in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is defined by the upper protruding portion A6562. That is, the projecting portion A6562 can function as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the substrate side connector A493c is mainly displaced in the left-right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction, so that the posture of the wiring guide member A6560 changes in a manner pushed by the wiring HC. In this case, although the wiring HC is wound around the wiring guide member A6560 with a margin, the lower limit of the displacement can be defined by the lower protrusion A6562. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering (hanging down) toward the pinion A517 or the reinforcing arm portion A518 side with excessive force.

In this way, when the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561) can be changed, the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastened). The design length of the wiring HC can be shortened as compared with the part A475 (see FIG. 356 (a)).

Explaining from another viewpoint as a policy of changing the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561), the displacement from FIG. 387 (a) to FIG. 387 (b) When the substrate side connector A493c is displaced (the wiring HC is displaced toward the protrusion A6552 side) in a manner approaching the protrusion A6552, the portion wound around the protrusion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced to the loosening side. On the other hand, in the displacement from FIG. 387 (b) to FIG. 388, the substrate side connector A493c is displaced in a manner away from the protrusion A6552 (the wiring HC is displaced toward the side away from the protrusion A6552), so that the wiring HC is displaced. The portion wound around the projecting portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaceable when the state of FIG. 387 (b) and FIG. 388 changes.

For this reason, when the portion wound around the projecting portion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced to the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC to the tightening side (to the side where the wiring HC is expanded). It can be said that it is configured so that it can be displaced to the side (to be displaced). As a result, it is possible to prevent the radius of curvature of the curve of the portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC from becoming excessively small, and it is possible to prevent excessive deformation (breaking, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC. ..

According to the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 which is not connected to the second displacement member A490 is displaced according to the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, it is a member that is interlocked with the wiring guide member A6560 and is visibly arranged by the player in any of the states of FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b), and 388 (for example, the third member). By disposing the decorative member (configured so as to be overhanging on the right side of FIG. 387 (a)) of the symbol display device 81, the effect can be executed by the decorative member displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wiring guide member A6560 is stopped while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates further (because the timing of the displacement is offset), the decorative member is as if the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if it is displaced independently.

For convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is shown in a mode in which the wiring HC is wound once (a mode in which the wiring passes twice between the pair of projecting portions A6562), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the wiring HC may be configured to pass (not be wound) only once between the plurality of projecting portions A6562.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs down is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the staging (for example, the staging of a "non-pushable button" can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end point and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower push-in end, the convex leg portion If the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 It is possible to increase the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed with the specified pressing method. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button and prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut on the accommodating member 5430 while the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the accommodation member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated and the effect can be lively, the player can change the effect mode (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Since it is possible to recognize (difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 are arranged so as not to be in contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 continue. It is desired that both the case where the arrangement is possible and the case where the contact is possible are generated, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is fixed in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by making the path bend back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the direction of pulling the speaker connection wire 453 outward from the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H abuts more than that. In the range of length, there may be a configuration in which a step is provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, a range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T, the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip side main body portion 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction, or may be a position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction in which the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 intersect with the opening direction of the opening) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in a left-right direction view. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491. By making it difficult to perform fraudulent acts that cause the tip to invade the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent acts, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent acts. Here, examples of the suppression of fraudulent activities include suppression of fraudulent activities themselves and suppression of obtaining profits from fraudulent activities (successful fraudulent activities).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the play fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the play fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second staging member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides and moves by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not the 600 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it can be restricted that the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not abut on the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged due to the collision of the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin with the metal board surface support device 600 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light radiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a state in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, the effect can be diversified by switching the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that overhangs the inside of the center frame 86.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost openings 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side on one side and on the other side. Consider switching between the case where it is placed on the front side and the case where it is placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged facing the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is increased, the amount of light is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (low brightness, low light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal display or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-like (narrow state) light is emitted to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal display. As a result, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is placed at the position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss incurred by the gaming machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged opposite to the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance by causing the inclined surface 2803T to enter the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is a direction in which the light is inclined upward in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. This makes it possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the direction of tilting upward, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in the direction of the player, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

Further, both a device formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and a device formed near the center of the left and right may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for dealing with the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for dealing with the problems (ease of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is arranged above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable) has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an acoustic device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured to be impossible for the player to operate and produces a vibration effect, an illuminated board that performs a light emission effect, or a board box. It may be something that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount directed within the operating load of the operating device 10300 and the magnitude of the frequency with which the load is applied. May be.

Further, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed can be obtained in terms of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. Can be done. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to be along the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially, for example, in a top view.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 is projected below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 and can be used as a finger rest when carrying the front frame 10014 has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed longer in the vertical direction than the fingers of the worker carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, since it is possible to insert a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 (it can be used as a finger hook portion), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. ..

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operation device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that generates an elastic urging force may be used, or a device such as a damper for the purpose of damping vibration may be used.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 lack flexibility and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated in the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by the drive motor around the lever support shaft 10331d1 has been described, but various aspects of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, a load may be transmitted from a rotary gear rotated by a drive motor to a lever member 10340 by a simple load transmission of a gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotary cam) that does not approach the gear mechanism is interposed in a transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the load can be freely rotated when an overload occurs.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in the direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operation load is applied to the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation part that does not operate on the plane is arranged (for example, if there is an operation part that pushes in the diagonally left and right directions), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation part is set. The direction to be found (for example, the intermediate angular direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening is performed for the operation portion where the operation instruction is frequently performed (ignoring the operation portion where the operation instruction is rare). You may set the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are united by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive, or it may be combined by fitting by matching the shapes.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (direction along the vertical direction) and the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 are in line with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, since the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the vibration of the vibration device 10366, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration is generated. can. Further, the mode of the vibrating device 10366 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a linear motion type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by configuring the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be irradiated with the light emitted from the predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover change as the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 change. It is possible to change the appearance of the light visually recognized through the cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that the bending can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity in the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened in that direction. The difference can be large.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right streaks D24a to be along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be made different.

On the contrary, the formation direction of the left and right streaks D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation member is opposed to the bending. It is possible to increase the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the 10310 is arranged in the upward position. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be made different.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled therein. In this case, when assembling to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, it is possible to exert the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw is a plate extending above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. It may be configured to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the portion. In this case, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 not only at the time of the ascending displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 but also at the time of the descending displacement, and the load can be dispersed.

In the 17th embodiment, in the V-shaped design member 6450, the dimension of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b is fitted with respect to the thickness dimension of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although the case where the film is formed with a possible thickness (dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be shorter than the size of the gap (may be configured in a dimensional relationship in which a gap between members is formed at the time of assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, it is possible to prevent contact (collision) between the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of powder (dust).

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is formed in a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582, and the facing plate portion 6651 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with the shape so as to fit each other at the time of assembly. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partition member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 toward the front side in a state where the partition member 6560 is positioned at the position in the assembled state.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the facing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in the cross-sectional view has been described, but the main point is that the distance increases toward the front side, and this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed from a curved shape.

In the 17th embodiment, the milky white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind the transparent lining member 6548 formed from the colorless and transparent resin material to the player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a. Although the case where the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily visible as a series of regions by making the color of the above visible is visible, the case is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a may be formed in a milky white color in advance by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that inclines downward toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that inclines downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by selecting the placement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the side on which the displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the 17th embodiment, the configuration in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured in such a manner that the front-rear width thereof is variably driven, and the degree of compressive force that may be generated due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven so as to shorten the front-rear width in such a manner that the rear side edge of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 can be connected even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. It is possible to still generate a gap between them, and it is possible to make it difficult for a compressive force to be generated. Since the degree of holding the illuminated substrate 6570 can be lowered because the compressive force is less likely to be generated, the degree of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the illuminated substrate 6570 in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 may be deformed can be changed, and similarly, to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570. It is possible to change the appearance of the illuminated light.

In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is shortened at normal times (the space between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is left), and the front-rear width is widened by the drive control to support the partition member 6560 and the back surface. It may be configured to change the situation so that a compressive force can be generated between the member and the member 6580.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that support the illuminated substrate 6570 by sandwiching them are laminated on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the illuminated substrate 6570 may be arranged below the back support member 6580, the illuminated substrate 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member away from the acoustic device 6610), or the illuminated substrate 6570 may be fastened and fixed. The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 inserted through the partition member 6560. In any case, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illuminated substrate 6570.

Further, the back support member 6580 (and the audio device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other. Therefore, the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 in the closed state. It is possible to easily replace the illuminated substrate 6570 and return the misalignment.

In the 17th embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated, so that the fastening screw is loosened. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the above is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light travels near the head of the fastening screw and the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of shadows, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw is found compared to the case of grasping with abnormal noise. Can be made easier.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is set to be inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a direction that is inclined to the left or right with respect to the front-back direction, or a portion that is inclined up and down or left and right may be mixed.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 are formed from a shape extending linearly in a front view has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a curvedly extending shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a grid shape.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface to suppress the diffusion of light from the side surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light-shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of the light traveling to the fin 6735. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if you cover the entire side surface, you can emphasize the light on the front side edge, and if you cover a part of the side surface (for example, if you use a light-shielding tape with polka-dotted holes), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape, it is possible to improve the effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side in the horizontal staging device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended to the back surface side, it may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Even in this case, the intensity of light in the vicinity of the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the light traveling along the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front side end portion of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of light in the front view of the fin 6735. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (cutout, etc.) may be formed so that at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 is emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in the present embodiment, the side surface is inclined in such a manner that the thickness of the fin 6735 gradually decreases toward the front side, so that the light of the fin 6735 is before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. By making it easy to reach the side surface repeatedly, the light may be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the fastening position of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is configured to be small has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the claws may be fitted or meshed with each other based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being reduced by the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 slides due to the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the coupling foundation member 18810 so that the illuminated substrate 18830 can slide even by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (direction along the direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-back direction) are different, the displacement mode of the illuminated substrate 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, the player can perform a silent effect that can generate slide movement of the illuminated board 18830 while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring the illumination board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the player who touches the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in the situation favorable to the player occurs, the interest in touching the operation device 10300 can be improved.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 is supported in a floating (sliding) manner in the vicinity of the operating device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 6570 of the upper staging device 6500 may be supported so as to be floatable. In this case, the rod member may be floatably supported by a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 toward the front side, or the rod member fixed to the wall portion of the acoustic device 6610. It may be supported so that it can float. Further, the slide direction is not limited to up and down, but may be left and right or diagonal.

In the 19th embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to be along any of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, in the middle). The reference line X19 may be configured to follow the direction of (angle).

Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of vibration generation and the operation frequency of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions. When the frequency of occurrence of operations is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. ..

In the 21st embodiment, the case where the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured so as to be difficult to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation device 10300 may be configured so that the vibration is transmitted to the same degree as the vibration transmission to the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 21410. In this case, the vibrating device 21500 can vibrate a plurality of objects.

In the 21st embodiment, the case where the front surface portion of the overhanging portion De3 to which the protrusion portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is formed by a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the front portion of the overhanging portion De3 may be formed by a plane that is inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied from the overhanging portion De3 to the vibrating device 21500 (the normal direction of the front portion of the overhanging portion De3) is the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, so that the vibrating device 21500 vibrates. It is possible to add a component in the direction intersecting the front-back direction (vertical direction) to the time displacement (particularly the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibrating motor 21510 of the vibrating device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction. A mode of collision can be configured (in a non-guided direction intersecting the guided direction of 21534), and the mode of vibration can be complicated.

In the 21st embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ridge portion 21534 may be formed along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line having an arbitrary shape. .. Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided to the ridge portion 21534 when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is generated can be arbitrarily set.

In the 21st embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is co-tightened through the support hole 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be slightly increased so that the fastening force is not applied to the support hole 21428. As a result, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 can be made difficult to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates. Since it is possible to avoid this, it is possible to execute the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed in the rear case A310 and the end face is arranged facing the base plate A60 has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of light visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be blurred while maintaining the rigidity in the state where the base plate A60 and the rear case A310 are assembled. can.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the back case A310 is formed in a box shape in which the front side is open has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the back case A310 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge is formed by a columnar portion extending from the bottom portion on the back side to the front side (the wall portion is not formed). ) May be configured. In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the rear case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (first operating unit A400 and second operating unit A700).

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the portion adjacent to the game board A13 is formed in a linear shape instead of a surface on the right side portion has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side portion. Further, when the linear portion is formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right may be lower than that of the other.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the metal plate-shaped member 75 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate may be arranged on the inner side (game area side) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, by forming the metal plate along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73, the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate and the game area are provided. It is possible to provide a function of guiding the flowing ball. Further, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be arranged in the gap.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the front protrusion portion A86f capable of contacting the game ball is projected from the back side to the front side of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, a flange portion extending from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and a ridge portion may be provided from the back surface of the flange portion to the back surface side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down to a position closer to the front side of the game area, the ridge portion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the front surface of the illuminated substrate A416 and the projecting piece A417i do not abut each other and a gap is formed in the state where the illuminated substrate A416 is assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417 has been described. It is not always limited to this. For example, the front surface of the illuminated substrate A416 may be brought into contact with the projecting piece A417i, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be placed between the front surface of the illuminated substrate A416 and the projecting piece A417i. ) May be interposed so that the load can be transmitted from the projecting piece A417i to the illuminated substrate A416. As a result, the illuminated substrate A416 can be stably supported.

In the 22nd embodiment, the second region AC2 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side in the region of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operating unit A400, and the second region of the plurality of first operating units A400 is arranged. Although the case where the AC2 is configured to surround the third symbol display device 81 from above is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second region AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third symbol display device 81, or the second region AC2 may be configured to be displaceable so as to reach the front and back of the third symbol display device 81. It may be done, and it may be configured by any arrangement.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the illumination substrate A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an illuminated substrate and a diffuser plate on which light emitting means such as an LED that irradiates light to the front side may be arranged on the guide plate portion A430 or the support plate portion A420. Thereby, the light emitting means can be configured to be hidden from the player by the arrangement of the first displacement member A440.

Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the illuminated substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even with this configuration, the same effect can be achieved. In this case, the illumination substrate A445 may be configured not to be arranged on the first displacement member A440. For example, a single or a plurality of through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440 so that light can pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, the position where the light emitted to the back surface side of the first displacement member A440 leaks can be changed.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 displaces one side of the illuminated substrate A416 or the diffuser plate A415 (the illuminated substrate A416 is not cut off in front view) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the illuminated substrate A416 or the diffuser plate A415 may be displaced so as to pass (cut through) in front view. Further, it is not necessary for the entire first displacement member A440 to enter the back side of the diffuser plate A415 in front view, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the back side of the diffuser plate A415 in front view. May be.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the illumination substrate A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illumination substrate A445 may not be arranged on the first displacement member A440. In this case, by arranging the illuminated substrate on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating the front side with light, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid portion A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442c are arranged. The light that has passed through can be configured to be visible to the player.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is regulated by the arc wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pinned gear A462 is separated from the deformed slide member A455 will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463 is arranged at a position away from the deformed slide member A455, and the gear A462 with a pin is moved to the position where the arc wall portion A464 should be arranged. A shutter member configured as a separate member may be configured to project, and the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 may be restricted by abutting against the shutter member.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the plurality of guided projecting portions A455c arranged on the deformed slide member A455 are arranged so as to be offset in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, a plurality of guided projecting portions A455c may be arranged on the same straight line as a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, or may be arranged so as to be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x in the front-rear direction. In any case, the posture of the deformed slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length of the arc wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 from the transmission protrusion A464 is shortened (at the same time, the protrusion plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with the contact with the arc wall portion A464). By reducing the angular width restricted to the arc wall portion A464 by the deformed slide member A455, the first displacement member A440 is stretched in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It can be displaced from the output position to the retracted position side. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is settled in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A440 are adjusted. It is possible to avoid interference with A490.

Further, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side, whether it abuts on the transmission protrusion A463 or the end portion of the arc wall portion A464 opposite to the transmission protrusion A463. Depends on the operating mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 (which may be constant speed or variable speed) and the stop timing so as to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side can be determined. The case where the deformed slide member A455 (displacement transmitted portion A456) abuts on the arc wall portion A464 and the case where the deformed slide member A453 abuts on the transmission protrusion A463 can be made different.

Here, it is assumed that the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) that transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with at least one of the arc wall portion A464 or the transmission protrusion A463, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, when the arc wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are arranged in a predetermined position, a fixed wall portion is formed so as to project toward the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) along the direction A416x. You may have. In this case, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side abuts on the arc wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 when the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) abuts on the arc wall portion A464. It can be different depending on the case and the case of contacting the fixed wall portion.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is arranged on the outer portion of the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation shaft of the reinforcing arm portion A518 may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the inside of the cylinder and reach the substrate side connector A493c. In this case, it is possible to prevent the portion of the wiring HC arranged on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) due to the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a flexible member having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 and formed of a flexible material may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members does not have to be one, and may be a plurality. In this case, even if the wiring HC is pulled excessively and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load generated on the wiring HC can be alleviated by deforming the flexible member.

Further, the wiring HC is supported not by the fastening portion A475 but by a simple columnar portion (a portion not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480. Further, a binding band loosely wound around a fixed portion separately formed on the main body box portion A471, the rear plate portion A480, the wiring guide member A6560, or the like may be used. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 is not fixed, but may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified.

Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may be caused in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, the wiring HC can be prevented from getting into the eyes of the player by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the direction opposite to the overhanging position as it approaches the overhanging position.

The method of displacement of the fastening portion A475 may be such that the fastening portion A475 is displaceably supported in the elongated hole, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to be tiltable with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is desirable that the rear plate portion A480 is formed with a guide groove, a notch or an interlocking portion so as to allow the displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening portion A475.

Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, the fastening portion A475 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support wall portions formed in a wall shape on both the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC and restricting the passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall portion.

In the 22nd embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back surface side, and the other end is arranged on the front side of the board-side connector A493c. Although the case where the connector is connected to the third connector A416e3 from the back surface side has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be arranged inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending to the side surface of the rear case A310, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the substrate to which the other end portion is connected may be arranged on the rear plate portion A480 arranged on the back surface side of the substrate side connector A493c. In this case, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, it is configured to be recessed from the end surface of the detected plate portion A455e that abuts on the transmission protrusion A463 toward the facing arrangement portion A456b, and the rotation angle of the pinned gear A462 is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction. It can be displaced to the overhang position and then returned to the retracted position side. As a result, by switching the length for driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position and the arrangement is maintained, and the displacement mode is stretched from the retracted position. It is possible to switch to a mode in which the displacement is made to the ejection position and then the displacement is further returned to the retracting position side.

In the 22nd embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 have been described as paths in which the driving force is transmitted by gears, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a cam, a gear belt, or a linearly moving slider.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate A715 that irradiates the rotating body A720 with light is formed of a flat plate-shaped member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a sheet-like substrate formed in a sheet shape from a flexible material. In this case, the substrate having the light emitting means for irradiating the rotating body A720 with light can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is arranged at a position that is always visible to the player has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotating body A720 may be configured to be movable to a position invisible to the player. In this case, with the rotating body A720 arranged in an invisible position, the first rotating member A721 is laterally rotated on the vertical axis with respect to the second rotating member A728 (the second rotating member A728 is stopped). By starting the synchronous rotation in the state and moving it to a position visible to the player while continuing the rotation, it is possible to pay attention to the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 during rotation. .. As a result, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is being continued when the effect of associating the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 with useful information (for example, jackpot expectation) for the player is executed. It is possible to improve the attention to the rotating body A720.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be tilted forward from the lower end portion, and the effect unit A710 is moved up and down when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the overhanging position to hit each other. The staging unit A710 may be configured to change to an inclined posture by being in contact with the load. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the posture of the effect unit A710 by arranging the second displacement member A490. The configuration that allows the staging unit A710 to be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the staging unit A710 may be connected to the elevating portion by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the elevating portion.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 is made of an impermeable material and shields the light emitted toward the central rotating member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the shell portion A722 may be configured to have a light transmitting portion. Thereby, the relationship between the posture of the first rotating member A721 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be finely adjusted.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape extending linearly (the radius of curvature corresponds to infinity), or the rotation axis of the gear member to be meshed may be arranged in parallel with the fixed gear SG. .. Combining a first effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be meshed intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG and a second effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be meshed is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG. With, it is possible to execute a complicated production.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the first region AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed closer to the outside of the operating unit A300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by forming the illuminated substrate A416 into a C-shape that is recessed from the outside to the inside in front view, the first region AC1 is formed toward the inside of the operating unit A300, and the second region AC2 is formed as the operating unit. It may be formed at a position closer to the outside of the A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player to a position closer to the outside of the operation unit A300.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an illuminated substrate is arranged below the rotating body A720, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the illuminated substrate is conducted to the second support portion A735 and is conducted to the second support portion. The second rotating member A728 supported by the A735 may be reached, and the second rotating member A728 may be made conductive and then visually recognized by the player. In this case, unlike the second support portion A735, the first support portion A731 that supports the first rotating member A721 is difficult to transmit light, so that the second rotating member A728 is illuminated without illuminating the first rotating member A721. Can be executed.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to realize with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A728 that can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a transmits light. Therefore, it is difficult to control the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a so as to reach only the second rotating member A728 and not the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by conducting the second support portion A735 to make the light reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to realize with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the 22nd embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 arranged inside the rotating shaft is supported by the second rotating member A735 arranged outside the rotating shaft. The case where the A728 is arranged inside the rotation axis has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 is rotated so that the opposite side of the side supported by the first support portion A731 extends to the outside of the rotation axis and the second rotating member A728 is covered from the outside of the rotation axis from the extended end side. An extension may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inside of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate around the outside of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be executed.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a changes due to the rotational displacement of the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a is configured to change when the central rotating member A724 expands in a state where the posture does not change or the moving body projects from the inside. Also good.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to move forward and backward by linear motion (slide movement) between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a. Further, the light emitting means A715a may be configured to be disposed on the predetermined member.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed to the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the central rotating member A724 and the shell portion A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be driven separately, or it may be configured so that the timing of being driven by the same drive source and the timing of different drive can be switched.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be composed of a plate-shaped member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis in the direction of the rotation axis, and may be configured so that the timing of overlapping with all of the optical axes occurs. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence of the posture of the second rotating member A728 on the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

In the 22nd embodiment, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in the front view is different, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape that has the same shape in front view when the posture is changed by 180 degrees. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in the shape of the shell portion A722.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ directed on the virtual plane VS has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. Further, in this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light emitting means A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light emitting means A715 (not limited to the front-back direction, but a mixture of front-back, left-right, up-down displacements). However, it may be configured so that the virtual plane VS changes depending on (may be). In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is lit is changed while suppressing the change in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in the front view. be able to.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where a plurality of contact positions of the pinned gear A3462 with respect to the deformed slide member A455 are arranged in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position where the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the deformed slide member A455 and the position where the outer protrusion A3464 comes into contact with the deformed slide member A455 by forming the protrusion tip portion of the transmission protrusion A463 with a large diameter. May be configured to shift in the front-back direction.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 of the pinned gear A3642 abut against the deformed slide member A455 at the same position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the projecting plate portion A456a is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the inner end (opposite side of the detected plate portion A455e) in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction A416x in the rear view), and is extended thereof. A wall portion orthogonal to the side surface of the portion may be configured to extend toward the pinned gear A3462.

In this case, by arranging the orthogonal wall portions so as not to abut the arc wall portion A464 but to abut the outer diameter protrusion A3464, the orthogonal wall portions and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 are arranged. The deformed slide member A455 can be prevented from being displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x at the time of contact with the pinned gear A3462, and a load in the rotational direction (load in the braking direction) can be generated.

Further, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the lateral direction (L-shape) at the end in the longitudinal direction, the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the displacement thereof. The first displacement member A440 may be configured to be displaced in conjunction with the displacement. That is, the deformed slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, so that the transmission protrusion A455b intersects the direction A416x. The displacement may be configured to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided projecting portion A455c are engaged with each other in the direction A416x to form a deformed shape. The displacement of the slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be regulated. As a result, even after the contact between the projecting plate portion A456a and the arc wall portion A464 is released, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be regulated.

The displacement generated in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to cause a displacement along the direction A416x, or it may be configured to generate a displacement in a direction intersecting the direction A416x.

In the 24th embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is described in a semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be rectangular, triangular, semi-elliptical, or arbitrary. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured so as to taper (the width does not increase) toward the outer diameter.

This also applies when a recess is formed in place of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be arbitrary, it is preferable that the shape is configured so as to taper (the width does not increase) toward the inward diameter.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the axis of rotation, or may be asymmetrical. In this case, if it is configured with an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external protrusion A3464, the side surface of the extension tip side of the arc wall portion A464 (the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464) is the extension base end side. The angle of the arc wall portion A464 with respect to the outer peripheral surface may be smaller than that of the side surface (the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464).

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by the contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition that the pinned gear A3462 is rotated at a constant speed is the displacement opposite to the retracted position from the overhanging position (beyond the overhanging position). It is possible to increase the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side as compared with the speed when displacing toward the overhanging side). That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction of displacement.

When the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, it may be displaced beyond the overhanging position to the opposite side of the retracted position. Illustratively, when a recess is formed in place of the outer protrusion A3464, the first displacement member A440 moves toward the retracted position as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the recess. An example is a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the overhanging position as the deformed slide member A455 is pushed out to the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 and slides to move after the displacement.

Further, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position side, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protrusion shape, the deformed slide member A455 slides and moves by the protrusion dimension. 1 After the displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position, the contact between the outer diameter protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 is released, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and moves to the first displacement. An example is the case where the member A440 is displaced to the overhanging position (retracted position side), and when a recessed portion is formed instead of the outer protrusion portion A3464, the deformed slide member A455 is provided by the size of the recessed portion. An example is a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position side due to the displacement.

In the 27th embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged closer to the rear plate portion A480 side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be arranged at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (position closer to the support box portion A6470), and the projecting portion A6562 may be projected toward the rear plate portion A480 side. .. Further, the main body plate portion A6561 may be configured to have a thin wall (for example, a sheet shape). In this case, a wide displacement area of the wiring HC can be secured.

Further, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is formed from a long shape has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, since the member can be arranged between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, the possibility that the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 are displaced in synchronization with each other to suppress the rubbing is increased. can do.

In the 27th embodiment, the case where the projecting portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the long direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the main body plate portion A6561A is configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the projecting portion A6562 by the load received from the wiring HC. May be. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) is displaced in the elongated direction of the main body plate portion A6561 by the protruding portion A6562. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that is rotationally displaced. In this case, since the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed. Can be moderately reduced.

Further, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported by the shaft has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the slide movement may be performed, or the rotation and the slide may be combined to move.

Although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotationally displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one or more rotations.

In the 27th embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged on the back surface side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box portion A6470, while the through elongated hole for guiding the projecting portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470 (arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561). A long hole) may be formed, and the protruding portion A6562 may be configured to protrude toward the back surface side of the support box portion A6470 through the long hole. In this case, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be provided as compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, from the gap size between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480). Can also be configured as a thick member).

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means overhangs the player from the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for automatically operating the operating means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction facing the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the movement. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided with a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and irradiating light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's viewpoint as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means without aiming. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing a player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state. A game in which a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from a second state to a first state is provided, and an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from a first state to a second state is provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 By pushing back the operating means with the two driving means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes light operation, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. On the other hand, if the operation means is firmly supported, the movement of the operation means itself. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. It is characterized in that the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operating means is arranged at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for staging, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. , There is a possibility that a large load will be generated on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the effect is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, if the player holds the button when the button is driven "as an effect", one phase of the button operation will elapse. Then, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the process, if he / she moves from the end of the first phase, the period in which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started to move because the load is released" is reduced. It comes off.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. The first means is provided with a disengagement load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the first means, disengagement by the disengagement load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. An example is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load given from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operably arranged by the operation of the release load means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it can be switched whether or not it operates synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation period is different, so that the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. When this is done, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, it is necessary to detect the operation of the operating means before operating the vibrating means when performing an effect of transmitting the vibration immediately after operating the operating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). Depending on the mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contacting state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means is lower than the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. ..

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving force generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means and the transmitting means. There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the game machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the rotation axis, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotating shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

In the game machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goat with thread. Pachinko machine H>
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of No. 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball passes through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Pachinko machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the gaming board and applies a pushing force, so that the gaming board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Pachinko machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different between the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first place and the second means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the second place. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the invading member.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry control portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means is provided with a eliminating means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative board with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Pachinko machine K>
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates the light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means which is fixed to the member of the above and is configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, it has not been reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant. The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed depending on the unit.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Pachinko machine M>
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means arranged so that at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and sent to the outside of the gaming machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a staging means arranged below the support fastening means and producing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the staging means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the staging. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Pachinko machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. In a gaming machine provided with a second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state that displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in the following state. The gaming machine N1 is provided with a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is set. , It can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a staging device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, it has not been reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are formed by a shape based on the shape of the solid object having different directions, so that the second opening is formed. It is possible to easily remove a solid object through the portion.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine including a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means includes a protruding shape portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged is removable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed from a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion projecting from the bottom surface of the first supporting means functions as a portion on which a finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first supporting means slips off the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

The arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited at all, and may be any as long as it is projecting to the outside of the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected to the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that detachably supports the first support means, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. The gaming machine P2, which is characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion is projected downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to hold the first support means. This makes it possible to easily attach / detach the first support means to / from the second support means.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the position may be closer to the front side when the first support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or the other when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position closer to the end, or it may be a position opposite to the shaft support position with respect to the plate for storing the game ball.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first supporting means includes a recessed shape portion recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means has a gap between the recessed shape portion and the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged to face the concave shape portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the supporting position between the first means and the first supporting means is made a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means can be used. It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shavings, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first supporting means are rubbed due to the misalignment. That is, it is possible to prevent the powder from accumulating and clogging the movable portion to cause a malfunction, or the powder from accumulating at the detection point of the detection device and erroneously detecting the powder.

In this way, the concave shape portion is not only when it is not operating (for example, when the glass frame is opened to clear an error, when maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also when it is operating (for example, when playing a game). It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside a range in which the protrusion shape portion is provided.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the portion where the concave shape portion is formed becomes extremely thin as compared with other portions, and it is possible to prevent the strength from becoming insufficient. can. Further, since the concave shape portion is formed behind the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion can be bent and deformed in the inward and outward directions, so that even if a large load is applied to the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion is formed. It is possible to suppress cracking of the shape portion.

The load applied to the projecting shape portion includes, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the first. An example is a load applied by a collision of something moved by a player or a clerk (such as a Senryobako) near a support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means on the outside of the recessed shape portion, and is supported in such a manner that it abuts on an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising a contacting means and an operating unit positioned by the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the effect of the recessed shape portion can be maintained, and the supporting thickness of the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means can be sufficiently secured. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the contact means is provided with impact damping means which is continuously formed between the contact means and the operation portion so as to be able to attenuate the impact, and the impact damping means is the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the abutting means can be attenuated by the impact damping means, and a distance is provided between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated by the deformation (deflection) of the abutting means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact damping means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion of the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of recession is larger than that of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of denting is exemplified by, for example, the depth of denting (the larger the degree of denting, the deeper) and the width of denting (the larger the degree of denting, the wider).

If the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, the concave shape corresponding to the other portions. The degree of recession of the portion may be formed to be large.

Further, the recessed shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the load generation frequency, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming store, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined production state or a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It may be based on the size of.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom surface portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. The gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is made to stand alone. (1) Even in a storage method in which the support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without the first support means falling down.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first supporting means can be easily self-supported by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the portion other than the projecting shape portion from becoming dirty.

<Points regarding deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
In a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by a player, a first supporting means that supports the operating means, and a second supporting means that supports the first supporting means or at least one of the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first supporting means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means such as an effect button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load at the time of operating the operating means is insufficient, and it is called the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second supporting means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second supporting means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, there is a possibility that a gap may occur between the operating means and the second supporting means in the front side portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second supporting means is lowered excessively, the deformation of the first supporting means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (sink) excessively, the support mode of the operating means can be simplified.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the front-back direction, a rotation (rotation) direction, or a combination thereof.

Further, as the mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to the case where the normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center side of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force increases toward the center side of the bottom, so that the support of the operation means is effective. Can be done.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first supporting means is made of a flexible material, and is configured to be able to hold a support portion that supports the operating means and a gaming ball, and the operating means via the first supporting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having a gaming ball holding portion connected to the gaming machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding portion.

Further, when the first support means is composed of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding portion by a floating structure, the vibration when the operating means is operated is held as it is. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball from being transmitted to the unit, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced and generating an abnormal noise each time the operating means is operated.

Various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the vibration transmission may be prevented in the first direction while the vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to execute the effect by the sound.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player, and the first supporting means is frontal as the connection position with the gaming ball holding portion is farther from the operating unit. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position where the position is likely to shift due to the operation, the connection position is moved toward the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the position shift. While suppressing the generation of gaps between the ball holding portion and the first supporting means, by arranging the connecting position on the front side (closer to the player) in the distant position of the operating portion, which is a position where the position is unlikely to shift due to the operation. , It is possible to improve the design.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first supporting means, and the operating unit and the main body portion. The operation unit is formed wider than the connection portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connection portion. Even the gaming machine Q4, which is configured to surround the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while ensuring a sufficient size of the operation unit.

Various aspects of the method for fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, respectively, or include one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let me.

In addition, various embodiments are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, it may be fitted or fastened.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, the impact generated when the operation unit is operated can be dispersed and handled at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact during operation.

In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that the fastening directions of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersect with the operating direction of the operating unit.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the fastening direction during the operation of the operation unit, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation and the split body is fixed. Can be prevented from being released.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the direction which intersects with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined direction). Direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is along a predetermined straight line (pushing operation or pulling operation), the direction intersecting the operating direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is illustrated.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed during the game, at least among the plurality of planes intersecting each straight line, at least. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a direction intersecting any of a plurality of plane intersections, that is, a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the split body are configured at a plurality of points, and the first plane including one fastening point and the second plane including the other fastening points are configured as different planes. A game machine Q6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the slingshot from being applied, it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being displaced at the same time at both fastening points or the fastening being loosened.

The fastening portion of the split body may be arranged at a location where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Even in this case, since another fastening point is arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, the split body may be displaced or the fastening may be loosened due to the load during operation. Can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means include a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating unit, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the split position of the split body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by being installed.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operating unit moves when the operating unit is operated at the divided position. And the divided body rub against each other, and powder (dust, etc.) may be generated. Since the detection means is arranged away from the divided position, it is possible to prevent the detection means from detecting the powder (dust, etc.). can do. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of erroneous detection.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means interferes with the split body in the split direction view on the side that separates in the split direction (proximity separation direction) of the split body when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but before the assembled state, for example, during the assembling work. For example, when the split body is formed of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during the assembling operation, so that interference with the interference means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly is maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere in the assembly direction view (for example, the direction view in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to accept the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first supporting means is received in the receiving recess, so that the first supporting means is affected by the misalignment of the operating means. Even if the position is displaced, the operating means and the first support means can be returned to their original positions at an early stage by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first supporting means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be secured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, it is cramped. It is possible to prevent the feeling of pachinko. As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and improve the operability of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extension direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaks is different for each region, so that the first supporting means having anisotropy in rigidity is used. Can be configured.

The design criteria for the extension direction of the streaks are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during the operation of the operating means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extension direction of the streak may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
In a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be capable of emitting light, the light emitting means is characterized by having a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. Gaming machine R1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It will be dark because it is not possible to produce light emission at the places where it is used. In this case, in the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where the game can be brilliantly produced becomes narrow. In the first place, since the size of a game machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like is roughly determined from the standard, it is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can pass the vibration of the vibrating device, and the light emitting means is arranged at the vibration generation location of the vibrating means. Can be approached to. As a result, the front region can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibration generation location of the vibrating means, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The mode of the vibrating means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output voice, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and any means configured to be vibrable (passively vibrable) with respect to a load of an external force may be used.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in the speaker, an discharge port from which the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker seen in a bass reflex type speaker is discharged, a path connected from the vibrating portion to the discharge port, and the like are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a vibrating device by rotational drive (for example, a vibrator) or a vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving.

The aspect of the proximity arrangement is not limited in any way, and any aspect may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be laminated on the vibrating means, and in that case, the stacking direction may be a front-rear direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, and left-right inside from the left-right end. It may be inclined in the direction.

The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that a plurality of the vibrating means are provided, a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged is provided, and the light emitting substrate is laminated and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. ..

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, misalignment, etc.) due to the influence of vibration generated when the vibration means outputs sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by different the vibration means for outputting the sound, so that the type of change (variation) of the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed. ) Can be increased.

The number of light emitting substrates may be one or a plurality. In the case of a plurality of sheets, at least one light emitting substrate may be laminated and arranged on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibrating means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means emits light along the stacking direction. The gaming machine R3 is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of the board.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means.

The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, it can be said that they are not fixed if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply to prevent them from coming off).

Moreover, the expression "non-fixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is specified (the front-back position is stable and small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front-back direction with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, it is possible to suppress displacement in a direction different from the front-back direction (up / down / left / right).

As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibrating means, so that the position stability of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, the fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and the said. A regulating means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction is provided, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. The gaming machine R4 featuring.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are laminated does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some fixing means are loosened), the displacement is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

This makes it easy to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which progresses. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared with the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibrating means is changed for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made to.

Thereby, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement region in different modes, an excellent effect can be obtained. For example, as the first refraction means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface light emitting means for producing a uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means for showing the player high-luminance light by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge) is arranged. This makes it possible to perform a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) differs for each region.

The mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the mode may be a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or a mode defined by the mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

For example, as for the positional relationship between the plurality of vibrating means and the light emitting substrate, the region that is equidistant from each vibrating means is such that the influence from one vibrating means is canceled by the influence from the other vibrating means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw is provided. The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the portions and the facing portions are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the advancement of the fastening screw is restricted by the facing portion, so that the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw becomes loose. Can be prevented from doing so.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the correspondence after the tightening screw becomes loose. For example, when the fastening screw is loosened, the loosening may be detected electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibrating device. If it is vibrated when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or the loosened part may be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate and the connecting means to be fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member are provided. The connecting means is characterized in that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily caused than the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. The gaming machine R7.

Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extension and contraction, and the favorable influence and the disadvantageous influence are periodic. It becomes unfavorable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is shortened is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in the situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, the situation where a load is generated in the connecting means). While setting the load in the facing direction of the member and the second member to be low, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration by the vibration means, and the light is emitted. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the board.

It should be noted that the mode in which deformation easily occurs in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs from direction to direction, or the magnitude of the load generated on the connecting means may change from direction to direction.

Further, the mode of switching the loads in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured so that the direction of vibration can be changed between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. The featured gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of actions of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical concept of light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the sides and back of the member>
A first aspect comprising a light emitting means configured to emit light and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine S1 includes a light guide means and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to incident LED light from an end portion of the plate-shaped member and emit it from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See publication). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and the light emitting mode is weak in order to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the staging effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, since the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can suppress (changing). Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light guide means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as frosted glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made of frosted glass, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. It may be a member of the above aspect.

The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that the light guide means is configured so that the light emitting means changes stepwise in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed of a flat plate. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and the light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged are provided, and the accommodating means supports the light emitting substrate and the light guide means. The support means is fixed at least in the first position, and the shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in a direction.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still attached, so that the position of the light guiding means with respect to the supporting means can be easily positioned. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the positional deviation between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guide means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch the light guide means, while the light guide means may be visible, or the player may not be able to touch or see the light guide means. You may.

When the first position is formed at a plurality of places, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in a long direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape and the first position is arranged at the end in the long direction, so that the fixing of the first position is loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

More specifically, the correction of the misalignment of the light guide means is compensated by the deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction, or by the slip that tends to give a strong load, so that one of the long directions is compensated. Even when the fixing is loosened only at one end and the fixing is maintained at the other end, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light guide means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened due to the bending deformation of the light guide means. Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, and the load is applied to the light emitting substrate in that state. By giving, it is possible to correct the misalignment of the light emitting substrate.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the basis of the design is that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means is mechanically regulated so as not to be completely displaced in the irradiation direction from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate. The adjustment width may be sufficient to correct the misalignment in the light (adjustment width is small), and the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means is the irradiation direction based on the design that secures a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position that is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same time of the effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with different playability (for example, when a gaming machine having different specifications is configured), the mechanical configuration of each part is not significantly changed. Since the mode of the light emitting effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means, the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The non-fixed mode is not limited in any way. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixing. Further, the end portion is an expression of intention to avoid being limited to the end portion. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the long direction end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A gaming machine S5 comprising a portion, wherein the misalignment prevention portion includes a fixing portion with the support means.

Here, where it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, so for the purpose of preventing it, it is also for light emitting. It is preferable to configure the board so that the positional deviation between the substrate and the supporting means does not easily occur.

Considering the effect of staging, it is preferable that the light guide means is easy to align when the misalignment occurs on the premise that the misalignment with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is also considered that it is better to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if the position shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated, and it is considered good to hold the light guiding means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a place that the player can touch, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of the strength. As described above, the support mode expected for each means was various.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the action of the misalignment prevention unit facilitates mutual alignment at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. Not only can this be done, but it is also possible to facilitate the maintenance of the positional relationship between the light guide means and the shielding means during the game.

The mode of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, the unevenness that can be fitted with the same shape may be used, or the unevenness that can be fitted may be such that the shape along the assembling direction is invariant, and the side closer to the mating member is tapered. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to the main body portion, the separation extension portion extending from the main body portion to the side separated from the light emitting means, and the outer shape of the extension portion. The light emitting means is provided with a facing extension portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, and the light emitting means is arranged in such a manner that the light incident on the facing extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 characterized by having a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting portion from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion, the separation extension portion, the facing extension portion, and the other portions. The boundary between the light and the light can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be performed at the boundary of a short width.

The mode of total internal reflection is not limited to any one. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, a combination thereof, and the like.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means forms an lining portion to be overlaid on the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the lining portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7 comprising a frame portion to be formed, and the facing extending portion extending from the covering portion and being coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of the light emitting effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the facing extension portion is provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of shining the opposite side of the light emitting direction.

In the gaming machine S7, the facing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end portion from the frame portion. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being separated.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S7, an end portion where light can be incident on the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion where the incident is restricted are provided based on the design of the facing extension portion. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light emission effect using the frame portion.

In any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projection positions of the facing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension portion with respect to the irradiation direction is set. The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension portion and the separation extending portion.

According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the detached extension portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emitting intensity of the light emitting means It is possible to produce light emission without giving a sense of discomfort to the player while keeping the same. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the detached extension portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top light emitting means. Point to change the way of shining depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light emitting means configured to emit light and a light receiving means capable of receiving light are provided, and the light receiving means includes a first light receiving means for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine T1 is provided with a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to incident LED light from the edge of the planar member and emit it from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and the light emitting mode is weak in order to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the staging effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different (change). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light receiving means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as frosted glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made of frosted glass, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. It may be a member of the above aspect.

2.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodating means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is provided with a partitioning means for partitioning a region, and the light receiving means is configured so that the lighting method changes for each region partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting method of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting method of the light receiving means changes abruptly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to play. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates.

In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the light emitting substrate is aligned by being supported by the partitioning means from a direction that opposes the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment between the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light emitting substrate at the time of use. And the partitioning means can be prevented from being displaced from each other.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partition means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of a light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by having a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting portion and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partition means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect the light, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partition means is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and includes a non-insertion through hole that does not accept the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through hole is provided. The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into surface contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means. Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is characterized in that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is formed larger on the side far from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player sees the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side and a punching boundary surface portion intersecting the light conducting portion, and the punching boundary surface thereof is a light conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extension direction is arranged at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, it is possible to easily make the wall thickness of the light conducting portion uniform. This makes it easy to maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the optical conduction portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. The featured gaming machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of a point light source without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Points consisting of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction and the first fixing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to a direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is lowered.

For example, when a fastening screw to be inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, it is not possible to arrange a light emitting member such as an LED at a position where the fastening screw interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount in which the fixing means is arranged. The size of the light emitting substrate will be limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction in which they are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared with the case of being inserted, it is possible to secure a wider production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction are provided on the outer surface. Game machine U2.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing portions of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in the fixing force.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are made of a resin molded product and the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclining each other and the pulling direction are different. Since it will be tilted, there is a risk that the fixing force will be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the tilted side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common part. can do.

The configuration of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening preventing means for preventing the loosening of the fixing, or a loosening regulating means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying a fixing defect of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3, the notification means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that it is possible to quickly detect that the fastening screw has loosened.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying, such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. As structural means, for example, a transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, a light effect changing means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen from the outside, and a light effect changing means. An example is a vibration notification means that makes a player notice by contacting a vibrating part of a vibrating device to generate an abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration.

In any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means has the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between them.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate a resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the composition can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means arranged on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, and the first surface is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. The gaming machine U6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in front view can interfere with each other, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area where the pachinko machine can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, wherein in any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, respectively.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, so that the one fixing means is used. It is possible to prevent deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the rear case>
In a gaming machine including a gaming board and facing means having edges arranged facing each other on the gaming board, the facing means is provided with a proximity portion arranged close to the gaming board on the left and right edges. , The gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a gaming board constituting a gaming area and a back case in which a movable unit or the like is arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the internal space of the rear case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the gaming board and the rear case, so that a sufficient space for arranging movable units and the like can be secured. There was a problem that it became difficult.

In particular, in a right-handed machine such as a right-handed game in a probabilistic state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area, so the right side. It has been required to secure the internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (the flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the struck game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, since the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetrical, the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the gaming board can be asymmetrical. Instead of sacrificing the internal area of the opposite means, it is possible to easily secure the internal area of either the left or right opposite means. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board can be improved, a sufficient space for arranging the movable unit and the like can be secured, and the degree of freedom in the effect of making the player visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end portion of the game board (for example, a right-handed flow path) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a mobile accessory, or can be illuminated by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

The mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

The mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, a region where the connecting portion (contact portion) used for connecting to the game board may not be formed in a wide range may be secured, or the area occupied by the connecting portion (contact portion) may be suppressed and then the connecting portion (contact portion) may be secured. A contact portion) may be arranged.

Further, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetric, the direction of formation of the proximity portion may be left-right asymmetric, and the functional portion (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed) arranged in the proximity portion may be asymmetric. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations may be asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is arranged facing each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement portion. The gaming machine ZA2, which is characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured to be asymmetrical with respect to the gaming board. It should be noted that the mode in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the formation direction may be opposite to the symmetrical direction (the same direction for both left and right), or the formation direction may be a direction that intersects left and right (for example, an orthogonal direction).

Further, as the forming direction, for example, an extension direction in which the plate-shaped portion is extended (direction in which the plate-shaped portion is provided), a recessed direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (direction of cutting), and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface which is a surface facing the gaming board and an facing side which is a side facing the gaming board, and is compared with a portion of the gaming board with respect to the left side portion. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the gaming board with respect to the right side portion has a larger proportion of the facing sides than the facing surface.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the left-right width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side portion of the gaming board as compared with the left side portion of the gaming board.

The gaming machine ZA4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the displacement of the gaming board or the facing means in the facing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. The arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts on the opposing means), or may be arranged at a position away from the facing means (including a position where it abuts on the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where the game board or the facing means is in contact with at least one of them).

In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side of the gaming machine ZA5.

According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the gaming unit as a whole without providing a special member in the facing means.

In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps with the outermost surface of the facing means in a front view. The gaming machine ZA6.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the design freedom inside the gaming board, so that the space of the right-handed flow path in the gaming area can be secured. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means is provided with a non-contacting portion that is non-contacting with the gaming board at the edge portion on the gaming board side of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction. Characterized gaming machine ZA7.

According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contact portion can be used as a place for arranging the driving device of the variable winning opening, or the driving device thereof. It can be effectively used by using it as a wiring path connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or by using it as a place for arranging a light emitting device.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed of a resin material, the facing means includes a directing means disposed between the gaming board and the gaming board, and the front end of the directing means is the above-mentioned. The gaming machine ZA8 is characterized in that it can be arranged on the front side of the front end of the facing means.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the staging means can be expanded to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable accessories>
A game comprising a light emitting means for irradiating a predetermined light emitting region with light, and a displacement means configured so that a first position that at least partially overlaps the light emitting region in a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of a displacement section. The gaming machine ZB1 is characterized in that the light emitting region includes a possible region that is visibly configured in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap each other in a front view (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacement means are only visually recognized independently, and the staging effect utilizing the overlap is insufficient. That is, since the displacement means is arranged on the front side of the light emitting means, the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in a different light emitting mode in connection with the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the staging mode.

The modes of the displacement means include, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (posture) of the displacement means, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means arranged in the displacement means, and the like. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement mode of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means and a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means. Examples of the displacement mode of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means side, a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means, and the like. The orientation (posture) of the displacement means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, and a case where the surface in between faces the light emitting means side. Illustrated.

As the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means side is turned on, blinks or extinguished, a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means is turned on, blinks or extinguished, and the like. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged in the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged in a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it can be configured when the light emitting mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player while keeping the light emitting mode of the displacement means alone the same. Can be changed suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged and a refracting means in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion is refracted so as to be refractable. The gaming machine ZB3 is arranged outside the possible region in a directional view, and the refraction means includes a first refraction portion that overlaps the possible region in a predetermined directional view.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refracting portion is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting portion and the color or light / darkness based on the displacement means. Can be revealed by.

Further, by narrowing the forming range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging a driving device for generating a driving force of other constituent members, for example, a displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement means is characterized in that the displacement at a position overlapping the possible region in the predetermined direction is larger than the displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied jointly by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

The magnitude of the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be used for comparison, positive or negative may be provided in opposite directions for comparison, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be used for comparison. The comparison may be made including the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and are displaced.

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that can be visually recognized from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which the width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes.

According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the position of the displacement means in the displacement section is the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible region. Can be changed by.

A gaming machine ZB6, wherein in any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window portion in which a liquid crystal display area is visually opened.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emitting mode of the possible region can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display region side.

It should be noted that the arrangement mode of the possible region is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the mode may be scattered around the window portion (including the case where there is only one possible area), or may be a circular (arc) shape surrounding the window portion.

A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the substrate is not provided with fastening means for fastening at an end portion on the possible region side. ZB7.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible region, and a shadow of the fastening means is generated in the possible region. It can be avoided.

The gaming machine ZB 7 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZB 7 is provided with an lining means that is covered in a manner of covering between the possible region and the substrate in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB7, the boundary position between the possible area and the substrate is hidden by the lining means, so that the visibility of light deteriorates near the end of the substrate. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

In the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, a substrate holding means for holding the substrate is provided, and the substrate holding means includes a gap forming portion for forming a gap in order to facilitate assembly of the substrate, and the gap forming portion is provided. A gaming machine ZB9 characterized in that it is closed in an assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming portion while achieving the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the gap forming portion. .. Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and may be used for positioning of other members.

In any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board includes a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible region side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, a load is applied to the wiring connected to the connector portion to generate a moment starting from the end portion on the possible region side. Therefore, even in a situation where the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be easily taken out.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displace the displacement means, and a drive means generated by the drive means can be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. In a gaming machine comprising a transmission means, the transmission means includes a transmission unit that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted portion of the displacement means, and the transmission unit is transmitted by the transmission unit in a driving state of the driving means. The gaming machine ZC1 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when the portion is not abutted.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example). See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while maintaining the posture of the displacement member. There was a problem of becoming.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the transmission unit is configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the displacement means even in the non-contact state, the transmission unit can be used for other effects while maintaining the posture of the displacement means. It can be used.

The mode of the transmission means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the drive means, or may be an embodiment exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other.

The mode in which the displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be urged by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, or it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-shaped member, or it may be in contact with a member having a function as a stopper to suppress it. It may be the mode that is done. Further, examples of the mode that can be suppressed include a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is reduced, a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is prevented (regulated), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a forming portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the forming portion is such that the transmission portion is not in the moving direction of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means. The gaming machine ZC2 is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion is extended from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the transmission unit and the displacement means becomes longer than the distance between the transmission unit and the displacement means. The gaming machine ZC3, which is characterized by being configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC2, a portion where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a portion where a load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially in the facing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means. Can be displaced.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means has a one-sided functional portion formed on one side of the displacement means in the moving direction with respect to the transmitted portion and the other side in the moving direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted portion. The one-sided functional portion is configured in the same plane as the movement locus of the forming portion, and the other-side functional portion is located outside the moving locus of the forming portion. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the forming portion can be set to one side.

In any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means are the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The gaming machine ZC5 is characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

The method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. It may be an embodiment in which the ratio of the driving force to be applied is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

In the gaming machine ZC5, the gaming machine ZC6 is characterized in that the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

The combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced in synchronization, or the transmission or interruption of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is configured to be reversed and synchronized. It may be the one that does not displace.

Further, when the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speeds of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the gaming machine ZC7 is characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be made visible to each other in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be visually recognized. Even when the effect area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective effect can be performed.

The mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of displacement means laminated in the front-rear direction may be extended to a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be such that a plurality of movable members pass through a common range while being stacked in the front-rear direction. It may be configured.

<The load generating part catches up and comes into contact with each other to prevent the stop position from shifting>
In a gaming machine including a first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a second displacement means configured to displace the first displacement means by being displaced in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means is The first displacement means includes a load generating portion that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded portion that receives a load from the load generating portion and generates the load. The gaming machine is characterized in that the portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction and can be brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example). See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may shift from the moving end, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the loaded portion during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion applies a load directed from the other side to one side in the predetermined direction in a state where the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. The gaming machine ZD2, which is configured to be able to be given to a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in a predetermined direction, the load generating portion is in a predetermined direction with respect to the first displacement means. Since the load in the direction from the other side to the one side is applied, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on one side in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating portion hits the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction from the loaded portion. A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by being in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating portion and the first displacement means, so that the driving force is stopped. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from the terminal positions while abruptly setting the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Further, by providing a portion for taking measures against a rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively, a portion different from the loaded portion that receives the load by each driving force transmission, the loaded portion is provided. Even if it is deformed, the fail-safe function can be demonstrated without any problem.

A gaming machine ZD4, wherein any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3 is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the second displacement means is regulated by the regulating means at one end in a predetermined direction. 1 It can be displaced independently of the displacement means.

The mode of the regulatory means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that enters and exits in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages with it, or it may be regulated by gravity or an urging force by an elastic member, or a part of the second displacement means. May be configured by.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the first displacement means is provided with a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means is the detection means. The gaming machine ZD5 is characterized in that the means includes a detected portion whose position is detected, and the load generating portion comes into contact with the detected portion.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact can be limited to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine the detection failure due to the damage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement time (maintenance time) of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generating portion to the predetermined portion intersects with the direction of the load applied from the load generating portion to the loaded portion. The gaming machine ZD6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, it is possible to facilitate a plurality of operating directions of the first displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at predetermined intervals in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when visually recognized from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. It is possible to narrow the area required for the arrangement between the and the predetermined portion.

<Technical concept to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of the following means>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area and a following means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined portion of the following means from entering the predetermined area side. The gaming machine ZE1 characterized by being provided with means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, by setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced, but the wiring is caught in the displacement means. In addition to the need to form temporary fixing parts that temporarily fix the wiring so that the wiring does not displace relative to each other, the displacement means are placed in place while the wiring is laid on the temporary fixing part. It usually takes time to assemble because it is assembled while doing it. This has a problem that the degree of freedom in design and the assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means prevents the following means exemplified for wiring or the like from being displaced toward a predetermined region side, so that the following means is rubbed against the displacement means and damaged. It can be suppressed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions in the displacement means, improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means, and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means is characterized in that the following means is supported so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs due to the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in a manner capable of being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacement means changes with the displacement of the displacement means. , The load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

The mode of the preventive measures is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means can be wound, or a claw-shaped portion on which the following means can be sandwiched. Further, when the preventive means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing the members to each other, or may be used for positioning when assembling the members to each other. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Moreover, the mode of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it is a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player. A band-shaped effect member that assists the effect may be used, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means may be used.

In the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be satisfactorily supplied to the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means greatly overhangs to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. ..

Further, it is not necessary to configure a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. As a result, the displacement means can be arranged in a small space.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means is provided, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means by the shielding means. In addition, the inward direction here means the inward direction when the edge portion in the front view is used as the outer shape.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at an outer edge portion of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the outer shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is secured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line passing through the first axis. ZE7, a gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from rubbing against each other, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

In the gaming machine ZE8, the guiding portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the void through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means as compared with the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following ends are directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that it is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a direction of pulling from one side of a predetermined region can be applied at both ends of the following means. As a result, the entire following means can be balanced with the load given by the guide unit.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventive means in a loosening direction by shifting the displacement means from the position before the displacement to the position after the displacement. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the displacement of the displacement means is absorbed by the loosening (slack) of the following means, thereby suppressing the occurrence of an excessive load on the following means. can do.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means in which the following means is arranged between the ZE1 and ZE11 is provided, and an arranging portion for aligning the arranging means is provided. The gaming machine ZE12 characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement locus of the following means.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, it is possible to prevent the alignment portion from eroding the displacement space of the following means, so that the following means is given to the following means as the displacement means is displaced. The load applied can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means is set to have a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a displacement larger than that of the first displacement portion. The gaming machine ZE13 is provided with a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), and the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arranging means of the following means. Therefore, it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, and it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

The mode of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distances of the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the preventing means includes a protruding portion projecting from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means dripping by its own weight by the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical concept in which the displacement mode (transmission mode) changes with forward and reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means. The driving means is configured to be operable in a first driving mode in which a driving force is generated in a first direction and a second driving mode in which a driving force is generated in a second direction different from the first direction, and the displacement means. Is a gaming machine ZF1 characterized in that it is configured to be displaceable by a first displacement mode driven by the first drive mode and a second displacement mode driven by the second drive mode.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by a driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in the forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as such (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode between the first displacement means and the second displacement means only changes depending on the length for driving the drive device in the forward direction, and the drive directions of the drive device are exchanged in the forward and reverse directions. Even so, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in the effect of the effect is insufficient by adopting a device that can be driven in the forward and reverse directions as the drive device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. Therefore, a driving device capable of setting a plurality of driving force generation directions is provided. The effect of the effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is provided with a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through an optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. Can produce a gorgeous effect that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmission means, and the transmission means is the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode and the second driving mode. The gaming machine ZF3 includes a suppression region in which transmission of a driving force is suppressed, and the displacement suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression region.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppressing means causes the transmission means to be unintentionally displaced when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby causing displacement in an unintended displacement mode. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained high as compared with the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member. Therefore, it is possible to easily configure the displacement means having an appropriate displacement mode from the player.

The mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engaging device that generates viscous resistance such as a damper device, a resistance device that generates resistance by its own weight, or a case where the resistance by its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of the displacement means). (When the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling operation cannot be suppressed by the gravitational force, so for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance can be changed according to the displacement mode may be used.

The game machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmitting means in the suppressing region is lower than a predetermined speed. The resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means is a detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. ZF4 is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged so as to be detectable.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF3, is the detection means functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing the displacement in the suppressing region of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means? It can be used for both detection and detection.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced around the first axis, and a second displacement means that is rotationally displaced outside the first displacement means around the first axis. The gaming machine ZF5 is provided with a displacement means, and is configured to be capable of suppressing the displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the game machine ZF5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode, so that the displacement is suppressed. In this state, the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means to block the view, and the second displacement means is arranged outside between the player and the first displacement means to block the view. It is possible to configure two kinds of effect modes when the be able to.

A gaming machine ZF6 in any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, wherein the transmitting means includes a light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on a connection position side with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emission effect by conducting the light toward the displacement means. It can play the effect that makes it possible.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis and a transmission means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis and is the first displacement means. It is provided with a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the above, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means in the first axial direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second displacement means can be prevented from coming off by the first displacement means. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a separate arrangement of the retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
For the first operating means configured to be operable by the player, the second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. The gaming machine ZG1 is provided with a load generating means which is arranged on the second operating means side and is configured to be capable of generating a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the vibration device is arranged in each operation device, the space required for arranging each operation device is large, and the number of operation devices that can be arranged is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to an increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is used as the first operating means and the second operating means (that is,). , Multiple operating means) can also be used to drive. As a result, the space required for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of arrangable operating means can be raised. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be suppressed.

The mode of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means configured to enable vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means to generate a load at a predetermined cycle such as a pump, or a means composed of an arm member whose posture changes due to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of the load is not limited in any way. For example, a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state may be used, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be used.

In the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is arranged between the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG2.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means covers the first operating means at least partially from a predetermined direction. The gaming machine ZG3, which is characterized in that it is arranged in the setting means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the finger of the player who operates the first operating means is sandwiched between the first operating means. Therefore, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, in the process of moving the player's fingers by moving the fingers closer to the first operating means and releasing the fingers from the first operating means after the operation is completed, the lining means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass. By (arranging the lining means so as to cover it from the direction in which it easily interferes with the fingers), it is possible to configure it so that the load of the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player during the movement of the fingers.

Further, for example, by arranging the lining means at a position where the fingers come into contact with each other with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means can be increased during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that can be easily transmitted to the player.

It should be noted that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means. That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, an intervening means configured to intervene between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means so that the load can be transmitted to the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG4 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the first operating means side.

The gaming machine ZG4 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured so that the strength of load transmission can be changed by displacing the load generating means with the driving of the load generating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted via the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven as compared with when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means interlock with each other (vibration) due to the load given to the pachinko machine by the player, the first operation is performed when the load generating means is driven. It is possible to perform an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

In any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the gaming machine ZG6 is provided with a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means is provided with a guide unit for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. ..

According to the gaming machine ZG6, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as an unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding it in the desired direction, so that the load generation adopted to realize the desired operation (vibration) effect is adopted. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

The gaming machine ZG6 is characterized in that the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a crossing direction intersecting with a direction guided by the guide portion.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the switching state and the driving state (stable state) can be configured. The load generating means can be displaced in different ways. As a result, the effect of the load generation means can be improved.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which allows displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided so that the guiding direction by the second holding means intersects the guiding direction of the guide portion, or the load generating means may be located between the holding means and the holding means. It may be configured so as to interpose a flexible member, and displacement may occur due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for lining means (P9 policy 2)>
The lining includes a frame means formed in a frame shape, an lining means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibrating means arranged in the lining means and configured to be vibrable. The gaming machine ZH1 is characterized in that the means is provided with a permissible portion to which displacement is allowed, and the vibration of the vibrating means can be transmitted through the permissible portion.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a front frame and a vibrating means disposed on the front side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means to the extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration production. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, since the vibrating means is arranged in the lining means and the displacement of the lining means is allowed, the vibration can be transmitted to the player side via the lining means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by the displacement of the lining means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the frame means side. Thereby, the allowable degree as the vibration strength of the vibration means can be increased.

The mode of the permissible portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode premised on the displacement of slides, phosphorus, gears, etc., and displacement may occur due to the operation of slides, links, gears, etc. It may be flexible and may be displaced by being overloaded.

In the gaming machine ZH1, the lining means is configured such that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction. ..

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the permissible portion is maintained by the displacement in the horizontal direction, and the player puts his / her hand on the lining means in the direction of gravity with respect to the lining means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the lining means from being excessively displaced and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by keeping the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

In the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the lining means is configured in a bag shape with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in an open bag shape, the edge of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other. The contact area between the lining means and the frame means, which are in contact with each other and transmit vibration, can be reduced. As a result, the vibration transmission to the frame means side can be suppressed, so that it is possible to avoid the vibration being transmitted to the main substrate, the ball passage, and the main electric configuration arranged on the frame means side.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion disposed on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement is provided. The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that the portion has a lower deformation resistance than the support portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of the vibration transmission to the frame means side, and the arrangement portion further provides. It is possible to cause biting by utilizing the fact that the deformation resistance is low as compared with the case where the structure is rigid, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the displacement amount of the vibrating means to the frame means side. As a result, it is possible to easily displace the lining means in which the vibrating means is arranged.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the lining means includes a first lining portion and a second lining portion having a lower deformation resistance than the first lining portion, and the vibration means is a vibration means. The gaming machine ZH5, which is connected to the first lining portion and the second lining portion and is provided with a contact portion capable of locally contacting the first lining portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the contact position is obtained by locally contacting the first covering portion having high deformation resistance and the contact portion. Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second lining portion with respect to the contact position can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball launching operating means operated for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area is provided, and the lining means is at least between the gaming machines and the ball launching operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by passing through a predetermined member.

According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, vibration transmission to the ball launching operating means can be suppressed.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the accessory>
In a gaming machine including a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while leaving the outer shape of the irradiated means in a predetermined direction. The featured gaming machine ZI1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means mounted on a movable accessory and capable of executing a light emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a member that is displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means is not arranged, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is compressed due to the control and the size of the substrate is increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured so that the first position and the second position can be displaced, and the displacement means interferes with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring it so that it can be configured, the mode of the light emitting effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting effect without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for control data or the control circuit. can. This makes it possible to improve the method for realizing the light emission effect.

The mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be rotated, it may be a linear slide, or it may be a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement of the displacement means is a linear slide, the case where the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction is better than the case where the directions of the slide intersect with the predetermined direction. It is possible to easily maintain the outer shape.

The mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it is configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change due to the difference in posture. The relative projected area may change due to the displacement.

The mode of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or it may be slid on a plane so as to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, the position may be fixed, or it may be configured to be displaceable. The light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means in a displaceable state, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The displacement of the light emitting means may be such that the optical axis is directed to the irradiated means and slides in a manner of being close to and separated from the irradiated means, or the light emitting means is moved around the irradiated means with the optical axis directed to the irradiated means. It may be a rotating one.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the one that keeps the lighting state at all times, or the one that can switch between lighting and extinguishing.

The gaming machine ZI1 is characterized in that the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiation means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZI1, the difference in the irradiated means can be recognized immediately after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that the attention to the timing of the light irradiation can be improved. .. According to this, the irradiated means may be a displaceable means or a non-displaceable means.

The gaming machine ZI3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the irradiated means.

The mode of displacement, which is the basis of the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means, is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, it may be a momentary displacement, or it may be a slow speed (a slow speed that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm / min] or the like.

A gaming machine ZI4, wherein in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make the spots stand out by being illuminated by the light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that the irradiated means can be configured to reflect light in the same direction, but at least one of the light amount and the color of the light is different. ..

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. The gaming machine ZI6, which comprises a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the unshielded light emitting means, it is possible to irradiate the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , It is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being visually recognized darker than necessary.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means can be arranged at a shielding position capable of shielding the first irradiated means and the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiated means. The first irradiated means is provided with a configured second irradiated means, and the area of the light emitting means in the optical axis direction is compared with the case where the second irradiated means is not arranged at the shielding position. The gaming machine ZI7 is characterized in that the second irradiated means is configured to be smaller when it is arranged at the shielded position.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, it is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the first irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the irradiated means with light on a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the irradiated means is provided with a driving means configured to be able to synchronously drive the irradiated means and the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means, and the irradiated means is being displaced. The gaming machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position. ..

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means ( For example, the switching timing of light and dark) can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

The displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis that is orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or at least one of the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the displacement means is irradiated from the light emitting means depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the degree to which the light travels toward the player.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 Z2 is a gaming machine characterized in that, in any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 In any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of placement efficiency. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving placement efficiency.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is arranged at a position different from the first operating means configured to be operable by the player and the first operating means so that the player can operate the gaming machine. A configured second operating means and a load arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means and capable of generating a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means. It is equipped with a generation means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the load generating means is arranged between the first operating means and the second operating means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first operating means is operated to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means is used. It is arranged in an lining means that covers the first operating means at least partially from a predetermined direction.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the placement efficiency can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the space between the first operating means and the second operating means can be effectively utilized.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the player's fingers can be efficiently loaded.
<Explanation of code>
10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13, A13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means, part of frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate, part of game ball holding part)
51 Operation handle (part of the first operation means, operation means for launching a ball)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,9145,10145 Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
159 Open / close regulation part (blockage regulation part)
173 Long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of the second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous striking discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft part (Shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (urging means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343d Coil spring (urging means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (convex part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming ribs (bending means, projecting portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of the opening)
487 Passage forming ribs (bending means, projecting portion)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (means to be connected)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 513c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib part (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Board surface support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotating rear claw member (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibrating part, part of repulsive means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodating means)
8326a 1st through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326b 2nd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326c 3rd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate (regulatory means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation unit)
10321 Left front cover (part of the first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of the game ball holding part)
6411 Main body (allowable part)
6413 Protruding shape part
6414 Concave shape part
6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Top lid member (part of connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of the first light receiving means, part of the insertion part)
6521d Light-transmitting hole (part of the second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylinder (part of optical conduction part)
6522 Flange part (pulled boundary surface part)
6540 compartment unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Fastening after guidance (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Protruding rib (part of restraining means)
6548 Transparent lining member (part of restraining means)
6550 Board guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extended plate part (part of the outer surface)
6554a Screw-in part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Section member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodating means, part of partition means)
6562a Enlarged hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large diameter cylindrical part (part of regulatory measures)
6570 Illuminations board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodating means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppressing means, part of notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodating means)
6720 Illuminations board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guide means)
6731 Light receiving surface part (part of the second light guide means, part of the main body part, concealed part)
6732 Inner extension (part of frame)
6733 Outer extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of the first light guide means, facing extension)
6735 fin (part of the first light guide means, detached extension part)
6736 Insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of misalignment prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R Insertion hole (part of support)
18830 Illuminations board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 streaks
D24 End streaks (part of streaks)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (bent part)
V13, V14 gap
21051 Handle support plate (predetermined member)
21410 Covering foundation member (part of the lining means, second lining part)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of lining means, first lining part)
21500 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generating means)
21520 Covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 Protruding part (part of the arrangement part)
21530 Cover member (part of intervening means, holding means)
21534 Protruding part (part of information part)
21540 Facing plate member (part of intervening means)
21541 Shell-shaped overhanging part (contact part)
De3 overhanging part (support part)
A310 rear case (opposing means)
A312 Outer wall part (part of proximity part, arrangement part, facing side)
A312a Notch (part of edge, part of proximity, facing side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate (part of edge, part of proximity, facing surface)
A73 outer edge member (part of restraining means)
75 Metal plate-like member (part of restraining means)
A86 center frame (part of the window)
A400 1st operation unit (part of the staging means)
A411 main body (part of lining means)
A415 Diffusing plate (refraction means)
A416 Illuminations board (board)
A416a Light emitting means (light emitting unit)
A416e1 1st connector (connector part)
A417 Board fixing plate (board holding means)
A417h Notch (gap forming part)
A426 detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 First displacement member (part of displacement means)
A444 Diffusion plate (transmission means)
A445b Light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission protrusion (part of the specified part)
A455e Detected plate (part of the detected part)
A456a Protruding plate part (one side functional part, loaded part)
A456b Opposing arrangement part (other side functional part, part of predetermined part)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 Pinned gear (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A464 Arc wall part (forming part, part of regulating means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 Support box (part of shielding means)
A475 Fastening part (part of preventive measures, protruding part)
A480 rear lid (part of placement means)
A483 Alignment protrusion (alignment portion)
A490 Second displacement member (part of displacement means)
A491a Axial support protrusion (1st axis)
A491d2 ridge (part of the guide)
A511 slide rack (part of the second displacement means)
A715a Light emitting means (unshielded light emitting means)
A720 rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 First rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 Shell part (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 Central rotating member (part of irradiated means)
A728 Second rotating member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 Second support (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 First detection sensor (detection means)
A763 Detected piece (detected part)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (part of displacement suppressing means)
A2729 Slide member (a part of the irradiated means, the second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A4550 Decorative member (part of displacement means)
A5001 Displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Axial support member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 Thin-walled part (part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of preventive measures)
A6562 Protruding part (part of preventive measures)
AC1 1st region (part of light emitting region)
AC2 2nd region (part of light emitting region, 1st region, 1st refracting part)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa middle part (part of predetermined part, part of weak displacement part)
KJ optical axis
UL1 upper transmission path (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 lower transmission route (part of transmission means)

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13, A13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means, part of frame means)
178 Reverse cup portion (arrangement means)
178a Wall part (second extension part)

Claims (1)

It is provided with a game board used during a game, an inner frame in which one side that can accept the game board is opened, and a front frame that can close the one side of the inner frame.
The front frame comprises disposing means disposed in a path communicating between the game board and the outside.
The disposing means is
A plate-shaped portion arranged below the game board so as to intersect the path,
The first extension that extends downward from the plate-shaped part,
A second extension portion extending downward from the plate-shaped portion and arranged to face the first extension portion is provided.
The disposing means is configured so that the inner frame can be visually recognized in a predetermined state in which the inner frame is not blocked by the front frame.
The disposing means is arranged so as not to come into contact with the game board.
The path is located between the front frame and the inner frame.
The starting position on the outer side of the path is a specific position on the outer circumference of the front frame.
The front frame comprises a forming means formed of a metallic material.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the disposing means is disposed corresponding to a predetermined position on the back surface side of the forming means.

Images